XEN Topaz Feature Specs Manual (1.5MB PDF)

XEN Topaz Feature Specs Manual (1.5MB PDF)

Xen Topaz

Features & Specifications

Manual

NEC Business Solutions Ltd

Version 1.0

August 2004

NEC-8802

Features

Table of Contents

Regulatory Information................................................................................................................... 4

About This Manual .......................................................................................................................... 7

Charts And Illustrations .................................................................................................................. 8

Location of Controls ..................................................................................................................... 34

Abbreviated Dialling...................................................................................................................... 37

Account Codes.............................................................................................................................. 41

Alarm.............................................................................................................................................. 45

Alphanumeric Display................................................................................................................... 47

Attendant Call Queuing................................................................................................................. 48

Automatic Route Selection (F-Route)........................................................................................... 49

Background Music ........................................................................................................................ 55

Barge In ......................................................................................................................................... 56

Call Forwarding ............................................................................................................................. 59

Call Forwarding, Fixed .................................................................................................................. 62

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise........................................................................................................ 64

Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial............................................................................................. 67

Call Forwarding with Follow Me ................................................................................................... 70

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override .................................................................................... 72

Call Redirect .................................................................................................................................. 73

Call Timer....................................................................................................................................... 74

Call Waiting / Camp On ................................................................................................................. 75

Callback ......................................................................................................................................... 77

Caller ID ......................................................................................................................................... 79

Central Office Calls, Answering.................................................................................................... 83

Central Office Calls, Placing ......................................................................................................... 87

Class of Service............................................................................................................................. 90

Conference .................................................................................................................................... 99

Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release..................................................................................... 102

Continued Dialling....................................................................................................................... 104

Department Calling...................................................................................................................... 106

Department Step Calling ............................................................................................................. 109

Dial Number Preview....................................................................................................................110

Dial Pad Confirmation Tone .........................................................................................................111

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)..........................................................................................................112

Direct Inward Line (DIL) ...............................................................................................................117

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)...........................................................................................119

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console ..................................................................................... 124

Directed Call Pickup.................................................................................................................... 127

Do Not Disturb............................................................................................................................. 128

Doorphone................................................................................................................................... 130

Fax Machine Compatibility.......................................................................................................... 132

Flash ............................................................................................................................................ 133

Flexible System Numbering........................................................................................................ 134

Forced Trunk Disconnect............................................................................................................ 136

Group Call Pickup ....................................................................................................................... 138

Handsfree and Monitor................................................................................................................ 140

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing ..................................................................... 142

Headset Operation....................................................................................................................... 144

Hold.............................................................................................................................................. 146

Hotline...................................................................................................................................... - 150 -

Intercom................................................................................................................................... - 152 -

ISDN Compatibility .................................................................................................................. - 154 -

LCR – Least Cost Routing....................................................................................................... - 158 -

Last Number Redial................................................................................................................. - 163 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 1 ~

Features

Line Preference ....................................................................................................................... - 165 -

Long Conversation Cutoff....................................................................................................... - 167 -

Loop keys ................................................................................................................................ - 168 -

Meet Me Conference................................................................................................................ - 171 -

Meet Me Paging ....................................................................................................................... - 175 -

Meet Me Paging Transfer ........................................................................................................ - 177 -

Memo Dial ................................................................................................................................ - 179 -

Message Waiting ..................................................................................................................... - 181 -

Microphone Mute..................................................................................................................... - 184 -

Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage .......................................................................... - 185 -

Music on Hold.......................................................................................................................... - 189 -

Name Storing........................................................................................................................... - 191 -

Night Service ........................................................................................................................... - 193 -

Off Hook Signalling ................................................................................................................. - 197 -

Paging, External ...................................................................................................................... - 199 -

Paging, Internal ....................................................................................................................... - 201 -

Park.......................................................................................................................................... - 203 -

PBX Compatibility ................................................................................................................... - 206 -

Prime Line Selection ............................................................................................................... - 208 -

Private Line.............................................................................................................................. - 210 -

Programmable Function Keys ................................................................................................ - 212 -

Repeat Redial .......................................................................................................................... - 216 -

Ring Groups ............................................................................................................................ - 218 -

Ringdown Extension, Internal / External ................................................................................ - 220 -

Room Monitor.......................................................................................................................... - 222 -

Save Number Dialled............................................................................................................... - 224 -

Secretary Call Buzzer .............................................................................................................. - 226 -

Secretary Call Pickup .............................................................................................................. - 228 -

Selectable Display Messaging ................................................................................................ - 229 -

Serial Call................................................................................................................................. - 232 -

Single Line Telephones, Analogue Sets ................................................................................. - 233 -

Station Message Detail Recording.......................................................................................... - 235 -

Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) ...................................................................... - 242 -

Time and Date.......................................................................................................................... - 245 -

Toll Restriction ........................................................................................................................ - 246 -

Toll Restriction, Dial Block...................................................................................................... - 250 -

Toll Restriction Override ......................................................................................................... - 252 -

Transfer.................................................................................................................................... - 254 -

Trunk Group Routing .............................................................................................................. - 257 -

Trunk Groups........................................................................................................................... - 259 -

Trunk Queuing/Camp On ........................................................................................................ - 261 -

Voice Mail................................................................................................................................. - 263 -

Voice Mail Service (VMS)......................................................................................................... - 267 -

Voice Response System (VRS) ............................................................................................... - 275 -

Volume Controls...................................................................................................................... - 285 -

Warning Tone For Long Conversation ................................................................................... - 286 -

~ 2 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Disclaimer

NEC shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, consequential or incidental damages about the use of this equipment, manual or any related materials.

The information in this technical manual is advisory in nature and is subject to change. NEC may make improvements and changes in the products described in this manual without notice.

Changes will be periodically made to the information in the new editions. Efforts have been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are correct. Should you find any error, NEC welcomes your comments to improve our communications. Please contact NEC on 1800 036 136.

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice at the discretion of NEC Business

Solutions Ltd.

This document has been prepared for the use of employees and customers of NEC Business

Solutions Ltd and may not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Business Solutions

Ltd.

Copyright © 2004

NEC Business Solutions Ltd

633 - 647 Springvale Road

Mulgrave Vic 3170

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 3 ~

Features

Section 1 Regulatory Information

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

W

ARNING

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Incidence of Harm

If the System is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone network. The Telephone system should be disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until repair has been made. If this is not done, the Network Provider may temporarily disconnect the service.

Hearing Aid Compatibility

The NEC Multiline Terminals that are provided for this system are hearing aid compatible. The manufacturer of Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of hearing aid compatibility to comply with ACA Technical Standards.

Service Requirements

W

ARNING

This equipment must only be installed and maintained by service personnel.

In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs must be performed by an authorised dealer of NEC

Business Solutions Ltd or by NEC Business Solutions Ltd. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to one of NEC Business Solutions Ltd authorised agents or to

NEC Business Solutions Ltd.

Compliance Information

This equipment has been tested to comply with all relevant ACA Technical Standards.

The Xen Topaz KSU must be permanently connected to protective earth, via the earth terminal inside the KSU.

~ 4 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Voice Announcement/Monitoring

C

AUTION

The use of monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sounds activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation.

Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to the telephone conversation. The Telecommunications (Interception) Act 1979 (Cth), the Telecommunications Act

1997, The Privacy Act 1988 and State and Territory Listening Devices Legislation are all relevant.

Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a telephone conversation.

Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties. Section 6 of the Industry Guidelines recommend pre-recorded messages or verbal notification to alert callers that the calls may be monitored: For example, “your call may be listened to and recorded for quality and coaching purposes. Please tell the consultant if you don’t want this to happen.”

Section 6 of the Industry Guidelines also make recommendations in relation to notifications in writing.

Music on Hold

I

MPORTANT

N

OTE

In accordance with Australian Copyright Law, a license may be required from The Australian

Performing Right Association Limited (APRA), or other similar organisation, when radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold feature of this telecommunication system. NEC

Business Solutions Ltd hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.

Battery Disposal and Safety

This system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries, KSUs and/or cards, you must comply with applicable Federal and State regulations regarding proper disposal procedures.

I

MPORTANT

S

AFEGUARDS FOR

B

ATTERY

D

ISPOSAL

The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries with the municipal solid waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact your local solid waste management officials for other information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery.

Nickel-Cadmium or sealed lead batteries must be returned to a Federal or State approved nickel-cadmium or sealed lead battery recycler. This may be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive batteries. Contact your local waste management officials for other

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 5 ~

Features

information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery contained in this product.

Unit Name

IP2AT-924M KSU

Battery Types and Quantities

Type of Battery

Lithium

Quantity

1

2/4

C

AUTION

Danger of explosion if batteries are incorrectly installed. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery as indicated throughout this manual.

Connection Requirements for Earthing the Topaz KSU

Because this Topaz KSU has been ACA approved as an Earthed-SELV Customer Switching System for connection to a telecommunications network, the KSU Earth terminal (on the 308M System

2

Mainboard) MUST be permanently connected to Earth by connecting a minimum of 2.5mm

green/yellow conductor cable.

This cable MUST be connected between a Multiple Earth Neutral (MEN) Bonding Bar at the nearest convenient mains Switch Board to the KSU. This cable must serve no other purpose than installing the KSU.

CAUTION: If this cable is not installed or requires disconnection, then the telecommunication network connection(s), namely CO and/or ISDN, must be disconnected first from the KSU.

Liability for this installation rests solely with the licensed installer/dealer. It is recommended that the installer provide their label and it is to be placed in the Main Switch Board, certifying that the installation complies with the safety earthing installation manual instructions for the Topaz KSU

Section 3.1.

(Technical References: AS/NZS 60950:2000, ACIF S009:2001. See Protective Earthing Conductor requirements.)

~ 6 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

About This Manual

Section 2 – Features

Before Reading This Section

This section provides detailed information on the system’s features. If you don’t know what the various features are, review the Table of Contents for this section and the manual’s Index. After reviewing, turn back to this section for the specifics.

Using This Section

The features in this section are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary. This section subdivides each feature definition into headings as follows:

The Compatibility Chart at the top of each feature shows you if the feature is available for each system and what system software is required.

Description tells what the feature is and describes its benefits. Along with the Description are the Conditions and Default Setting. Conditions provides the feature’s operational limits (if any). Default Setting outlines how the feature works with the default programming. When initially installed, the system uses the default setting. For specific default settings on each program, refer to the chart at the end of this book.

Programming explains the system programming that lets you customize the feature. Some features require programming; other’s don’t. If you decide to customize a feature, use Section 2 to enter the change into the system.

Related Features presents the feature interaction.

Operation consists of instructions on how to use each feature.

Read These Notes

Simplifying System Phone Operation with One-Touch Keys

A system phone user can access many features through Service Codes (e.g., Service Code 841 leaves a Message

Waiting for a co-worker). To streamline the operation of their phone, a system phone user can store these codes under One-Touch Keys. This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To find out more, turn to the

One-Touch Calling and One-Touch Serial Operation features.

Programmable Keys

When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar to (PGM 15-07 or SC

9nn). This means that the key requires function code nnn, and you can program this code through Program

15-07 or by dialling Service Code 851 or 852. Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information.

Using Handsfree

The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just press a line key or CALL key to answer or place a call. For extensions without Automatic Handsfree, the user must:

Lift the handset or press SPK for Intercom dial tone

Lift the handset or press SPK, then press a line key for trunk dial tone

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 7 ~

Features

Charts And Illustrations

Table 1: Post Dialling Service Codes

Dial This… For this feature. . .

1 Handsfree Answerback / Forced intercom

Ringing

2

*

0

Step Call

Intercom Off-Hook Signalling

Camp On

When you are. . .

Changing the signalling mode of your outgoing

Intercom call

Calling a busy station

Calling a busy station

Calling a busy station

~ 8 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Dial this Service Code…

1

When you are. . . For this feature. . .

1

Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone

* + Enter Account Code + *

(e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Entering an Account Code Account Codes

715 + Extension No.

Picking up a call ringing or waiting at another extension

Directed Call Pickup

Voice Response

System (VRS)

867

Picking up a call ringing an extension in your own pickup group (including Ring Group calls)

Group Call Pickup

841

Intercom Off-Hook Signalling Message Waiting

833

Setting the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line

Also see

Function Key. . .

-

-

24

38

Transfer -

834

Cancelling the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line

Transfer -

835

751

888 + 0

888 + 1 + Type (2-4)

Setting the Destination for

Automatic Trunk Transfer

Making a Combined Page

Cancelling Call Forwarding

Activating Personal Answering

Machine Emulation

Transfer -

Paging

Call Forwarding

Voice Mail (Personal

Answering Machine

Emulation)

-

16

16

888 + 2 + Destination +

Type (2-4)

888 + 3 + Destination +

Type (2-4)

888 + 4 + Destination +

Type (2-4)

888 + 6 + Destination +

Type (2-4)

888 + 7 + Destination +

Type (2-4)

724 (After #9 805 + 01-51 + busy)

713 + 3 + Message (01-20), or *4 713 + 3 + Hang up to cancel

713 + 6 + Trunk access code + Outside number, or

713 + 6 + Hold + Hang up to cancel

713 + 7 + Record message +

# + Condition (2, 4, 6 or 7)

+ Destination + Type (2 or

3) or *4 713 + 7 + 3 to cancel

Activating Call Forwarding when

Busy/Not Answered

Activating Call Forward Follow

Me at the destination extension

Activating Call Forwarding

Immediate

Activating Call Forwarding when

Unanswered (delayed)

Activating Call Forwarding (Both

Ringing)

Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk

Activating and cancelling

Selectable Display Messaging

Forwarding your calls to an off-premise telephone number

Recording, listening to or erasing a

Personal Greeting or Park and

Page

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding with

Follow Me

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Forced Trunk

Disconnect

Selectable Display

Messaging

Call Forwarding

Off-Premise

Voice Response

System (VRS)

(Personal Greeting)

16

16

16

16

16

-

17

17

17

861 + Orbit (01-64)

894

Picking up a call parked in a system Park orbit (01-64)

Splitting (switching) between calls Call Waiting / Camp -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 9 ~

Features

Dial this Service Code…

1

Table 2: Service Codes by Number

When you are. . . For this feature. . .

1

Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone

(e.g., press idle CALL key first). on an SLT On

884

6321

6322

Hookflash + ## 891 + Enter

Account Code + Hookflash

872

Calling your mailbox

Entering the system programming mode

Backing up system data

Entering an Account Code at an

SLT

Using Universal Answer Code to pick up a call ringing over the paging system

Voice Mail Integration

System Programming

Password Protection

Maintenance

Account Codes

Central Office Calls,

Answering

Hookflash + #1 826 + extension + hookflash twice

Activating Conference from a

Single Line set

Also see

Function Key. . .

67

-

-

-

-

Conference -

* + bin

806

814 + bin

Dialling a Common Personal

Abbreviated Dialling number

Flashing a trunk from an SLT

Dialling a group Abbreviated

Dialling number

Abbreviated Dialling

Flash

Abbreviated Dialling

27

-

28

#

831 + orbit (01-64)

Using Last Number Redial

Parking a call in a system Park orbit (1-8, 01-32 or 01-64)

Last Number Redial

Park

-

*04 + orbit

(1-64)

753

805 + 01 -51

1 (Off-hook)

4 (On-hook)

6 (On-hook)

8 (On-hook)

0

700 + code + 0

701 + code + 0

Setting up an Unsupervised

Conference

Placing a call over a specific trunk

Changing the signalling mode of your outgoing Intercom call

Listening to the General Message

Checking an extension’s number

Listening for the time

Placing a call using ARS or Trunk

Group Routing

Using Dial Block

A supervisor using Dial Block

Tandem Trunking

(Unsupervised

Conference)

Central Office Calls,

Placing

Handsfree

Answerback/Forced

Intercom Ringing

Voice Response

System (VRS)

Voice Response

System (VRS)

Voice Response

System (VRS)

Automatic Route

Selection Trunk Group

Routing

Toll Restriction, Dial

Block

Toll Restriction, Dial

Block

-

*01 + trunk

(001-51)

-

-

-

-

*02

-

-

702 + Group number

(01-32)

Setting Automatic Transfer Setup for each extension group

Transfer -

~ 10 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Dial this Service Code…

1

When you are. . . For this feature. . .

1

Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone

(e.g., press idle CALL key first).

703 + Group number

(01-32)

Cancelling Automatic Transfer

Setup

Also see

Function Key. . .

Transfer -

704 + Group number

(01-32) + mode + extension

Setting the destination for

Automatic Transfer Setup for each extension group

Setting Delayed Transfer for each extension group (on no answer)

Transfer -

Transfer -

705 + Group number

(01-32)

706 + Group number

(01-32)

707 + Group number

(01-32)

708 + Group number

(01-32)

711

712 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record

716 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record

718

Cancelling Delayed Transfer

Setting up DND for each extension group

Cancelling DND for each extension group

SLT Listening to the General

Message

Recording, listening to or erasing the General Message

Recording, listening to or erasing a

VRS Message

Night Mode Switching for other group

Transfer

Voice Response

System (VRS)

Voice Response

System (VRS)

Voice Response System (VRS)

Night Answer

-

Transfer -

Transfer -

-

-

-

720

721

722

723

726

745

750 + 0 (install) or 1

(remove)

754

Common Cancelling Service Code

Print the SMDR Extension Accumulated printout

Print the SMDR Group

Accumulated printout

Print the SMDR Account Code

Accumulated printout

Leaving a message at an extension, without first calling that extension

Trunk Port Disable

Logging in (0) or logging out (1) for your Department Calling

Group

Enabling Conversation Record at an SLT set

TBD

Station Message Detail

Recording (SMDR)

Station Message Detail

Recording (SMDR)

Station Message Detail

Recording (SMDR)

Message Waiting

TBD

Department Calling

Voice Mail

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

763 + 6-digit code + line + phone number

Overriding Toll Restriction Toll Restriction -

772 + Line number (01-51)

777

778

725

771

Answering a call on a specific trunk

Changing the COS of another extension. Must be allowed in

Program 20-13-28.

Displaying the language of the system.

Live Monitoring

Charge Cost Display by the supervisor.

Central Office Calls,

Answering Hold

Class of Service

Voice Mail

Station Message Detail

Recording

-

Maintenance -

-

-

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 11 ~

Features

Dial this Service Code…

1

774

780

Table 2: Service Codes by Number

When you are. . . For this feature. . .

1

Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone

(e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Entry Credit for Toll Restriction Toll Restriction

Change to STG All Ring Ring Groups

800 + extension # + enter name + HOLD

801 + zone (1-9 or 01-32)

801 + zone (0 or 00)

Programming extension names

Making an Internal Zone Page

Making an All Call Internal Page

802 + Doorphone (1-6) Placing a call to a Doorphone

803 + zone (1-6) Making an External Zone page

803 + zone (0)

804 + trunk group (1-9 or

01-51)

Making an External All Call page

Placing an outside call over a trunk group

807

808

809

810

812

Overriding Do Not Disturb or Call

Forwarding

Stepping through a Department

Group

Sending a Call Waiting tone to a busy extension

Breaking into another extension’s call

Changing the signal type for calling an extension

Name Storing

Paging, Internal

Doorphone

External Paging

Central Office Calls,

Placing

Call Forwarding

Do Not Disturb

Department Step

Calling

Call Waiting

Barge In

Also see

Function Key. . .

-

-

55

21 + zone 22

-

19 + zone

20

*02 + group

37

36

33

-

Intercom -

815

818 + 1

818 + 2

818 + 3

818 + 4

818 + 5

818 + 6

818 + 7

818 + 8

Saving a number (from SLT) or dialling a saved number

Activating Day 1 Mode

Activating Night 1 Mode

Activating Midnight 1 Mode

Activating Rest 1 Mode

Activating Day 2 Mode

Activating Night 2 Mode

Activating Midnight 2 Mode

Activating Rest 2 Mode

Save Number Dialled

Night Service

30

09 + 1

09 + 2

09 + 3

09 + 4

09 + 5

09 + 6

09 + 7

09 + 8

821

Enabling Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls

Handsfree

Answerback/Forced

Intercom Ringing

-

822

823

824

Calling off-premise with a

Doorphone

Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming Intercom calls

Call Forwarding,

Off-Premise

Doorphone

Handsfree

Answerback/ Forced

Intercom ringing

Dialling Pad

Confirmation tone

54

-

-

825

827 + 1 or 2 + time, or 827

+ 1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel

828 + hour + minutes

829

Enabling/disabling Dial Pad

Confirmation Tone

Turning Background Music on and off

Checking, setting or cancelling an alarm

Setting the system Time

Checking or changing ring

Background Music

Alarm

Time and Date

Volume Control

04

-

-

~ 12 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Dial this Service Code…

1

volume

Table 2: Service Codes by Number

When you are. . . For this feature. . .

(e.g., press idle CALL key first).

1

Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone

-

832 Placing a call on Group Hold

836

840

Text Message Setting

System alarm message delete

Hold

Select Display

Messaging

-

842

843

844

845

846

848

Setting Call Forward (Both Ring)

Setting Call Forward (Busy)

Setting Call Forward (Busy/No

Answer)

Setting Call Forward (No Answer)

Setting Call Forward (Follow Me)

Setting Call Forward

(Immediate)

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

847 +

0 (Cancel)

1 (Trunk calls)

2 (Paging, ICM, Call

Forward and transfers)

3 (All calls)

4 (Call Forwards)

Activating Do Not Disturb

Do Not Disturb

849

850

851 + key + code

Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a SLT set.

Camping On to an extension when calling into the system through the

VRS

Changing the function of a programmable key using 851 service codes

Hold

Voice Response

System (VRS)

Programmable

Function Keys

852 + key + code

Changing the function of a programmable key using 852 service codes

One-Touch Serial

Operation

853 + bin + number +

HOLD + Name + HOLD to store

854 + bin + number +

HOLD + Name + HOLD to store

855 + One Touch key + code

Storing Common Abbreviated

Dialling numbers

Storing Group Abbreviated

Dialling numbers

Abbreviated Dialling

Abbreviated Dialling

One-Touch Dialling

856

773

859

862

Programming a One-Touch Key or

Personal Speed Dial

Answering a call ringing a phone in your pickup group (except Ring

Group calls)

Parking a call or picking up a parked call at an extension

Retrieving a call from Exclusive

Hold at a DSL/SLT set.

Picking up a call from Group Hold

Group Call Pickup

Park

Hold

Hold

Also see

Function Key. . .

-

-

-

-

14

11

13

12

15

10

-

-

35

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 13 ~

Features

Dial this Service Code…

1

Table 2: Service Codes by Number

When you are. . . For this feature. . .

863

864 + zone paged

(0-9 or 00-32)

1

Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone

(e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Joining a Meet Me Conference or

Meet Me Page on an Internal

Paging Zone (if your extension is in the group called)

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging

865 + zone (0-6)

Joining a Meet Me Conference or

Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the group paged

Joining a Meet Me Conference or

Meet Me Page on an External

Paging Zone

Meet Me Paging

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging

866 Using trunk access via Networking

Networking

868 + pickup group

(1-9 or 01-32)

869

Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group (except

Ring Group calls)

Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group if you don’t know the group’s number

(except Ring Group Calls)

Group Call Pickup

Group Call Pickup

870

871 + ext

873

Cancelling a Callback request

Cancelling Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension

Cancelling all Messages Waiting you have left at other extensions

Callback

Message Waiting

Message Waiting

875 + pswd (0000) + place outside call

876

Temporarily overriding an extension’s Toll Restriction

Clearing number saved by Last

Number Redial

Toll Restriction

Override

Last Number Redial

881 + 00 (no tone), 01

(general) or 02 (holiday)

Changing the Music on Hold Tone Music on Hold

882

883

Routing ANI/DNIS to the VRS. It can also be used when transferring to VRS.

Enabling the data communication auto-answer mode

Transfer

Voice Response

Service (VRS)

Data Communications

Voice Response

Service (VRS)

885

894

899

Clearing the number saved by

Save Number Redial

Splitting between two calls on an

SLT

Testing Callback operation for

SLT

Save Number Redial

Call Waiting

Also see

Function Key. . .

23 or 32

23 or 32

23 or 32

-

26 + group

25

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Callback -

~ 14 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Table: 3. Service Codes by Feature

For this feature... Dial this Service Code...

1

When you are...

Also see Function

Key...

1

Except where indicated, dial Service code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

853 + bin + number + HOLD

+ Name + HOLD to store

Storing Common Abbreviated Dialling numbers

-

-

Abbreviated Dialling

854 + bin + number + HOLD +

Name + HOLD to store

* + bin

Storing Group Abbreviated Dialling numbers

Dialling a Common Abbreviated Dialling number

27

28

Account Codes

Alarm

814 + bin Dialling a Group Abbreviated Dialling number

* + Enter Account code + * Entering an Account Code

Hookflash + 891 + Enter account code + Hookflash

827 + 1 or 2 + time, or 827 + 1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel

Entering an Account Code at an SLT

Checking, setting or cancelling an alarm

0 Placing an call using Trunk Group

Routing or Automatic Route Selection

-

-

-

*02 Automatic Route

Selection or Trunk

Group Routing

Background Music

Call Forwarding

825

888 + 0

842 + 1 + Destination

04

16

14

Call Forwarding

Off-Premise

843 + 1 + Destination

844 + 1 + Destination

845 + 1 + Destination

846 + 1 + Destination

848 + 1 + Destination

713 + 6 + Trunk access code

+ Outside number, or

713 + 6 + Hold + Hang up to cancel

822

Turning Background Music on and off

Cancelling Call Forwarding

Activating Call Forwarding

(Both Ringing)

Activating Call Forwarding when Busy

Activating Call Forwarding when Busy/

Not Answered

Activating Call Forwarding when

Unanswered (delayed)

Activating Call Forwarding Follow Me

Activating Call Forwarding Immediate

Forwarding your calls to an off-premise telephone number

Calling off-premise with a Doorphone

11

13

12

15

10

17

54 Call Forwarding, Off-

Premise

Doorphone

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Override

Call Forwarding with

Follow Me

Call Waiting / Camp On

807

888 + 3 + Destination + Type

(2-4)

894

Overriding an extension’s Call Forward or

DND setting.

Activating Call Forward Follow Me at the destination extension

Splitting (switching) between calls on an

SLT

37

16

-

Callback / Camp On /

Trunk Queuing

Central Office Calls,

Answering /

Hold

870

899

Cancelling a Callback request

Testing Callback operation for SLT

872 Using Universal Answer to pick up a call ringing over the paging system

772 + Line number (01-51) Answering a call on a specific trunk

799 + 1 (set) or 0 (cancel) Changing the ability for a second call with

DID/DISA/DIL

-

-

-

-

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 15 ~

Features

Central Office Calls,

Placing

Table: 3. Service Codes by Feature

For this feature... Dial this Service Code...

805 + 01-51

1

When you are...

Also see Function

Key...

Placing a call over a specific trunk *01 + trunk

(01-51)

Placing an outside call over a trunk group *02 + group

Class of Service

804 + trunk group (1-9 or

01-51)

777 -

Department Calling hookflash twice

750 + 0 (install) or

1 (remove)

Changing the COS of another extension.

Must be allowed in Program 20-13-28.

Activating Conference from a Single Line set

Logging in (0) or logging out (1) for your

Department Calling Group

1016

46

Dial Pad Confirmation

Tone

Directed Call Pickup

Do Not Disturb

Doorphone

Flash

Forced Trunk

Disconnect

Group Call Pickup

824 Enabling/disabling Dial Pad

Confirmation Tone

815 + ext. Picking up a call ringing or waiting at an extension

Activating Do Not Disturb 847 + 0 (Cancel)

1 (Trunk calls)

2 (Paging, ICM, Call

Forwards, and Transfers)

3 (All calls)

4 (Call Forwards)

802 + Doorphone (1-6)

822

Placing a call to a door Box

A Doorphone is forwarded off-premise

806 Flashing a trunk from an SLT

724 (after 805 + 01-51 + busy) Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk

867

Handsfree

Answerback/Forced

Intercom Ringing

Hold

Message Waiting

Last Number Redial

868 + pickup group (1-9 or

01-32)

869

1 (Off-hook)

821

823

832

849

859

862

726

#

876

Picking up a call ringing an extension in your own pickup group (except Ring

Group calls)

Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group

Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group if you don’t know the group’s number (except Ring Group calls)

Changing the signalling mode of your outgoing Intercom call

Enabling Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls

Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming

Intercom calls

Placing a call on Group Hold

Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a SLT set

Retrieving a call from Exclusive Hold at a

DSL

Picking up a call from Group Hold

Leaving a message at an extension, without first calling that extension

Using Last Number Redial

Clearing number saved by Last Number

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

24

26 + group

25

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~ 16 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

For this feature...

Table: 3. Service Codes by Feature

Dial this Service Code...

1

When you are...

Also see Function

Key...

Redial

Maintenance 6322 Backing up system data -

863

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging

864 + zone paged

(0-9 or 00-32)

Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me

Page on an Internal Paging Zone (if your extension is in the group called)

Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me

Page if your extension is not in the group paged

23 (Meet Me

Paging) or 32 (Meet Me

Conference)

-

865 + zone (0-8) Joining a Meet Me conference or Meet Me

Page on an External Paging Zone.

-

Message Waiting

841

871 + ext

873

Answering a Message Waiting request

Cancelling Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension

Cancelling all Messages Waiting you have left at other extensions

Changing the Music on Hold Tone Music on Hold 881 + 00 (no tone), 01 (general) or 02 (holiday)

Name Storing

Night Service

800 + enter name + HOLD

718

Programming extension names

Night Mode Switching for other group

38

-

-

-

Off Hook Signalling 809

One-Touch Dialling 855 + One-Touch key + code Programming a One-Touch Key or

Personal Speed Dial

Paging, Combined 751 + Zone (1-6)

751 + Zone (0)

Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy extension

Making a combined zone page.

Making a combined All Call page.

Paging, External

818 + 1

818 + 2

818 + 3

818 + 4

818 + 5

818 + 6

818 + 7

Activating Night 1 Mode

Activating Midnight 1 Mode

Activating Rest 1 Mode

Activating Day 2 Mode

Activating Night 2 Mode

Activating Midnight 2 Mode

Activating Rest 2 Mode

Paging, Internal

Park

803 + zone (1-6)

803 + zone (0)

801 + zone (1-9 or 01-32)

801 + zone (0 or 00)

831 + orbit (01-64)

861 + orbit ( 01-64)

Making an external zone page

Making an external All Call page

Making an Internal Zone Page

Making an internal All Call Page

Parking a call in a system Park orbit (01-

64)

Picking up a call parked in a system Park orbit (01-64)

773

Programmable

Function Keys

Ring Groups

851 + key + code

852 + key + code

780

Parking a call or picking up a parked call at an extension

Changing the function of a programmable key using 851 service codes

Changing the function of a programmable key using 852 service codes

Change to STG All Ring

55

09 + 0

09 + 1

09 + 2

09 + 3

09 + 4

09 + 5

09 + 6

09 + 7

33

-

19 + zone

20

19 + zone

20

21 + zone or

22

*04 + orbit

*04 + orbit

-

-

-

-

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 17 ~

Features

For this feature...

Table: 3. Service Codes by Feature

Dial this Service Code...

1

When you are...

Save Number Dialled

Selectable Display

Messaging

Station Message Detail

Recording

815

885

713 + 3 + message (01-20), or

713 + 3 + Hang up to cancel

836

Selectable Ring Tones 811 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (Trk) + tone

(1-8)

System Programming

Password Protection

820 + 1 (ICM) + 2 (Trk) + tone

(1-8)

6321

721

722

723

Saving a number (from Station Group) or dialling a saved number

Clearing the number saved by Save

Number Redial number

Activating and Cancelling Selectable

Display Messaging

Text Message Setting

Listening to the incoming ring choices

Changing your extension’s incoming ring tones

Entering the system programming mode

Print the SMDR Extension Accumulated printout

Print the SMDR Group Accumulated printout

Print the SMDR Account Code Accumu lated printout

Also see Function

Key...

30

-

17

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Time and Date

Toll Restriction, Dial

Block

828 + hour + minutes

700 + code + 0

701 + code + 0

Setting the system Time

Using Dial Block

A supervisor using Dial Block

Toll Restriction

Override

Transfer

875 + pswd (0000) + place outside call

763 + digit digit code + line + telephone number

833

Temporarily overriding an extension’s Toll

Restriction

Overriding Toll Restriction

Setting the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line

834 Cancelling the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line

835 Setting the Destination for Automatic

Trunk Transfer

702 + Group number (01-32) Setting Automatic Transfer Setup for each extension group

Trunk Group Routing or

Automatic Route

Selection

703 + Group number (01-32) Cancelling Automatic Transfer Setup

704 + Group number (01-32) + mode + extension

Setting the destination for Automatic

Transfer Setup for each extension group

705 + Group number (01-32) Setting Delayed Transfer for each exten sion group

706 + Group number (01-32) Cancelling Delayed Transfer

707 + Group number (01-32) Setting up DND for each extension group

708 + Group number (01-32) Cancelling DND for each extension group

0 Placing a call using Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

*02

-

-

-

-

-

-

~ 18 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

For this feature...

Table: 3. Service Codes by Feature

Dial this Service Code...

1

When you are...

Also see Function

Key...

Voice Mail 888 + 1 + Type (2-4) Activating Personal Answering Machine

Emulation

Voice Response System

(VRS)

815 + ringing ext.

713 + 7 + Record message + #

+ Condition (2, 4,6 or 7) +

Destination+ Type (2 or 3). or

713 + 7 + 3 to cancel

4 (On-hook)

6 (On-hook)

8 (On-hook)

711

712 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record

716 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record

850

Picking up a call ringing another exten sion for Directed Call Pickup or VRS Park and

Page.

Recording, listening to or erasing a

Personal Greeting or Park and Page

Listening to the General Message

Checking an extension’s number

Listening for the time

SLT listening to the General Message

Recording, listening to or erasing the

General Message

Recording, listening to or erasing a VRS

Message

Camping On to an extension when calling into the system through the VRS

Volume Control

Common Cancel code

Trunk Port Disable

829

720

745

Checking or changing ring volume

Common Cancelling Service Code

Trunk Port Disable

-

67

-

17

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 19 ~

Features

Table: 4. Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See

Srvc Code

Abbreviated Dialling

Account Codes

Background Music

Barge In

Call Coverage

Call Forwarding,

Dual Ring

Code: 27

Operation: Press key + bin + Line or CALL

Code: 28

Operation: Press key + bin + Line or CALL key

Code: 50

Operation: Press key +

Dial Account Code

Code: 04

Operation: Press key

Code: 34

Operation: Call ext +

Press key

Code: *03 + ext.

Operation: Press key

Dialling a stored Common

Abbreviated Dialling number

Dialling a stored Group

Abbreviated Dialling number

Entering Account Codes

Turning Background Music on or off

Barging In on a co-worker’s conversation

Placing or answering a call to your co-worker’s extension

None

None 825

None 810

Slow Flash red when ringing, On red when busy

Slowly flashes red

*

-

888 + 7

Call Forwarding,

Busy

Call Forwarding,

Busy/No Answer

Call Forwarding,

Device

Call Forwarding,

External by

Doorphone

Call Forwarding,

Follow Me

Call Forwarding,

Immediate

Call Forwarding, No

Answer

Call Forwarding,

Off-Premise

Call Forwarding,

Station

Code: 14

Operation: Press key +

1/0 + Dest. Extension

Code: 11

Operation: Press key +

1/0 + Dest. Extension

Code: 13

Operation: Press key +

Dest. Extension

Code: 17

Operation: Press key + type

Code: 54

Operation: Press key +

Dest. Number

Code: 15

Operation: Press key +

3/0 + Dest. Extension +

Type

Code: 10

Operation: Press key +

1/0 + Dest. Extension

Code: 12

Operation: Press key +

1/0 + Dest. Extension

Code: 17

Operation: Press key + device type code + requested data (depends on device selected).

Code: 16

Operation: Press key +

Call Forwarding Dual Ring to extension

Call Forwarding Busy to extension or Voice Mail

Call Forwarding Busy/No

Answer to extension or Voice

Mail

Call Forwarding Device to a device or Voice Mail

Externally Call Forwarding

Doorphone calls

Call Forwarding Follow Me to extension or Voice Mail

Call Forwarding Immediate to extension or Voice Mail

Call Forwarding No Answer to extension or Voice Mail

Setting up Call Forwarding

Off-Premise, Selectable

Display Messaging, VRS Park and Page and VRS

Personal Greeting

Call Forwarding Station to extension or Voice Mail

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

888 + 2

888 + 2

713

713

888 + 3

888 + 4

888 + 6

713

888

~ 20 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Table: 4. Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See

Srvc Code

Call Forwarding / Do

Not Disturb Override

Callback / Camp On/

Trunk Queuing

Condition + Dest.

Extension + Type

Code: 37

Operation: Call extension + Press key

Code: 35

Operation: Call busy

Call Redirect extension or access busy trunk + Press key

Code: 49 + extension or voice mail

Operation: Press key

Central Office Calls Code: *01 + Trunk number (01-51)

Operation: Press key

Conference

Overriding an extension’s Call

Forwarding or Do Not Disturb

Leaving a Call back request at a busy extension, Camping On to a busy extension, or

Queuing for a busy trunk

Redirect a ringing call to the predefined destination

Pressing a line key to place or answer a trunk call (where trunks are 01-51)

Setting up a Conference or a

Meet Me Conference

None -

On red when activated

On red when activated

On green when seized, on red when in use (by other party), Slow Flash green when ringing,

Hold flash when on

Hold

On red during setup

-

-

805

826

Conference,Voice

Call

Data

Communications

Department

Calling

Code: 07

Operation: Set up call +

Press key + set up call to add + Press key twice

Code: 32

Operation: Set up trunk call + Press key

Code: 66

Operation: Press key + ext or outside number

Code: 46

Operation: Press Key

Setting up a Voice Call

Conference

Placing a data call

None -

On red when call set up

On when removed,

Off when installed

-

750

Department Step

Calling

Direct Station

Selection

Do Not Disturb

Do Not Disturb/Call

Forward Override

Group Call Pickup

Code: 36

Operation: Dial busy ext

+ Press key

Code: 01

Operation: Press key

Code: 03

Operation: Press key + code (0-4)

Code: 37

Operation: Press key

Code: 24

Operation: CALL +

Press key

Code: 25

Operation: CALL +

Press key

Logging in or logging out of your Department Calling

Group

Stepping through a

Department Group for an idle member

Calling an extension using a

DSS key

Setting your phone in DND

Calling an extension which is in DND or Call Forwarded

Answering a call ringing another phone in your Pickup

Group

Answering a call ringing a phone in another Pickup

Group - if you don’t know the group number

None -

Off = extension idle

On = extension busy

Flashing = DND

DND key on red

-

-

None -

None 867

None 869

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 21 ~

Features

Table: 4. Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See

Srvc Code

None 868

Handset Mute

Code: 26 + Pickup Group

(1-9 or 01-32)

Operation: CALL + Press key + Pkup Group

Code: 40

Operation: Press key

Answering a call ringing a phone in a specific Pickup

Group

Muting the handset transmission while on a call

Hotline

Headset Operation

Hold

Incoming Caller ID

List (Answered and

Missed calls)

Loop Keys

Code: 01 + dest. ext

Operation: Press key

Code: 05

Operation: Press key

Code: 44

Operation: Place or answer call + Press key

Code: 45

Operation: Place or answer call + Press key

Code: 08

Operation: Press key

Placing a call to your Hotline partner

Enabling or disabling

Headset Operation

Putting a call on System Hold

(if your phone’s Hold key is reassigned)

Putting a call on Exclusive

Hold

Viewing answered and missed trunk calls

On when feature active (no transmission on handset)

Full BLF (red) for covered ext.

On red when activated

-

-

834

None -

None -

Flashing when missed call stored

-

-

Meet Me Conference

(Also see

Conference)

Meet Me Paging

Code: *05 + 0

(Incoming), 1 (Outgoing) or 2 (Both Ways) + 00 (All trunk groups incoming or

ARS outgoing) or Trunk group (01-25).

Operation: Press Key

Code: 32

Operation: Press key

Placing or answering a trunk call

Joining a Meet Me

Conference

Joining a Meet Me Page

Flashing red when ringing

On green when in use

Flashing green when on hold

None

None

863 or 864

863 or 864

Memo Dial

Message Waiting

Microphone Mute

Multiple Directory

Numbers

Code: 23

Operation: Press key

Code: 31

Operation:

Store: While on call, press key + number to store

Use: Press Key + Call or line

Erase: CALL + Press key

Code: 38

Operation: Leave message: Call ext + Press key

OR Answer message:

Press key

Code: 40

Operation: Set up call +

Press key

Code: *03 + ext. or dept group

Operation: Press key

Storing, using or checking a

Memo dial number

Answering/Leaving a

Message Waiting

Using Microphone Mute

Placing or answering a call to your virtual (phantom) extension

None -

None 841

On red when activated

Slow Flash red when ringing, On red when busy

-

-

~ 22 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Table: 4. Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... Use this key... When your are...

Name Storing

Key Lamp Status Also See

Srvc Code

None 800

Night Service

Off Hook Signalling

Paging, External

Paging, Internal

Park

Repeat Redial

Room Monitor

Save Number Dialled

Secretary Call

(Buzzer)

Code: 55

Operation: Press key + ext # + name + HOLD

Code: 09 + mode (1-8)

Operation: Press key

Code: 33

Operation: Call ext. and receive busy + Press key

Code: 19 + zone (1-6)

Operation: Press Key

Code: 20

Operation: Press key

Code: 21 + zone

(1-9 or 01-32)

Operation: Press key

Code: 2

Operation: Press key

Code: *04 + orbit (1-9 or

01-64)

Operation: Place or answer call + Press key

Code: 29

Operation: Place call and press key

Code: 39

Operation: Press key at destination & source + ext

Code: 30

Operation:

Save: Place call + Press key

Redial: Line or CALL +

Press key

Code: 41 + sec. ext

Operation: Press key

Entering a name for the extension to be displayed on telephones

Activating the Day/Night

Mode

Signalling a busy extension

Making an external zone page

Making an external All Call page

Broadcasting to an Internal

Paging Zone

Broadcasting to all Internal

Paging zones

Placing a call into or retrieving a call from a Park

Orbit

Activating Repeat Redial while on a call

Activating Room Monitor

Saving, redialling or checking a saved number

Calling your secretary (using the buzzer)

On red when activated

None

On red when activated

On red when activated

On red when activated

On red when activated

Fast flash when orbit is busy (green at originator, red at others)

Fast Flash while system waits to redial

Dest. Fast Flash red,

Source Hold Flash red

818 +

+ 0

-

803 + zone

803 + 0

801 + zone

801 + 0 or 00

831 (Park)

861 (pickup)

-

-

None -

-

Secretary Call Pickup

Selectable Display

Messaging

Serial Call

Code: 42 + boss ext

Operation: Press key

Code: 18

Operation: Press key + additional data if needed

A secretary picking up a call ringing your boss’s extension

Setting up Call Forwarding

Off-Premise, Selectable

Display Messaging, VRS Park and Page and VRS

Personal Greeting

Placing a Serial Call to a co-worker

On red at source Fast

Flash red at destination

On red when activated

Flashes red when activated

-

713

None -

Step Call

Transfer

Code: 43

Operation: Trk call +

Hold + ext + Press key

Code: 36

Operation: Press key

Code: 06

Operation: Establish call

Stepping through a department group

Transferring a call

None -

None -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 23 ~

Features

Table: 4. Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See

Srvc Code

Trunk Group

Routing

Trunk Groups

Trunk Queuing

Voice Response

System (VRS) (Park and Page) (Personal

Greeting)

Voice Mail

Automated

Attendant for

Extension

Message

Change for Voice

Attendant

+ Hold + Ext + Press key

Code: *05

Operation: Press key

Code: *02 + Trunk group

(1-9 or 01-51)

Operation: Press key

Accessing a trunk using Trunk

Group Routing

Using a trunk group key to access a Trunk Group

Code: 35

Operation: Hear busy tone for Trk + Press key

Code: 17

Operation: Press key + device type code + requested data (depends on device selected).

Code: 67 + extension or

Message Center number

Operation: Press key

Camping On or Queuing for a trunk

Setting up Call Forwarding

Off-Premise, Selectable

Display Messaging, VRS Park and Page and VRS

Personal Greeting

Calling Voice Mail or leaving a message

Code: 68 + code (0-2)

Operation: Press key

Code: 69 + 0

Operation: Set up call +

Press key

Code: 70 + Ext. # or Dept.

Group (1-64)

Code: 71 + Ext. # or Dept.

Group (1-64)

Using Voice Mail Service

Using Voice Mail Record

On red when active

On red when active

On red while camped on

Flashes red

Flashes red on your key for your messages or flashes red for the Message

Center

Flashes slowly when monitoring

Slow Flash red when active

9

804

713

884

-

-

Incoming Call

Queuing Setup

Code: 52 + Incoming

Group Number

On red when active -

Code: 53 On red when active -

Queuing Message

Starting

Code: 56 On red when active -

Automatic Transfer

Code: 57 -

Department Incoming Call - Delayed

Department Incoming Call - Immediate

Code: 58 + Dept. Group

(1-32)

-

Department Incoming Call - Delay

Code: 59 + Dept. Group

(1-32)

-

Department Incoming Call - DND

Code: 60 + Dept. Group

(1-32)

-

~ 24 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Table: 4. Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See

Srvc Code

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 25 ~

Features

Use this key...

Table: 5. Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status Also see

Srvc Code

Code: 01 + any digits

+ HOLD

Operation: Press key

Direct Station Selection,

Hotline,

Outside calls,

Service Codes

Calling an extension using a

DSS key and Wait for Answer.

Microphone Mute Using Microphone Mute

DSS only

Off = extension idle

On = extension busy

Flashing = DND

On red when activated

-

The DSS Function key will allow the entry of up to 24 digits, these can be any digits e.g extension numbers, Service Codes or outside numbers.

If the digits entered match an extension number then the function key will be a DSS key for the extension and show busy lamp information.

If the digits entered match a Service Code the function key will access the feature.

If the digits entered begin with a trunk access code the Topaz will seize a trunk and dial the remaining digits to line. For trunk calls the digits can contain the special functions: Flash, Pause

- Code: 40

Operation: Set up call

+ Press key

Code: 03

Operation: Press key

Code: 04

Operation: Press key

Code: 05

Operation: Press key

Code: 06

Operation: Establish call + Hold + Ext +

Press key

Code: 07

Operation: Set up call

+ Press key + set up call to add + Press key twice

Code: 08

Operation: Press key

Code: 09 + mode

(1-8)

Operation: Press key

Do Not Disturb

Background Music

Headset Operation

Conference

Missed Calls

Night Service

Activating DND

Turning BGM on or off

Enabling or disabling

Headset Operation

Setting up a conference or a

Meet Me Conference

Viewing answered/missed trunk calls

Activating the Day/Night Mode

On red when activated

On red when activated

On red when activated

None

On red during setup

Flashing when missed call stored

On red when activated

-

825

834

-

826

-

818 + mode

(1-8)

Code: 10

Operation: Press key

1/0 + Dest. Ext.

Code: 11

Operation: Press key

1/0 + Dest. Ext.

Code: 12

Operation: Press key

1/0 + Dest. Ext.

Code: 13

Operation: Press key

1/0 + Dest. Ext.

Call Forwarding,

Immediate

Call Forwarding,

Busy

Call Forwarding,

No Answer

Call Forwarding,

Busy/No Answer

Call Forwarding to extension or

Voice Mail

Call Forwarding to extension or

Voice Mail

Call Forwarding to extension or

Voice Mail

Call Forwarding to extension or

Voice Mail

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

888 + 4

888 + 2

888 + 6

888 + 2

~ 26 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Use this key...

Table: 5. Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status Also see

Srvc Code

Call Forwarding,

Dual Ring

Call Forwarding to extension with both phones ringing

Slowly flashes red 888 + 7 Code: 14

Operation: Press key

1/0 + Dest. Ext.

Code: 15

Operation: Press key

1/0 + Dest. Ext. +

Type

Code: 16

Operation: Press key

Condition + Dest. Ext.

+ Type

Code: 17

Operation: Press key

+ device type code + requested data

(depends on device selected).

Call Forwarding,

Follow Me

Call Forwarding, to Station

Call Forwarding, to Device

Off-Premise

Selectable Display

Messaging

Voice Response System

(VRS)

(Park and Page)

Voice Response System

(VRS)

(Personal Greeting)

Paging, External

Call Forwarding to extension or

Voice Mail

Call Forwarding to extension or

Voice Mail

Setting up Call Forwarding

Off-Premise, Selectable

Display Messaging, VRS Park and Page and VRS

Personal Greeting

Slowly flashes red

Slowly flashes red

Flashes red

888 + 3

888

713

803 + zone Code: 19 + zone (1- 6)

Operation: Press key

Code: 20

Operation: Press key

Code: 21 + zone (1- 9 or 01-32)

Operation: Press Key

Code: 22

Operation: Press key

Code: 23

Operation: Press key

Code: 24

Operation: CALL +

Press Key

Code: 25

Operation: CALL +

Press key

Paging, External

Paging, Internal

Paging, Internal

Meet Me Paging

Group Call Pickup

Broadcasting to an External

Paging Zone

Broadcasting to all External

Paging Zones

Broadcasting to an Internal

Paging Zone

Broadcasting to all Internal

Paging Zone

Joining a Meet Me Page

Answering a call ringing another phone in your Pickup

Group

Group Call Pickup Answering a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group

- if you don’t know the group number

Group Call Pickup Answering a call ringing a phone in a specific Pickup

Group

On red when activated

On red when activated

On red when activated

On red when activated

803 + 0

801 + zone

801 + 0 or 00

None 863, 864, or

865

None 867

None 869

None 868 Code: 26 + Pickup

Group (1-9 or 01- 32)

Operation: CALL +

Press key + Pickup

Group

Code: 27

Operation: Press key

+ bin + Line or CALL key

Code: 28

Abbreviated Dialling Dialling a stored

Common/Personal Abbreviated

Dialling number

Dialling a stored Group

None

None

* + bin

814 + bin

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 27 ~

Features

Use this key...

Table: 5. Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status Also see

Srvc Code

Operation: Press key

+ bin + Line or

CALL key

Code: 29

Operation: Place call

+ Press key

Repeat Redial Activating repeat redial while on a call

Fast Flash while system waits to redial

-

Code: 30

Operation:

Save: Place call +

Press key

Redial: Line or CALL

+ Press key

Code: 31

Operation:

Store: While on call,

Press key + number to store

Use: Press key +

CALL or line

Erase: CALL + Press key

Save Number Dialled

Memo Dial

Saving, redialling or checking a saved number

Storing, using or checking a

Memo Dial number

Code: 32

Operation: Set up trunk call + Press key

OR

Press key

Code: 33

Operation: Call ext. and receive busy +

Press key

Code: 34

Operation: Call ext +

Press key

Conference, Voice Call

OR

Setting up a Voice Call

Conference

Meet Me Conference (Also OR see Conference) Joining a Meet Me

Conference

Off Hook Signalling Signalling a busy extension

Barge In Barging In on a co-worker’s conversation

Code: 35

Operation: Call busy

Callback / Camp On / Trunk Leaving a Callback request at a

Queuing busy extension, Camping On to extension or access busy trunk + Press key a busy extension, Queuing for a busy trunk

Code: 36

Operation: Dial busy ext + Press key

Department Step Calling Stepping through a Department

Group for an idle member

Call Forwarding / Do Not

Disturb Override

Overriding an extension’s Call

Forwarding or Do Not Disturb

Code: 37

Operation: Call extension + Press key

Code: 38

Operation: Leave message: Call ext +

Press key OR Answer message: Press key

Code: 39

Operation: Press key

Message Waiting

Room Monitor

Answering/Leaving a

Message Waiting

Activating Room Monitor

None 815

None -

None

None

On red when activated

On red when activated

Fast Flash red at destination, Hold

863, 864, or

865

809

None 810

850

None 808

807

None 841

-

~ 28 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Use this key...

Table: 5. Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status Also see

Srvc Code

at destination and source + ext

Code: 40

Operation: Press key

Code: 41 + sec. ext.

Operation: Press key

Code: 42 + boss ext.

Operation: Press key

Code:55

Operation: Do not lift handset + Press key +

Enter extension number + Enter name

+ Press HOLD

Handset Mute

Secretary Call

Muting the handset transmission while on a call

Calling your secretary (using the buzzer)

A secretary picking up a call ringing your boss’s extension.

Flash red at source

On when feature active (no transmission on handset)

On red at source Fast

Flash red at destination

On red when activated

-

-

-

Code: 43

Operation: TRK call

+ Hold + ext + Press key

Code: 44

Operation: Place or answer call + Press key

Code:45

Operation:Place or

Serial Call

Hold

Placing a Serial Call to a

co-worker

Putting a call on System Hold

(if hold key is reassigned)

None -

None -

Putting a call on Exclusive

Hold

None - answer call + Press key

Code: 46

Operation: Press key

Code: 49 + ext or voice mail number

Operation: Press key

Department Calling Logging in or logging out of your Department Calling Group

On when removed, Off when installed

Call Redirect Redirecting an incoming call to an extension or voice mail

On red when activated

Flashes when in

750

-

Code: 50

Operation: Press key

Code: 52 + Incoming

Group Number

Account Codes Entering Account Codes

DND/Call Forward

None * or 891

On red when active -

Incoming Call Queuing

Setup

Code: 53

Queuing Message Starting

On red when active -

Code:54

Operation: Press key

Call Forward, Off- Premise Forwarding a Doorphone call to an external phone number

On red when activated

822

Name Storing Changing the name displayed on your display phone

None 800

Automatic Transfer

Code:57

Department Incoming Call -

Delayed

Code: 58 + Dept.

Group (1-64) Department Incoming Call -

-

-

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 29 ~

Features

Use this key...

Table: 5. Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status Also see

Srvc Code

Code:60 + Dept.

Group (1-64)

Immediate

Code: 59 + Dept.

Group (1-64) Department Incoming Call -

Delay

Department Incoming Call -

DND

Code: 63

Outgoing Call Without

Caller ID (ISDN)

On red when active -

-

-

Code: 67 + ext or

Message Center number

Operation: Press key

Code:68 + 0-2

Operation: Press key

Code: 69 + 0

Operation: Set up call

+ Press key

Code: 70 + Ext. # or

Dept. Group (1-64)

Code: 71 + Ext. # or

Dept. Group (1-64)

Voice Mail

Calling Voice Mail or leaving a message

Using Voice Mail Service

Using Voice Mail Record

Automated Attendant for

Extension

Message Change for Voice

Attendant

Flashes red on your key for your messages or red for the Message

Center

Flashes slowly when monitoring

Slow Flash red when active

884

-

None -

None -

-

-

-

-

-

Code: 77 + Ext # or pilot # Voice Mail

On red when accessing

Voice Mail

Flashing with new messages

Code: 78

Conversation

Recording

Code: 79 + Ext # or pilot #

Code: *01 + Trunk number (01-51)

Operation: Press key

Automated Attendant

Central Office Calls Pressing a line key to place or answer a trunk call (where trunks are 01-51) recording

On red when set for all calls

Slowly flashing when set up for busy/no answer calls

On green when seized, on red when in use (by other party), Slow

-

805

~ 30 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Use this key...

Table: 5. Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code.

For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status Also see

Srvc Code

Code: *02 + Trk group (1-9 or 01-51)

Operation: Press key

Code: *03 + ext. or department group

Operation: Press key

Trunk Groups

Multiple Directory

Numbers/Call Coverage

Park

Using a trunk group key to access a Trunk Group

Multiple Directory Number:

Placing or answering a call from your virtual (phantom) extension or Call Coverage:

Placing or answering a call to your co-worker’s extension

Placing a call into or retrieving a call from a Park

Orbit

Flash green when ringing, Hold flash when on Hold

On red when active

Slow Flash red when ringing, On red when busy

Fast Flash when orbit is busy (green at originator, red at others)

804

-

831 (Park)

861 (pickup)

Code: *04 + orbit

(01-64)

Operation: Place or answer call + Press key

Code: *05 + 0

(Incoming), 1

(Outgoing) or 2 (Both ways) + 00 (All trunk groups incoming or ARS outgoing) or Trunk group (01-25)

Operation: Press key

Loop Keys,

Trunk Group Routing

Placing or answering a trunk call

Flash red when ringing,

On green when in use,

Flash green when on hold

-

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 31 ~

Features

Maximum System Capacities

Items Topaz

System

Class of Service

Toll Restriction Classes

Verifiable Account Code Table

Day/Night Mode Numbers

Day/Night Service Patterns

Analogue Caller ID Detector

Dial Tone/Busy Tone Detector

DTMF Receiver

15

15

2000

8

10

924M with DSPDBU: 32

Trunk

Trunk Port Number

Trunk Ports(Total)

Analogue Trunks

BRI Trunk Ports

924M(308M+308E+308E)

Analogue Trunk Ports :

4BRIU

Physical Port Number (T-point) :

Logical Port Number (T-point) :

Trunk Group Numbers

Trunk Access Maps

Trunk Routes

Ring Groups

DID Translation Tables

DID Translation Tables Entries

1-8

1-25

1-51

1-25

1-8

1-20

2000

1-51

9+16=25

9

8(16B)

1-9

1-4

DISA

Classes of Service

Users

15

1-15

Extension

924M(308M+308E+308E)

Extension Ports 1-24

Telephone Extension Number Range 200-225 (default)

Virtual Extension Ports

Virtual Extension Port Numbers

Virtual Extension Port Number Range

Class of Service

50

01-50

Undefined

15

Operator Access Number

Operator Extension

DSS Console Number

DSS Console Maximum Installed

DLS Console Maximum Installed

Doorphone Numbers

Ringdown Assignment

Abbreviated Dialling

0 or 9

1-8

1-3

3

24

1-2

122

Abbreviated Dialling Groups

Abbreviated Dial Bins

Automated Attendant

VRS Message Numbers

1-32

0-1999

1-48

Conference

Conference Circuits 32ch (8ch x 4)

~ 32 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Maximum System Capacities

Department and Pickup Groups

Department (Extension) Group Numbers

Department (Extension) Group Number Range

Call Pickup Group Numbers

Hotline

Internal Hotline

External Hotline

Paging and Park

Internal Page Group Numbers

External Page Group Numbers

External Speakers

Park Group Numbers

Park Orbits

SMDR

SMDR Ports

VRS

VRS(on DSPDB Daughter Board)

Voice Mail(DSPDBU)

Voice Mail(DSPDB) Mailboxes

Voice Mail Channels

Passwords

User Password for setting Toll restriction Override and Changing Class of

Service using a Service Code

Programming Passwords

Level 2 (IN)

Level 3 (SA)

Level 4 (SB)

Programming Password Users

Telephone Extension Port Number(Total)

Key Telephones

Single Line Telephones

1-32

1-4 digits

1-8

24

9

32

6

6

1-64

1-64

1(COM)

1

300

8

No Setting

12345678

0000

9999

1-8

1-24

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 33 ~

Features

Location of Controls

1. Key Telephone

Handset

Speaker

Functions

Alphanumeric Display Indicator

VOL (Volume Control) Key

12TXD 12TD

CHECK Key

CLEAR Key

Programmable Function Keys

LND (Last Number Dial) Key

OPAC (Operation Access) Key

DC (Dial Control) Key

CALL Key

FLASH Key

TRFR (Transfer) Key

SPK (Speaker) Key

DND/CONF Key

(Do Not Disturb / Conference)

HOLD Key

Microphone

MIC (Microphone) Key

Dial Keys

6TXD 6TD

Programmable Keys 12 12 6 6

Additional Prg. Keys 10 10 10 10

CHECK/CLEAR Keys

Handsfree

Yes No Yes No

Accept DLS Console Yes No Yes No

Wall Mount Kit Yes (Built-in) Yes (Built-in) Yes (Built-in) Yes (Built-in)

The BLF (Busy Lamp Field) on Additional Programmable Keys are not available on the standard type Key Telephones (12TD / 6TD).

~ 34 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

2. DSS (Direct Station Selection) Console

1

9

17

25

33

41

49

57

IZ1

ALARM

2

10

18

26

34

42

50

58

IZ2

DOOR1

3

11

19

27

35

43

51

59

IZ3

DOOR2

4

12

20

28

36

44

52

60

IZ4

NT

5

13

21

29

37

45

53

61

EZ1

MW

6

14

22

30

38

46

54

62

EZ2

SG/VC

7

15

23

31

39

47

55

63

EAZ

TRFR

8

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

AC

Function Keys

Indication

IZ1 ~ IZ4

EZ1 ~ EZ2

Function Name

Internal Paging (Zone 1 ~ 4)

External Paging (Zone 1 and 2)

64 DSS Keys

Function Keys

AC External / Internal All Call

DOOR1 ~ DOOR2 Doorphone Call (Doorphone 1 and 2)

NT Night Mode Switching

SG/VC Intercom Call Mode Switching (Signal / Voice)

TRFR Transfer

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 35 ~

Features

3. DLS (Direct Line Selection) Console

24 DLS Keys

~ 36 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Abbreviated Dialling

Description

Abbreviated Dialling gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. This saves time, for example, when calling a client with whom they deal often. Instead of dialling a long telephone number, the extension user just dials the Abbreviated Dialling code.

There are three types of Abbreviated Dialling: Common, Group and Personal. All co-workers can share the

Common Abbreviated Dialling numbers. All co-worker’s in the same Abbreviated Dialling Group can share the

Group Abbreviated Dialling numbers. Personal Abbreviated Dialling numbers are available only at a user’s own extension. The system has 2000 Abbreviated Dialling bins that you can allocate between Common and Group

Abbreviated Dialling. In addition, each user has 20 personal Abbreviated Dialling bins.

Each Abbreviated Dialling bin can store a number up to 36 digits long.

When placing an Abbreviated Dialling call, the system normally routes the call through Trunk Group Routing or

ARS (whichever is enabled). Or, the user can pre-select a specific trunk for the call. In addition, the system can optionally force Common Abbreviated Dialling numbers to route over a specific Trunk Group. User pre-selection always overrides the system routing.

DSS Console Chaining

DSS Console chaining allows an extension user with a DSS Console to chain to an Abbreviated Dialling number stored under a DSS Console key. The stored number dials out (chains) to the initial call. This can, for example, simplify Dialling when calling a company with an Automated Attendant. You can program the bin for the company number under one DSS Console key and the client’s extension number under the other DSS Console key. The DSS Console user presses the first key to call the company, waits for the Automated Attendant to answer, then presses the second key to call the client extension. See Programming below for additional details.

The DSS Console user can also chain to an Abbreviated Dialling number Dialled manually, from a

Programmable Function Key or a One-Touch Key.

Storing a Flash

To enhance compatibility with connected PBX lines, an Abbreviated Dialling bin can have a stored Flash command. For example, storing 0 Flash 926 5400 will cause the system to dial 0, flash the line and then dial 926

5400. The Flash can be stored by the user from their telephone or by the system administrator during system programming.

Using a Programmable Function Key

To streamline frequently-called numbers, an Abbreviated Dialling Programmable Function Key can also store an

Abbreviated Dialling bin number. When the extension user presses the key, the phone automatically dials out the stored number. This provides true one-touch calling via a phone’s function keys.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

900 Common Abbreviated Dialling Bins (000~899)

20 Personal Abbreviated Dialling Bins (900~919)

There are no Group Abbreviated Dialling bins assigned.

Programming

13-01-01 :Abbreviated Dialling Function Setup - Abbreviated Dialling Auto Outgoing Call mode

Assign as Trunk Outgoing Mode when all Abbreviated Dialling bins contain external numbers only. The trunk access code (default=0) is automatically prefixed to each number when

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 37 ~

Features

dialled. Assign as Extension Outgoing Mode to allow Abbreviated Dialling bins to contain both external and internal numbers. In this case, external numbers must include the trunk access code (default=0) when the number is stored.

13-01-02 :Abbreviated Dialling Function Setup - Personal Abbreviated Dial

Enable to allow access to Personal Abbreviated Dialling bins or disable to provide Common

Abbreviated Dialling bins only. When Personal Abbreviated Dialling is enabled, these 20 bin numbers cannot be used for Common Abbreviated Dialling, even though the numbering ranges may overlap.

13-01-03 :Abbreviated Dialling Function Setup - Common Abbreviated Dialling Bins

Designate the bins the system will use for Common Abbreviated Dialling.

Depending on the number of bins assigned in Program 13-01-03, the number of digits used for

Abbreviated Dialling will be different:

13-01-03 = 0-100, Abbreviated Dialling is 2 digit.

13-01-03 = 200-1000, Abbreviated Dialling is 3 digit.

13-01-03 = 1100-2000, Abbreviated Dialling 4 is digit.

13-01-03 13-01-02 Common ABB Bins Personal ABB Bins

100 1 80-99

100 0 None

900-919

None

0900-0919

None

13-02-01 : Group Abbreviated Dialling Bins

Designate the bins the system will use for Group Abbreviated Dialling.

13-03-01 : Abbreviated Dialling Groups Assignment for Extensions

For Group Abbreviated Dialling, assign extensions to Abbreviated Dialling groups (1-32).

13-04-01 : Abbreviated Dialling Number and Name

Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialling numbers and names.

13-05-01 : Abbreviated Dialling Trunk Group

For each Common Abbreviated Dialling number, enter the routing option. To use ARS or

Trunk Group Routing, enter 0. To use a specific Trunk Group, enter the group number (1-25).

14-02-06 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Pause Time

Enable/disable the systems ability to pause after dialling the first digit.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Common Abbreviated Dialling (code 813) or Group Abbreviated

Dialling (code 814). You can program the key as either a general Abbreviated Dialling key or you can choose to store a bin number with the function key. This key would then always dial the associated bin number. If storing a bin number along with the code, do not store 0, 00 or

000. To bypass entering a bin number, press HOLD (HOLD is also required if programming the function key using the service code 851).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-07-04 : COS Options - Storing Abbreviated Dialling Entries

In an extension’s COS, allow (1) or prevent (0) the storing of Abbreviated Dialling entries

(codes 853 and 854). Preventing this option will also prevent the user’s display from showing

~ 38 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

the telephone number. This can be used when you want to prevent account codes from being displayed.

20-08-03 : COS Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Common Abbreviated Dialling

In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) Common Abbreviated Dialling.

20-08-04 : COS Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Group Abbreviated Dialling

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Group Abbreviated Dialling.

30-03-01 : DSS Console Key Assignment

For DSS Console Chaining, assign an Abbreviated Dialling Service Code (813 or 814) plus a two-digit bin number to a DSS Console key.

80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup

80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup

If required, modify the criteria for call progress tone detection for outgoing Abbreviated

Dialling calls.

Related Features

Account Codes

Automatic Route Selection

Central Office Calls, Placing

PBX Compatibility

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Toll Restriction

Trunk Group Routing

Operation

Store Abbreviated Dialling number (display system phones only):

1.

Press SPK key.

2.

Dial 853 (for common/personal) or 854 (for group).

3.

Dial the Abbreviated Dialling bin number,

Common = 000-899,

Personal = 900-919,

Group = 000-1999 (not set in default).

4.

Dial telephone number you want to store (up to 36 digits).

Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. To enter a pause, press MIC. To store a Flash, press FLASH.

5.

Press HOLD.

6.

Enter the associated name (up to 12 digits).

Use the keypad digits as shown in the character table below.

7.

Press HOLD.

8.

Press SPK to hang up.

Use this keypad digit …

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

When you want to …

Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | }

← →

Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

Enter characters: D-F, a-f, 3.

Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.

Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.

Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.

Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 39 ~

Features

Use this keypad digit …

8

9

0

*

#

DND/CONF

CLEAR

When you want to …

Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.

Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.

Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )

Enter characters: * + , - . / : ; < = > ?

# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: STA).

Clear the character entry one character at a time.

Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

To dial a Common/Personal Abbreviated Dialling number:

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset).

2.

Dial 813.

-OR-

Press DC key.

-OR-

Press Common/Personal Abbreviated Dialling key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 27).

To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of CALL) before pressing the DC or Abbreviated Dialing

key).

3.

Dial Abbreviated Dialling bin number.

Common=000-899,

Personal=900-919.

The stored number dials out. Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call. The system may optionally select a specific Trunk Group for the call. If you have a DSS Console, you may be

able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number.

To dial a Group Abbreviated Dialling Number:

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset).

2.

Dial 814.

-OR-

Press DC key.

-OR-

Press Group Abbreviated Dialling key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 28).

To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of CALL) before pressing the DC or Abbreviated Dialing

key).

3.

Dial Abbreviated Dialling bin number.

Group=000-1999 (not set in default).

The stored number dials out. Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call. The system may optionally select a specific Trunk Group for the call. If you have a DSS Console, you may be

able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number.

To Check an Abbreviated Dialling number (display system phone only):

1.

Press CHECK.

2.

Press DC.

3.

Dial the Abbreviated Dialling bin number.

If the entire stored number is too long for your phone’s display, press * to see the rest of it.

4.

Press CLEAR.

-OR-

1.

Press CHECK.

2.

Press the Common/Personal/Group Abbreviated Dialling key.

If the entire stored number is too long for your phone’s display, press * to see the rest of it

Press CLEAR.

~ 40 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Account Codes

Description

Account Codes are user-Dialled codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk calls.

The system has three types of Account Codes:

Optional Account Codes

Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call or anytime while on a call. This type of Account Code is optional; the system does not require the user to enter it.

Forced Account Codes

Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time they place a trunk call. If the user doesn’t enter the code, the system prevents the call. As with Optional Account Codes, the extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an incoming call. However, the system does not require it.

Once set up in system programming, you can enable Forced Account Codes on a trunk-by-trunk basis. In addition, Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or just long distance calls.

Verified Account Codes

With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up to 1000 pre-programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes through. If the code Dialled is not in the list, the system prevents the call. Verified Account Codes can be from 3-16 digits long using the characters 0-9 and #. During programming, you can use “wild cards” to streamline entering codes into system memory. For example, the entry 123W lets users dial Verified Account Codes from 1230 through 1239.

Operator Notification

To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an Account Code violation occurs.

This can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code (if Forced) or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list. The notification is an automatic Intercom call to the attendant and a “RESTRICT” message in the operator’s display. (If the attendant fails to enter a valid Account Code, the system drops the call.)

Account Codes for Incoming Calls

The system can control the ability of extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When this option is enabled, a user can dial * while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial * to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digits the user dials after answering an incoming call outdial on the connected trunk.

Hiding Account Codes

Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone’s display. This would prevent, for example, an unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display and making note of the digits that dial out. When hidden, the Account Code digits show as the character “ * ” on the telephone’s display.

Account Code Capacity

Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. Account Codes can be 1-16 digits in length using 0-9 and #. Verified Account Codes can be from 3-16 digits long.

Redialled Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes

When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system will not retain Account Code information. Any number redialled with these features, the user will need to re-enter an Account Code.

Note: If a user enters *12345*203 926 5400*67890*, if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the system dials the

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 41 ~

Features

number as 203 926 5400*67890*. The *67890* is not treated as an Account Code.

Access to Emergency Numbers

When forced or Verified Account Codes are enabled, the emergency number 000 may be blocked. To allow access to the emergency number, as required by law, assign 000 to an Abbreviated Dialling bin (e.g.

000=*1*000) and then program this to a Programmable Feature key (e.g. SC851 : 01:*000). This key must be labelled as Emergency.

Conditions

Account Codes are user-Dialled codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk calls. The system has three types of Account Codes:

If a user enters a code that exceeds the 16 digit limit, the system ignores the Account Code entry.

If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits Dialled (e.g., *1234*) appear on the SMDR report as part of the number Dialled.

Do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code when using Account Codes. Otherwise, after the *, the trunk will stop sending digits to the central office.

Default Setting

Account Codes are disabled.

Programming

14-01-11 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Account Code

Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Account Codes for each trunk.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key as an Account Code key (code 50). Use this key instead of the dial pad to enter the * before and after the Account Code.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-20 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Account Code/Toll Restriction

Operator Alert

When enabled, the operator is alerted when an extension improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction.

21-01-14 : Forced Account Code Inter-digit Timer

The system waits this amount of time for a user to dial Forced Account Code digits (0-64800 sec.).

21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions

Use this option to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to an extension.

35-05-01 : Account Code Setup - Account Code Mode

For each Class of Service (1-15) use this option to select the Account Code Mode. The options are: 0 Account Codes disabled. (Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial call.)

1 Account Codes optional (not required).

2 Account Codes required (forced) but not verifiable.

3 Account Codes required (forced) and verifiable.

35-05-03 : Account Code Setup - Account Codes for Incoming Calls

For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 in this option to enable Account Codes for incoming calls. Enter 0 to disable Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes you enter dial out on the connected trunk.

35-05-04 : Account Code Setup - Hiding Account Codes

~ 42 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 to have the system hide Account Codes on an extension’s display as they are entered. Enter 0 to have the Account Codes displayed.

35-06-01 : Verified Account Code Table

Use this option to enter data into the Verified Account Code Table. You can enter up to 2000 codes from 3-16 digits in length. For a wild card, press the FLASH key.

Related Features

Abbreviated Dialling

Automatic Route Selection

Programmable Function Keys

PBX Compatibility

Station Message Detail Recording

Operation

To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call:

The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. You can use this procedure if your system has

Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming calls. This procedure is not available at SLTs.

1. Dial *.

OR

Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50).

2. Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).

If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an “ * “ character on the telephone’s display.

3. Dial *.

OR

Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50).

To enter an Account Code before dialling the outside number:

If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must use this procedure. If it has Verified Account Codes, you can use this procedure instead of letting the system prompt you for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes. If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed into your Verified Account Code list.

1. Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or Dialling a code (except 0). Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.

2. Dial *.

OR

Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)

3. Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).

If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an “ * “ character on the telephone’s display.

4. Dial *.

OR

Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)

5. Dial the number you want to call.

If you hear “stutter dial tone after Dialling the number, ARS is requesting that you enter an ARS Authorization

Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection for more information.

To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when an Account Code is required:

1. Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call.

If you hear “stutter dial tone after Dialling the number, ARS is requesting that you enter an ARS Authorization

Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection for more information.

2. Wait for your call to go through.

OR

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 43 ~

Features

If you hear “Please enter an Account Code,” and your display shows ENTER ACCOUNT:

Dial *.

OR

Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)

Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).

If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an “ * “ character on the telephone’s display.

Dial *.

OR

Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)

To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:

This procedure is not available at SLTs.

1. Answer incoming call.

If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps will dial digits out onto the connected trunk.

2. Dial *.

3. Enter the Account Code.

You can enter any code of the proper length. Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified.

4. Dial *.

To enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call:

If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must follow this procedure.

1. Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or Dialling a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.

With Forced Account Codes, you hear, “Please enter an Account Code.” Your display shows: ENTER ACCOUNT.

2. Dial *.

3. Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).

4. Dial *.

If the system has Forced Account Codes and you don’t enter a code, your call cannot go through. You can, however, dial ** to bypass Forced Account Code entry.

5. Dial number you want to call.

If you hear “stutter” dial tone after Dialling the number, ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS Authorization

Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection feature for more information on ARS Authorization Codes.

To enter an Account Code at a single line set:

1. Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by Dialling a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.

With Forced Account Codes, you hear, “Please enter an Account Code.” Your display shows: ENTER ACCOUNT.

2. Dial *.

3. Enter Account Code (1-16 digits).

4. Dial *.

5. Dial number you want to call.

If you hear “stutter” dial tone after Dialling the number, ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS Authorization

Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection feature for more information on ARS Authorization Codes.

~ 44 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Alarm

Description

Alarm lets a system phone extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm remind them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms:

Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)

Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)

Conditions

Single line sets will ring and Music on Hold will be heard when the alarm sounds.

Default Setting

Alarm is enabled.

Programming

20-01-06 : System Options - Alarm Duration

Set the duration of the Alarm signal (0-64800 seconds).

Related Features

None

Operation

To set the alarm:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

2. Dial 827.

3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).

Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time.

4. Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock).

For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315.

A confirmation tone will be heard if the alarm has been set. If the alarm was not set, an error tone will be heard instead.

5. At system phone, press SPK to hang up.

OR

At single line set, hang up.

Note 1: When Alarm 1 is set, the telephone display will show

“Alarm 1” until the alarm has sounded (Alarm 1 sounds once only at the assigned time).

Note: 2: When Alarm 2 is set, no indication is given on the telephone display until the alarm sounds (Alarm 2 sounds daily at the assigned time).

To silence an alarm:

1. At system phone, press CLEAR.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

The single line set user will hear Music on Hold when the handset is lifted.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 45 ~

Features

To check the programmed alarm time:

1. Press CHECK.

2. Dial 827.

3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).

The programmed time displays.

4. Press CLEAR.

To cancel an alarm:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

2. Dial 827.

3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).

4. Dial 9999.

5. At system phone, press SPK to hang up.

OR

At single line set, hang up.

~ 46 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Alphanumeric Display

Description

System display telephones have a 2-line, 16 character per line alphanumeric display that provides various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify callers and customize features.

Conditions

The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.

Default Setting

Enabled for all display telephones.

Programming

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-08 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Information Display

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s incoming Transfer pre-answer display.

Related Features

None

Operation

Operation is automatic if enabled in programming.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 47 ~

Features

Attendant Call Queuing

Description

Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone. This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for unanswered calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to the attendant when their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queuing, these unanswered calls would normally “stack up” for the attendant until they can be processed.

The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID/DDI, DIL and transferred calls. If the attendant doesn’t have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line on a CALL key. If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued, an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled.

Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

20-17-01 : Operator’s Extension Number

Assign the operator (attendant’s) extension.

24-02-01 : System Options for Transfer - Busy Transfer

Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to Transfer calls to an attendant that has more than 32 calls in queue.

Related Features

Call Forwarding / Personal Greeting

Operation

None

~ 48 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Automatic Route Selection (F-Route)

Description

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and digit translation based on the digits a user dials.

ARS consists of look up tables that compare the dialled digits and decide which translation table should be used.

The decision can optionally be dependant on time and day of the week. The translation table will then delete and/or add digits select the trunk group and seize the outgoing trunk.

ARS Feature Summary

ARS provides:

Basic ARS Operation

When a user places an outside call, ARS analyses the digits dialled and assigns one of 64

Selection Numbers to the call. The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialled. ARS then checks the time of the day, the day of the week and the extension’s

ARS Class of Service. Based on these call routing options, ARS selects a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions (if any).

Call Routing

ARS can apply up to 24-digit analysis to every number dialled. For programming, ARS provides separate 8-digit and 24 digit tables. Each table can have up to 250 numbers.

Dialling Translation (Special Dialling Instructions)

ARS can automatically execute stored dialling instructions (called Dial Treatments) when it chooses a route for a call. The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments. The Dial Treatments can:

- Automatically insert or delete a leading 1

- Insert or delete and area code (NPA)

- Add digits (such as a dial-OCC number), pauses and waits to the dialling sequence

- Require the user to enter an authorisation code when placing a call

(see Forced Authorisation Code below)

Time of Day Selection

For routing purposes, ARS provides ten different day selections (called Time Schedule

Patterns). Each Time Schedule Pattern can provide up to 20 time intervals which are assigned to a day of the week (Monday-Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Holiday).

Hierarchical Class of Service Control

ARS allows or denies call route choices based on an extension’s ARS

1

Class of Service. This allows lower Classes of Service (e.g., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher Classes of

Service (e.g., 16). The system provides up to 16 (0=unrestricted, 1-16) ARS Classes of

Service.

1

Use Program 26-04-01 to assign an extension’s ARS Class of Service. An extension’s Class of

Service (set in Programs 20-xx has not effect on ARS routing choices.

Conditions

A) Line keys, outgoing loop keys, outgoing trunk group keys, Dialling 804+trunk group, Dialling

805+trunk number, and abbreviated dial numbers assigned to a certain trunk group can all be used to by-pass ARS.

B) Do not use Dial Analysis Table 1 when configuring the system for Australian numbering plan.

Default Setting

ARS is not programmed.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 49 ~

Features

Programming

11-01-01 : Tab System Numbering

Set up a Service Code for ARS/F-Route Access (normally 0).

11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code

Specify the single digit code used to access ARS (normally 0).

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

Program trunks of the same carrier type into the same trunk group.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-51). This sets the access options for trunks.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-51) to extensions.

26-01-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service – ARS Service

Enable (1) or disable (0) ARS.

26-01-02 : Automatic Route Selection Service - Network Outgoing Inter-Digit ARS Timer

With Networking, this timer (0-64800 x 100msec.) replaces 20-03-04 when determining if all network protocol digits have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site B, this timer can be programmed for 5 (500 msec) at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F-Route for outbound dialling, this timer should be programmed for 30 (3 seconds) at Site A.

26-01-03 : Automatic Route Selection Service - ARS Misdialled Number Handling

If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, this option determines if the system should route over trunk group 1 (0) or play error tone (1).

26-02-01 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS – Dial

Enter the digits (16 digits maximum: 1-9, 0 * #, @; 200 separate entries) for the Dial Analysis

Table which will be analysed by ARS/LCR. This table will be checked after any programmed

F-Route operations have completed. The system will then refer to Program 26-02-02 and

26-02-03 to determine the routing for the call. To enter a wild card/don’t care digit, press Line

Key 1 to enter an @ symbol. It is important to remember that the system checks the table

numbers in numerical order. This means that entries for specific numbers should be entered first (such as your local area codes), then enter the items containing wild card digits. If the system sees an entry of “[email protected]@” then any table entries which follow will be ignored. For example, if 268, 269, and 270 are local exchanges, these would be the first three table entries which would route according to the settings made in Program 26-02-02 and 26-02-03 for each of the table entries. If the next entry is “[email protected]@”, then the system checks no further in this program and routes all other “2xx” numbers according to the entries made in Program

26-02-02 and 26-02-03 for this table entry.

26-02-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Service Type

For each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), select ‘0’ for no ARS, ‘1’ for Service Type 1 - Route to

Trunk Group Number to have the number route to a trunk group [Refer to Program 26-02-03] or ‘2’ for Service Type 2 - F-Route Selected to have the dialled number controlled by the

F-Route table. If Service Type 2 is selected and F-Route operation is on, the F-Route table used is determined by Program 44-04. If F-Route operation is off, the routing is determined by

Program 44-05.

26-02-03 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Service Number

For each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), if Service Type 1 was selected in Program 26-02-02, enter the trunk group number (0-25, 0=no route).

26-02-04 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS - ARS Class of Service

~ 50 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

For each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), set the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Class of

Service (0-16).

26-02-05 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Dial Treatment

For each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), set the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Dial

Treatment (0-15) to be used.

26-03-01 : ARS Dial Treatment

Assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS Dialling translation. The ARS Dial

Treatment options are:

• 3 - Delete the NPA if dialled as part of the initial call.

• 2 - Delete the leading digit if dialled as part of the initial call.

• 1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialled as part of the initial call.

• INPA - Insert the NPA specified by NPA.

• DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example,

D041234 out-dials 1234. Valid entries are 0-9, #, *, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause).

Each digits code counts as a digit. So for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234. This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming.

• Wnn - Wait nn seconds.

• P - Pause in analogue trunk.

• R - Redial the initially dialled number, including any modifications

• E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.

26-04-01 : ARS Class of Service

Set an extension’s ARS Class of Service (0-16). Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of

Service when determining how to route an extension’s calls.

44-01-01 : System Options for ARS

Select whether the ARS feature should use the time schedule (0=not used, 1=used).

44-02-01 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS Access – Dial

Set the Dial digits for the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS(8 digits).

44-02-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS Access - Service Type

Set the Service Type (0-3) for the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS .

44-02-03 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS Access - Additional Data

If a Service Type is selected in Program 44-02-02, set the additional data, if required, for the

Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS

44-02-04 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS Access - Dial Tone Simulation

Determine if the Dial Tone Simulation is on (1) or off (0) for the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS .

44-03-01 : Dial Analysis Extension Table – Dial

Set the Dial digits to be used for the Dial Extension Analyze Table.

44-03-02 : Dial Analysis Extension Table - Table Number

Select the ARS/R-Route table number (0-500) to be used for the Dial Extension Analyse

Table.

44-03-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table - Table Number (251)

Select the ARS/R-Route table number (0-500) to be used for the Dial Extension Analyse Table

251.

44-03-04 : Dial Analysis Extension Table - Next Table Number

Select the Next Table Area Number (0-4) to be used for the Dial Extension Analyse Table

252.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 51 ~

Features

44-04-01 : ARS Selection for Time Schedule

Assign each ARS Selection number (1-500) to an ARS table number for each ARS time mode.

There are 8 time modes for ARS Access.

44-05-02 : ARS Table - Delete Digits

For each ARS table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Enter the number of digits to be deleted (0-255).

44-05-03 : ARS Table - Additional Dial Number

For each ARS table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Enter the number of additional digits to be Dialled (0-1000).

44-05-04 : ARS Table - Beep Tone

For each ARS table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used (0=no beep, 1=beep).

44-05-05 : ARS Table - Gain Table Number for Internal Call

For each ARS table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the gain table number to be used for internal calls (0-500).

44-05-06 : ARS Table - Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections

For each ARS table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the gain table number to be used for tandem connection (0-500).

44-05-07 : ARS Table - ARS Class of Service

For each ARS table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the Class of Service to be used for ARS (0-16).

44-05-08 : ARS Table - Dial Treatment

For each ARS table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the Dial Treatment to be used (0-15).

44-06-01 : Additional Dial Table

Set the additional dial table (1-1000) to add prior to the Dialled ARS number.

44-07-01 : Gain Table for ARS Access - Incoming Transmit

44-07-02 : Gain Table for ARS F-Route Access - Incoming Receive

44-07-03 : Gain Table for ARS Access - Outgoing Transmit

44-07-04 : Gain Table for ARS Access - Outgoing Receive

Set the gain table to be used (1-500). If an extension dials ARS number;

- The Extension Dial Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.

- The Extension Dial Gain Table follows “Outgoing transmit” and “Outgoing receive” settings.

If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS ;

- The Tandem Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.

- The Tandem Gain Table follows the “Incoming transmit” and “Incoming receive” settings for incoming line, and “Outgoing transmit” and “Outgoing receive” settings for the outgoing line.

For the ARS call (in the above case), CODEC gain in Program 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not activated.

44-08-01 : Time Schedule for ARS

Define the daily pattern of the ARS feature. ARS has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.

44-09-01 : Weekly Schedule for ARS

~ 52 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Define a weekly schedule for using ARS (day numbers 1-7 (1=Sun, 7=Sat), pattern numbers

1-10).

44-10-01 : Holiday Schedule for ARS

Define a yearly schedule for ARS. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays (pattern numbers 1-10).

Related Features

Abbreviated Dialling

Central Office Calls, Placing

Least Cost Routing (LCR)

Toll Restriction

Trunk Group Routing

Trunk Queuing/Camp On

Operation

To place a call using ARS:

1.

At keyset, press the SPK key.

- OR -

At single line set, lift handset.

You will hear normal Intercom dial tone.

2.

Dial 0

You will hear a second “stutter” dial tone.

3.

Dial outside number.

If you hear another “stutter” dial tone, you must enter your extension’s ARS

Authorisation Code.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 53 ~

Features

F-Routing Dial Analysis

~ 54 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Background Music

Description

Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in system phones.

If an extension user activates it, BGM plays whenever the user’s extension is idle.

A) Refer to the System Hardware Manual for installation instructions.

B) The system supports one Background Music source input, via either the built-in music port or the 2PGDU card.

C) If a 2PGDU card is installed and has BGM assigned to one of its ports (Program 10-03-01=9 and 33-01-01=3), the built-in music port is no longer used for BGM, i.e. the 2PGDU card takes priority.

Default Setting

The built-in music port is assigned for Background Music.

Programming

10-03-01 :PCB Setup – Terminal Type (2PGDU)

Set the terminal type to 9:External Music Source (MOH or BGM).

Assign port numbers in the following order to avoid duplication in Program 10-03-02:

Program 10-03-01 Port 3 = 9 (External Music Source), system assigns 10-03-02 = Port 1.

Program 10-03-01 Port 4 = 6 (External Speaker), system assigns 10-03-02 = Port 2.

10-03-02 :PCB Setup – Logical Port Number (2PGDU)

Assign port numbers for the devices assigned in Program 10-03-01. May be automatically assigned when Program 10-03-01 is set.

33-01-01 :Analogue Interface Port Type Setup

Set the Analogue Interface port (1-6) assigned as an External Music Source in Program

10-03-01 to 3 (BGM). Note that the 2PGDU card resides in Slot 4.

Operation

To turn Background Music on or off:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 825.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 55 ~

Features

Barge In

Description

Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call, including Conference calls. This sets up a Conference-type conversation between the intruding extension and the parties on the initial call. With Barge In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy co-worker right away.

There are two Barge In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode, the caller Barging In can listen to another user’s conversation but cannot participate. With Speech Mode, the caller

Barging In can listen and join another user’s conversation.

CAUTION

The use of monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sounds activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws.

Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. The Telecommunications (Interception) Act 1979 (Cth), The

Telecommunications Act 1997, The Privacy Act 1988 and State and Territory Listening

Devices Legislation are all relevant. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties. Section 6 of the Industry Guidelines recommend pre-recorded messages or verbal notification to alert callers that the calls may be monitored: e.g. “your call may be listened to and recorded for quality and coaching purposes.

Please tell the consultant if you don’t want this to happen”.

Section 6 of the Industry Guidelines also make recommendations in relation to notifications in writing.

Conditions

Each Barge In requires a conference circuit to be available. If all 32 conference circuits are in use, Barge In cannot be performed.

Default Setting

Disabled

Programming

11-12-08 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge In

Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to use the Barge In feature

(default=810).

11-16-02 : One-Digit Service Code Setup - Barge In

Use this option to set up Item 02 for single digit Barge In. For example, you can assign Item

02 to use digit 5 for Barge In. This would allow you to program a function key with an extension number plus the Barge In code (i.e., 205 5). This allows one-touch access to the Barge In feature for extension 205. If you undefine a service code, be careful when you change this item that you don’t inadvertently disable any essential Dialling function (such as Voice Mail or Message Waiting).

~ 56 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Barge In (code 34).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-10 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Mode

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable the Barge In Speech Mode (0) or Monitor Mode (1) at the initiating extension (i.e., Barge In initiator).

20-13-15 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Initiate

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge In at the initiating extension

(i.e., Barge In initiator).

20-13-16 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Receive

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge In at the receiving extension

(i.e., Barge In receive).

20-13-17 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Tone/Display

Enable (1) or disable (0) the Barge In Tone. If disabled, this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension.

20-13-32 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Multiple Barge In

Enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to have multiple user’s Barge In to their conversation.

20-14-11 : Class of Service Options for DISA - DISA Trunk Barge In

Use this option to enabled (1) or disable (0) a DISA or tie trunk user from using the Barge In feature with the service code defined in Program 11-12-08.

20-18-07 : Service Tone Timer - Intrusion Tone Repeat Time

After a user Barges In, the system repeats the Barge In tone after this interval. Normally, you should disable this timer by entering 0. (This timer also affect any other types of call interruption features, such as Voice Mail Conversation Recording.

21-01-03 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)

Program how long an extension must wait before using the Barge In feature can be used on a call (this timer waits until this timer expires before putting a call in a talk state).

Related Features

Conference

Intercom

Off Hook Signalling

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To Barge In after calling a busy extension:

The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before you can Barge In.

Listen for busy/ring or busy tone.

1. Call busy extension.

2. Press Barge In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 34).

To Barge in without first calling the busy extension:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 810.

OR

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 57 ~

Features

Press Barge In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 34).

3. Dial busy extension.

To Barge In to a Conference call, dial the extension number of a user active on a Conference call. When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties, depending on system programming, and all display system phones show the joined party. If Barge In is not possible:

- the extension user will hear a warning tone

- the DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group

OR

Not available for DISA trunks:

1. Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.

2. Dial the single digit service code.

Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 810 can also be Dialled at this point.

~ 58 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Call Forwarding

Description

Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension. Call Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area. The types of Call Forwarding are:

Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered

Call Forwarding Immediate

Call Forwarding with Dual Ringing

Call Forwarding when Unanswered

Personal Answering Machine Emulation

Call Forwarding will reroute calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another extension. The extension user must enable Call Forwarding from their phone. To redirect calls while a user is at another phone, use “Call Forwarding with Follow Me”. A periodic VRS announcement may remind users that their calls are forwarded.

Conditions

A) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension

216 forwards to 218, and 218 in turn forwards to 220. Calls to 216 route to 218. Calls to

218 route to 220. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded off- premise (*46 + trunk access code + destination telephone number).

B) Periodic reminder message requires a DSP daughter board for Voice Response System

(VRS).

C) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls.

D) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.

E) Ring Groups do not follow Call Forward to voice mail.

F) Multiple Directory and Call Coverage Key calls do not follow Call Forwarding.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

14-02-08 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup – Answering Condition.

All Analogue trunks involved in a Call Forward Off Premise must be assigned with Polarity

Reversal.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Call Forwarding setup code (code 10 - 17).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-02 : Class of Service Options - Call Forwarding (When Busy)

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call

Forwarding when Busy.

20-11-03 : Class of Service Options - Call Forwarding (When Unanswered)

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call

Forwarding when Unanswered.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 59 ~

Features

20-11-04 : Class of Service Options - Call Forwarding (Dual Ringing)

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call

Forwarding with Both Ringing.

24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time

Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Call Forwarding when

Unanswered occurs after this interval.

Related Features

Call Forwarding, Fixed

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override

Central Office Calls, Answering

Department Calling

Do Not Disturb

Programmable Function Keys

Voice Response System (VRS)

Operation

To Activate or Cancel Call Forward:

1.

Press a programmed Call Forward key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851:10, 11, 12, 13, 14).

2.

To Enable: Dial 1 + Extension Number;

To Disable: Dial 0.

3.

Press SPK to hang up.

-OR-

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset)

2.

Dial Call Forward service code:

842 = Call Forward Dual Ring

843 = Call Forward Busy

844 = Call Forward Busy/No Answer

845 = Call Forward No Answer

848 = Call Forward Immediate

3.

To Enable: Dial 1 + Extension Number;

To Disable: Dial 0.

4.

Press SPK to hang up.

-OR-

1.

Press a programmed Call Forward to Station key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851:16).

-OR-

Press SPK key (or lift handset) and dial 888.

2.

Dial Call Forwarding condition:

1 = Personal Answering Machine

Emulation (then skip to step 5).

2 = Busy or No Answer

4 = Immediate All Calls

6 = No Answer

~ 60 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

7 = Immediate with Dual Ringing

0 = Cancel

3.

Dial destination extension.

4.

Dial Call Forwarding type:

5.

2 = All calls

3 = Outside calls only

4 = Intercom calls only

Press SPK to hang up (hang up at SLT).

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 61 ~

Features

Call Forwarding, Fixed

Description

Fixed Call Forwarding is a type of forwarding that is permanently in force at an extension. Calls to an extension with Fixed Call Forwarding enabled automatically reroute - without any user action. Unlike normal Call

Forwarding (which is turned on and off by extension users), Fixed Call Forwarding is set by the administrator in system programming. Fixed Call Forwarding complements Voice Mail, for example. The administrator can program Fixed Call Forwarding to send a user’s unanswered calls to their Voice Mail mailbox. Each individual user no longer has to manually set this operation.

In system programming, the administrator can set the Fixed Call Forwarding destination and type for each extension and virtual extension. The forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension or Voice

Mail. The Fixed Call Forwarding types are:

Fixed Call Forwarding with Dual Ringing (Program 24-06 Option 1)

Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered (Program 24-06 Option 2)

Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate (Program 24-06 Option 3)

Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered (Program 24-06 Option 4)

Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise (Program 24-07)

Fixed Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:

Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions

Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail

Direct Inward Lines

DISA and DID line calls to the forwarded extension

Transferred calls

Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining

Fixed Call Forward Chaining allows Fixed Call Forwards to loop from one extension to the next. For example, you could have the chain 201 + 202 + 203 + 204 set up for Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy. If extension 201 is busy, calls to 201 route to 202. If 202 is also busy, the calls route to 203 and so on. Chaining allows you to set up very basic hunting between co-workers.

Keep the following in mind when setting up Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining:

If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining forms a complete Call Forwarding loop (i.e., 201 + 202 +

203 + 201), the system rings the last extension in the chain (203). It does not complete the loop.

If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining finds an extension with user-implemented Call Forwarding in the middle of a chain, it rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other extensions in the chain.

If one of the extensions in a Fixed Call Forwarding chain has its fixed option set for Both

Ringing (1), the system rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other extensions in the chain.

The receiving extension’s display shows:

EXT AAA

TRANS << EXT BBB

AAA is the extension that initially placed the call.

BBB is the first extension in the Fixed Call

Forwarding chain.

Conditions

A) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls.

B) Multiple Directory and Call Coverage Key calls follow Call Forwarding.

C) Ring Group calls do not follow Call Forward to voice mail.

~ 62 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-02-08 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup – Answering Condition

All analogue trunks involved in a Call Forward Off Premise must be assigned with Polarity

Reversal on Answer.

24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time

Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Fixed Call Forwarding

When Unanswered occurs after this interval.

24-06-01 : Fixed Call Forwarding

For an extension port, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0-4) and the destination extension port. Available types are: 0 = Fixed Call Forwarding off 1 = Fixed Call Forwarding with Dual Ringing (do not use for Voice Mail ports) 2 = Fixed Call Forwarding when

Unanswered 3 = Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate 4 = Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or

Not Answered

24-07-01 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise

For each extension, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number (up to 24 digits). Be sure to include the trunk access code.

Related Features

Alphanumeric Display

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Multiple Directory Numbers

Operation

None

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 63 ~

Features

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Description

Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By enabling

Off-Premise Call Forwarding, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any phone number the user enters, such as a car phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can route the off-site phone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group, Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:

Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions

Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail *

Direct Inward Lines *

DISA, DID and DDI calls to the forwarded extension *

Transferred calls *

Off-Premise Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Coverage keys, Multiple Directory Number keys, or Ring

Group calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 22-04 and 22-05).

* Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has answer/disconnect supervision enabled (see Programming above).

Off-Premise Call Forward for Doorphones

Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows Doorphone callers to be transferred automatically to the pre-programmed external party. The destination telephone number is stored in the Common Abbreviated Dial area. This feature may be used in case a co-worker is out of the office. All incoming calls for their extension will be automatically transferred to their external number (example: cell phone). Off-Premise Call Forward for Doorphones can be transferred to the external party through ISDN lines only.

Conditions

A) Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires ISDN, or loop start trunks with disconnect supervision.

B) The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 4 digits.

C) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension

216 forwards to 218, and 218 in turn forwards to 220. Calls to 216 route to 218. Calls to

218 route to 220. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded off-premise (*46 + trunk access code + destination telephone number).

D) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls.

E) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.

F) A Forced/Verified Account Code (when enabled) must be entered before the Call Forward destination number.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Related Features

Call Forwarding, Fixed

Call Forward to Abbreviated Dial

Doorphone

Toll Restriction

~ 64 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming

11-10-04 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Storing Common Abbreviated Dialling

Numbers.

Assign the service code to be used for Common Abbreviated Dialling (853 by default).

11-10-18 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Off-Premise Call Forward by

Doorphone

Assign the service code to be used for Off-Premise Calling Forwarding by a Doorphone (822 by default).

14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Supervision

Enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding

Off-Premise.

14-02-08 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup – Answering Condition

All analogue trunks involved in Call Forward Off Premise must be assigned with Polarity

Reversal (Line Reversal on Answer).

14-02-12 : Detect Network Disconnect Signal

Enable the network disconnect signal detection for proper release of analogue trunks.

14-02-13 : Trunk to Trunk Limitation

When 14-02-12=1 (enabled) and 14-02-13=0 (disabled),

Trunk to Trunk Transfer/Call Forward Off-Premise uses the following disconnect timers:

25-07-07 (DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time)

25-07-08 DISA Long Conversation Disconnect)

When 14-02-12=1 (enabled) and 14-02-13=1(enabled),

Trunk to Trunk Transfer/Call Forward Off-Premise uses the following disconnect timer:

24-02-07 (Forced Release Timer for Trunk to Trunk Transfer)

15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys

For one-touch access to the Call Forwarding Device setup code (713), assign a function key for Call Forwarding (Device).

For Off-Premise Call Forwarding by a Doorphone, assign a function key (54) if required.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-12 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding Off- Premise

In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) setting up Call Forwarding

Off-Premise at the extension.

21-03-01 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks

Assigns the routes set in Program 14-06 for use with automatic external call forward.

For each mode, assign the trunks used for call forward off-premise to Route Table Number 1.

24-02-07 : Forced Release Timer for Trunk to Trunk Transfer

All trunk to trunk transferred calls will be disconnected after this timer has expired

(default=30 minutes). Set this timer to 0 to prevent call cut off. This applies to a manual trunk to trunk transfer call.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 65 ~

Features

25-07-07 : DISA Conversion Warning Tone Time

Determine the length of time a DISA/T2T/CFOP caller can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard (0-64800 seconds).

25-07-08 : DISA Long Conversation Disconnect

This timer determines how long the system will wait before disconnecting a call after the Long

Conversation tone from Program 25-07-07 is heard (0-64800 seconds)

32-01-03 : Doorphone Timers - Off-Premise Call Forward by Doorphone Disconnect Timer

Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call Forward by Doorphone call. When this timer expires, the caller will hear busy tone for 3 seconds (fixed timer) and the call will then be disconnected (0-64800).

Operation

To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset) and dial 713.

-OR-

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54).

2.

Dial 6 + trunk access code:

0 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing),

804 + Line Group (01- 25),

805 + Line number (e.g., 05 for line 5).

3.

Dial the outside number to which your calls should be forwarded.

4.

For System Phone only, press HOLD.

5.

Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes

To cancel Call Forward Off-Premise:

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset) and dial 713.

-OR-

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54).

2.

Dial 6 + HOLD.

3.

Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Door Phones

These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only.

To activate Call Forward Off-Premise for Door Phone:

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset) and dial 822.

-OR-

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54).

2.

Dial the door phone number (1-6).

3.

Dial the Abbreviated Dialling number to which the calls should be forwarded.

4.

Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up.

Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key flashes.

To cancel Call Forward Off-Premise for Door Phone:

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset) and dial 822.

-OR-

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54).

2.

Dial 0.

3.

Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up.

Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

~ 66 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial

Description

Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By enabling Call Forwarding to abbreviated dial, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any phone number the user enters, such as a car phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off- Premise Call Forwarding will route the off-site phone number over the trunk route set for the abbreviated dial bin.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:

Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions

Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail *

Direct Inward Lines *

DISA, DID and DDI calls to the forwarded extension *

Transferred calls *

Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Coverage keys, Multiple Directory Number keys, or Ring Group calls

(i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 22-04 and 22-05).

* Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect supervision enabled (see Programming above).

Off-Premise Call Forward for Doorphones

Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows Doorphone callers to be transferred automatically to the pre-programmed external party. The destination telephone number is stored in the Common Abbreviated Dial area. This feature may be used in case a co-worker is out of the office. All incoming calls for their extension will be automatically transferred to their external number (example: cell phone). Off-Premise Call Forward for Doorphones can be transferred to the external party through ISDN lines only.

Conditions

A) Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires ISDN, loop start trunks with disconnect supervision.

B) The system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension 216 forwards to 218, and 218 in turn forwards to 220. Calls to 216 route to 218. Calls to 218 route to 220. The system does allow a single chain, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded off-premise (848 + 1 + 813 + bin).

C) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls.

D) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Related Features

Call Forwarding, Fixed

Call Forward, Off Premise

Doorphone

Toll Restriction

Voice Response System (VRS)

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 67 ~

Features

Programming

11-10-04 : Service Code Setup - Storing Common Abbreviated Dialling Numbers

Assign the service code to be used for Common Abbreviated Dialling (853 by default).

11-10-18 : Service Code Setup - Off-Premise Call Forward by Doorphone

Assign the service code to be used for Off-Premise Calling Forwarding by a Doorphone (822 by default).

14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Supervision

Enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding

Off-Premise.

15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys

For one-touch access to the Call Forwarding setup codes (843, 845, 848), assign a function key for Call Forwarding.

For Off-Premise Call Forwarding by a Doorphone, assign a function key (54) if required.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-12 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding Off- Premise

In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) setting up Call Forwarding

Off-Premise at the extension.

32-01-03 : Doorphone Timers - Off-Premise Call Forward by Doorphone Disconnect Timer

Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call Forward by Doorphone call. When this timer expires, the caller will hear busy tone for 3 seconds (fixed timer) and the call will then be disconnected (0-64800).

Operation

To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise

1. At system phone, press a SPK key + Dial 848.

OR

Press Call Forward key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 10)

OR

At SLT, lift handset Dial 848.

2. Dial 1 + 813 +1.

813 is the Abbreviated dial accessc code, can be replaced with the Group Abbreviated dial access code 814.

3. Dial the bin number to which your calls should be forwarded.

4. Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up if you Dialled 848 in step 1.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes.

To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise

1. At system phone, press a SPK key + Dial 848.

OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 10)

OR

At SLT, lift handset and dial 848.

2. Dial 0.

3. Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up if you Dialled 848 in step 1.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Doorphones:

These operations are performed at the Doorphone Ringing Extension only.

~ 68 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise by Doorphone

1. At system phone, press a SPK key + Dial 822.

OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54)

OR

At SLT, lift handset Dial 822.

2. Dial the Doorphone number (1-8).

3. Dial the Abbreviated Dialling number to which the calls should be forwarded.

4. Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up.

Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key flashes.

To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise by Doorphone

1. At system phone, press a SPK key + Dial 822.

OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54)

OR

At SLT, lift handset and dial 822.

2. Dial 0.

3. Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up.

Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 69 ~

Features

Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Description

While at a co-worker’s desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to the co-worker’s extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-worker’s desk longer than expected.

To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me from the co-worker’s phone.

Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.

Conditions

A) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls.

B) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for one-touch access to the Call Forwarding (Station) setup code (code

10 - 17).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-05 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding with Follow Me

In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) the setting of Call Forwarding with

Follow Me.

Related Features

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To activate Call Forward Follow Me:

1.

At a phone other than your own,

Press SPK key (or lift handset) and

Dial 888.

-OR-

Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 15).

2.

Dial 3.

3.

Dial your own extension number.

4.

Dial Call Forwarding Type:

2 = All Calls

3 = Outside calls only

4 = Intercom calls only

5.

Press SPK to hang up (hang up at SLT).

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes

~ 70 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

To cancel Call Forward Follow Me:

1.

At a phone other than your own, press SPK key (or lift handset) and

Dial 888.

-OR-

Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 15).

2.

Dial 0.

3.

Press SPK to hang up (hang up at SLT).

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 71 ~

Features

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override

Description

An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is helpful, for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override (code 37).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-04 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Call Forwarding/DND Override

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to initiate Call For- warding/DND Override.

Related Features

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To override an extension’s Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:

1. Call the forwarded or DND extension.

2. Press Override key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 37).

~ 72 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Call Redirect

Description

Call Redirect allows a system phone user to transfer a call to a pre-defined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. This can be useful if you are on a call and another rings in to your extension. By pressing the Call Redirect key, the call is transferred, allowing you to continue with your current call.

This feature works with the following types of calls:

Normal trunk call

DID

DISA

DIL

ICM

The following types of calls cannot be redirected with the feature:

Transferred

Department Group (all ring mode)

Doorphone

Virtual Extension

Conditions

A) After pressing the Call Redirect key, the call will not recall the extension.

B) The pre-defined destination has to be an extension number or voice mail pilot number.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys

Assign a function key for Call Redirect (code 49 + destination extension number).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-16 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Redirect

Enable (1) or disable (0) a system phone user’s ability to transfer a call to a pre-defined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call

Related Features

None

Operation

To redirect a ringing call:

1. With an incoming call ringing your extension, press the Call Redirect key (Program 15-07 or SC

851: 49 + Destination Extension Number) without lifting the handset or pressing the CALL keys.

A confirmation tone is heard over the telephone’s speaker.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 73 ~

Features

Call Timer

Description

Call Timer lets a system phone user time their trunk calls on the telephone display. This helps users that must keep track of their time on the phone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call Timer begins as soon as the user answers the call. For outgoing trunk calls, the Call Timer starts about 10 seconds after the user dials the last digit.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

14-02-08 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup – Answering Condition

20-13-36 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service - Caller Timer

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use the

Call Timer.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

21-01-03 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)

The system waits for this timer to expire before starting the Call Timer.

Related Features

Alphanumeric Display

Operation

To time your trunk calls:

1. Place trunk call.

The timer starts automatically.

~ 74 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Call Waiting / Camp On

Description

With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without hanging up.

When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

11-12-47 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer for SLT

If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a call. This code is normally 894.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Camp-On (code 35). This key is also the Callback key.

20-18-06 : Service Tone Timer - Call Waiting Tone Timer

Use this option to set the interval between Call Waiting tones. This timer also sets the interval between Off Hook Signalling alerts.

Related Features

Callback

Off Hook Signalling

Programmable Function Keys

Transfer

Trunk Queuing/Camp-On

Operation

To Camp-On to a busy extension:

1. Call busy extension.

2. Dial 850 or Press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).

3. Do not hang up.

To Camp-On to a trunk, see Trunk Queuing.

To cancel a Camp-On request:

1. Hang up.

2. At system phone, press a SPK key and Dial 870.

OR

At system phone, press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).

OR

At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.

To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:

Listen for Camp On beep.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 75 ~

Features

1. Single Line Telephone:

Hookflash and dial 894

To repeatedly split between the two calls.

~ 76 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Callback

Description

When an extension user calls a co-worker that doesn’t answer, they can leave a Callback request for a return call.

The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back, hoping to find it idle.

The system processes Callback requests as follows:

1. Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.

Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time.

2. When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.

3. Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B.

If caller A doesn’t answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.

4. As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.

Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When Callback

Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset. When Callback

Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring.

Conditions

An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-02-11 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Callback Automatic Answer

Enable (1) or disable (0) Callback Automatic Answer.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Callback (code 35). This key is also the Camp-On key.

20-01-07 : System Options - Callback Ring Duration Time

Set the duration of the Callback ring (0-64800 seconds).

20-01-09 : System Options - Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time

The system cancels Callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this interval (0-64800 seconds).

Related Features

Call Waiting (Camp-On)

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To place a Callback:

1. Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.

2. Dial 850 or Press Callback key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).

3. Hang up.

4. Lift handset when busy extension calls you back.

If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through after your co-worker uses their phone for the first time. If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset. If you don’t have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 77 ~

Features line appearance to place the call.

To cancel a Callback:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key and Dial 870.

OR

At system phone, press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).

OR

At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.

To test Callback at your single line phone:

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial 899.

3. Hang up.

4. When the phone rings, lift the handset.

You hear synthesized Music on Hold.

5. Hang up.

~ 78 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Caller ID

Description

Caller ID allows a display system phone to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called the Directory

Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as a post-answer or pre-answer display. Normally, the system provides the Caller ID pre-answer display.

With the post-answer display, the user sees the incoming caller’s number/name after they answer the call. With the pre-answer display, the user previews the caller’s number before picking up the ringing line. The pre-answer display is only available if the system has Automatic Handsfree for incoming line/loop keys disabled. Refer to the table on the following for the available Caller ID displays.

Second Call Display

While busy on a call, the telephone display can show the identity of an incoming trunk or Intercom call. For incoming trunk calls, the display will show the Caller ID or the trunk’s name if Caller ID is not enabled. For incoming Intercom calls, the display will show the calling extension’s name. You can set up the system to present the second call data automatically or allow the user to select the operation of second calls (with service code 779).

Caller ID supports the telco’s Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND) service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the first and second ring burst of an incoming call. There are two types of Caller ID message formats currently available: Single

Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Single Message Format, the telco sends only the caller’s phone number (DN). The DN is either 7 or 10 digits long. In Multiple Message Format, the telco sends the DN and the caller’s name. The DN for this format is also 7 or 10 digits long, and the name provided consists of up to

15 ASCII characters.

Telephone’s display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits.

Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all types of trunk calls, including:

Ring Group calls

Calls transferred from another extension

Calls transferred from the VRS

Direct Inward Lines (DILs)

Caller ID temporarily stores 16 calls (total of abandoned and unanswered). New calls replace old calls when the buffer fills.

Caller ID Display

Abbreviation Description

Absence code

CID-num

CID-name

Trunk name

NN:NN:NN

HH:MM:SS

MM:DD

With Caller ID name and number

1

2

Absence Reason Code P displays as PRIVATE

Absence Reason Code O displays as OUT OF AREA

Caller ID number (Provided by telco)

Caller ID name (provided by telco)

Trunk name provided by phone system (Program 14-01-01)

System’s Caller Timer display

System Time

System Date

Pre-Answer

Conditions Row

Display

Post-Answer

Display

Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN

CID-name CID-num CID-name CID-num

Display When

Reviewing

CID-num HH:MM:SS

CID-name

With Caller ID number

1

Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN CID-num

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 79 ~

Features

Caller ID Display

Abbreviation Description

Without Caller ID name

With name absence code

Without Caller ID number

With Caller ID name

With number absence code

2

1

2

CID-num CID-num

Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN

CID-name CID-name

Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN Without Caller ID number

Without Caller ID name

With number & name absence codes

1

2

1

Without Caller ID number

Without Caller ID name

With number absence code

Without Caller ID number

Without Caller ID name

With name absence code

2

1

2

Without Caller ID number

Without Caller ID name

Without any absence code

Without time and date

With absence reason

Without time and date

With absence reason

1

2

1

2

1

2

Name Absence

Code

Trunk name

Number Absence

Code

Trunk name

Name Absence

Code

Trunk name

Ringing

Name Absence Code

Trunk name NN:NN:NN

Number Absence Code

Trunk name NN:NN:NN

Name Absence Code

Trunk name NN:NN:NN

NO CALLER INFO

HH:MM:SS

MM:DD

CID-name

HH:MM:SS

MM:DD

Name Absence Code

HH:MM:SS

MM:DD

Number Absence Code

HH:MM:SS

MM:DD

Name Absence Code

HH:MM:SS

MM:DD

Trunk name

HH:MM:SS

MM:DD

NO CALLER INFO

Outputting Caller ID Data

The system includes the Caller ID data on the SMDR report. The report provides the incoming call’s DN in the

DIALLED NUMBER field. The CLASS field shows PIN (just like all other incoming calls).

ISDN Calls Display Reason for No Caller ID Information

With Caller ID enabled, the system will provide information for ISDN calls that do not contain the Caller ID information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display will show “PRIVATE”. If the system is not able to provide Caller ID information because telco information is not available, then the display will show “No Caller Info”.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-01-20 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Block Outgoing Caller ID

Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user Dialled digits (this requires Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system out-dials the call just as it was Dialled by the user.

~ 80 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

14-01-21 : Caller ID Block Code

Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code. This code is automatically inserted before Dialled digits if Program 14-01-20 is set to ‘1’.

14-02-06 : Receiving Type FSK / DTMF

14-02-10 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Caller ID

Enable (1) or disable (0) a trunk’s ability to receive Caller ID name/number information. If this option is set to ‘1’, the system will suppress ringing and lamping for trunk calls for the first ring in order to receive the Caller ID information.

15-03-11 : Transmit Type FSK / DTMF

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-08-15 : Class of Service (Outgoing Call Service) - Block Outgoing Caller ID

Allow (1) or prevent (0) a user’s Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller

ID information when a call is placed. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user Dialled digits

(this requires Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system outdials the call just as it was Dialled by the user.

20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/DISA/ DIL

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) forced second call. When enabled the user can not turn off second call indication by Service Code 779+0. When disabled the user can choose to receive/not receive second calls with Service Code 779+1.

20-09-02 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Caller ID Display

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to display incoming Caller ID name/number information.

20-09-04 : Class of Service (Incoming Call Service) – Notification for Incoming Call List Existence

When enabled, “Check List” appears on a System Phone’s LCD for any new call received with Caller ID. This indicates that there is new Caller ID information to view in the Caller ID list. When disabled, this LCD indication is not provided, although the new Caller ID information can still be viewed in the Caller ID list.

20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Automatic Off-Hook Signal

In order for a display phone to show Caller ID information for a second incoming call, must be enabled (1).

20-19-01 : System Options for Caller ID - Caller ID Display Formatting

Determine whether the first 10 digits (0) or last 10 digits (1) should be displayed when Caller

ID exceeds 12 digits.

20-19-02 : System Options for Caller ID - Caller ID Wait Timer

Determine how long an incoming CO call should wait for Caller ID information from telco before the system connects the call.

20-19-03 : System Options for Caller ID - Edit Caller ID

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to edit the stored Caller ID information. For ISDN incoming calls, the digits assigned in Program

10-02-03 are prefixed to the Caller ID number (default = 0) when Program 20-19-03 is enabled.

80-02-01 : DTMF Tone Setup – Duration

80-02-02 : DTMF Tone Setup – Pause

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 81 ~

Features

With Program 14-01-20 set to 1 and Program 14-02-10 set to 1, if the Caller ID block code is being sent too quickly for the telco to recognize, lengthen the pause and duration time for the

DTMFs.

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection

Station Message Detail Recording

~ 82 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Central Office Calls, Answering

Description

The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunks) calls to meet the exact site requirements. This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. For additional information on making trunk ring, refer to the Ring Group feature.

Delayed Ringing

Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group (this ring group applies to DIL or non- DIL trunks). This could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the boss doesn’t answer the call, it rings the secretary’s phone after a programmable interval.

Universal Answer

Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any system phone and Dialling a unique

Universal Answer code. The employee doesn’t have to know the trunk number or dial any other codes to pick up the ringing trunk. You’ll normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night Answer (see “Night

Service”. When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available phone. You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing is not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can then easily pick up the call from a shop phone. See “Night Service” for more on Universal Night

Answer.

The Automatic Answer of Universal Answer Calls option (Program 20-10-07) determines whether or not the extension has the Auto Answer feature for ringing calls. This option allows a user to simply lift the handset to answer a ringing call; they no longer need to dial the service code.

Display Reason for Transfer

When incoming DID, DDI, DISA, DIL or ISDN calls are transferred to another extension or ring group due to a

Call Forward or DND setting, the reason for the transfer can be displayed on the phone receiving the transferred call. The extension user can then recognize why they are receiving the call. This feature requires a display telephone in order to view the message.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

10-03-03 : PCB Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type

10-03-04 : PCB Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type

Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for single line telephones.

10-08-01 : Pre-Ringing Setup

Enable (1) or disable (0) pre-ringing for outside calls.

14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type

14-01-03 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type

Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for each trunk.

14-02-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Ring Detect Type

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 83 ~

Features

For each trunk, enable delayed ringing (0) or immediate ringing (1).

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

For Universal Answer, assign trunks to trunk groups (1-25) then go to Program 14-06 below to set up Trunk Group Routing.

14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing

For Universal Answer, set up trunk routes (1-25) and then go to Program 23-03 below to assign the trunk routes to extensions. An extension user can use Universal Answer to answer a call if the ringing trunk is in its assigned route.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-51). This sets the access options for trunks. Ring Group programming overrides Access Map programming.

15-02-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Trunk Ring Tone

Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 22-03 and the settings made with either Service Code 820 or Program 15-02-02. Also see Program 22-03.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-51) to extensions.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

To have outside calls ring specific keys, assign trunks to line keys (codes 1-51). You can also program function keys as trunk group or loop keys (*02 or *05). For additional loop key data, in Program 15-13 enter 0 (incoming only), 1 (outgoing only) or 2 (both ways).

20-02-09 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones - Disconnect Supervision

Enable (1) disconnect supervision for the system.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

For Universal Answer, assign a Class of Service (1-15) that enables Program to an extension.

20-10-07 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Automatic Answer of Universal Calls

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use

Auto-Answer to pick up Universal Answer calls. This allows a user to simply pick up the handset instead of Dialling a service code.

20-13-23 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Display the Reason for Transfer

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display the Reason for Transfer message.

22-01-02 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm

Enable (1) or disable (0) the Incoming Call RNA Alarm. If enabled, the ring cadence will change for a call that rings longer than the interval set in 22-01-03.

22-01-03 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Ring No Answer Alarm Time

Set the Ring No Answer Alarm interval (0-64800 seconds). If a trunk rings a system phone-system phone longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence.

22-01-04 : System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Time

If an incoming trunk call rings longer than this interval, it reroutes to the Ring Group set in

Program 22-08.

22-03-01 : Trunk Ring Tone Range

Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks. Customize the tones within each Ring Tone Range in 82-

01. Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 22-03 and the settings made with either Service Code 820 or Program 15-02-02.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

~ 84 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

To have trunks ring extensions, assign extensions to ring groups (1-25). For each extension in the Ring Group, indicate in Program 22-06 if trunks should ring (1) or not ring (0).

22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

To have the trunks ring extensions, assign trunks to a Ring Group.

22-06-01 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode

Indicate whether the trunks in the Ring Group assigned in 22-04 should ring (1) or not ring

(0).

22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04), it routes to the destination you specify in this option. Determine if the destination should be a

Ring Group (1-25) or DSPDB Voice Mail (101)

23-03-01 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer

For Universal Answer, assign trunk routes (1-25) set in Program 14-06 to extensions. An extension user can use Universal Answer to answer a call if the ringing trunk is in its assigned route.

82-01-01 : Incoming Ring Tone

Customize the ring tones within each Ring Tone Range. Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks in

22-03. Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 22-03 and the user settings made with Service Code 820.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering Call Forward/DID/DIL/DISA/Do Not Disturb/ISDN

Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup

Direct Inward Line

Line Preference

Long Conversation Cutoff/Warning Tone for Long Conversation

Microphone Mute

Night Service

Programmable Function Keys

Selectable Text Messaging

Operation

To answer an incoming trunk call:

1. Lift handset.

2. At system phone, press flashing line key.

If you don’t have a line or loop key for a trunk call ringing your phone, it rings an a CALL key. If you have Ringing

Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call. You can dial after answering the call. This allows you, for example, to respond to computer-generated incoming calls.

OR

1. If you know the specific line number, dial 772 + Line number (01-51).

To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

Depending on system programming, this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2.

2. Dial 872.

If you hear error tone, your extension’s Class of Service prevents Universal Answer.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 85 ~

Features

~ 86 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Description

The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individual’s needs.

A user can place a call by:

Pressing Line Keys or “Loop Keys”

Pressing a Trunk Group (i.e., loop) key

Pressing a Trunk Group Routing (dial 0) key

Dialling a code for a specific trunk (805 + the trunk number)

Dialling a code for a Trunk Group (804 + group number)

Dialling a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (0)

Dialling an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

10-03-03 : PCB Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type

Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for single line telephones.

10-03-04 : PCB Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type

Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for single line telephones.

11-01-01 : System Numbering

Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access.

11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code

If required, change the single-digit Trunk Access Code (normally 0). If you change this code, you must also review the settings in 11-01 for the new code selected.

11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code

Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.

11-12-01 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

To simplify placing calls, assign function keys for placing trunk calls: Trunk Group

Routing/dial 0 keys (code 804).

14-01-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunk Name

To make identifying calls easier, assign a name to each trunk.

14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type

14-01-03 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type

Assign a CODEC Gain Type to each trunk. This sets the amount of gain (amplification) for the selected trunk.

14-01-07 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Outgoing Calls

For each trunk, allow (1) or prevent (0) outgoing calls.

14-01-10 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 87 ~

Features

For each trunk, enable (1) or disable (0) DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-51). This sets the access options for trunks.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-51) to extensions.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

To simplify placing calls, assign function keys for placing trunk calls: Line keys (1-51) and

Trunk Group/loop keys (code *02 + group).

20-02-06 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones – Pre-selection Time

Set the preselection interval (0-64800 seconds). When a system phone user preselects a line key, the system remembers the preselection for this interval.

20-02-09 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones - Disconnect Supervision

Enable (1) disconnect supervision for the system.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-08-02 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Trunk Calls

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) trunk calling.

21-15-01 : Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions

Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code.

Refer to “Trunk Group Routing” to set up outbound routing.

81-01-01 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup

Review the Analogue Trunk Timers for compatibility with the connected telco.

Related Features

Alphanumeric Display/Call Timer

Automatic Route Selection

Handsfree

Long Conversation Cutoff/Warning Tone for Long Conversation

Loop Keys

Microphone Mute

Programmable Function Keys

Trunk Group Routing

Trunk Groups

Operation

To place a call over a trunk group:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

2. Dial 804.

3. Dial line group number (01-25).

4. Dial number.

OR

1. At system phone, press trunk group key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: *02 + group).

Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.

~ 88 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

2. Dial number.

To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

2. Dial 0.

If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead.

3. Dial number.

OR

1. At system phone, press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *05).

Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.

2. Dial number.

To place a call over a specific trunk:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

2. Dial 805.

3. Dial line number (e.g., 05 for line 5).

4. Dial number.

OR

1. At system phone, press line key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: 01 to 51).

Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.

2. Dial number.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 89 ~

Features

Class of Service

Description

Class of Service (COS) sets various features and Dialling options (called items) for extensions. The system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a different Class of

Service for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of Dialling options for daytime operation, night time operation and even during lunch breaks. An extension’s Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 777).

Conditions

None

Default Setting

The attendant (port 01/extension 200 and port 02/extension 201) have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes. All other extensions have Class of Service 2 in all Night Service modes.

See the Charts for the default settings of the individual options.

If changing Class of Service via Service Code:

The password required to change Class of Service via Service Code 777 is 0000 (Program

90-02-02 = 0000).

An extension can use Service Code 777 to change another extension’s Class of Service

(Program 20-13-28 = 1).

An extension automatically blocks another extension’s attempt to change their Class of

Service via Service Code 777 (Program 20-13-28 = 0).

The default Service Code for this option is 777 (Program 11-11-24 = 777).

Programming

11-11-24 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Change Extension Class of Service

If required, use this option to change the Service Code a user dials to change an extension’s

Class of Service.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service to extensions (1-15). Any Class of Service assignments you change using Service Code 777 (see below) automatically update this program.

20-07 through 20-14 : Class of Service Options

Set the options in a Class of Service.

If changing Class of Service via Service Code:

20-13-28 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Allow Station COS to be Changed

Use this option to permit (1) or block (0) another extension from changing this extension’s

Class of Service via Service Code 777.

~ 90 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

05

06

07

08

09

Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07

Item

No.

01

02

03

04

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Manual Night Service Enabled

Enabled/disabled an extension’s ability to use manual Night

Service Switching

Changing the Music on Hold Tone

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to change the Music on

Hold tone

Time Setting

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to set the Time via

Service Code 828.

Storing Abbreviated Dialling Entries

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to store Abbreviated

Dialling numbers. With this disabled, an extension will display only the name assigned to the Abbreviated Dialling number - the telephone number will not be displayed. This could be used if you wish to prevent Account Codes from being displayed.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Set/Cancel Automatic Transfer to Transfer

VRS General Message Record

Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial Service Code 712

And record, listen to or erase the General Message

- Not Used -

- Not Used -

0- Off

1- On

- Not Used -

- Not Used -

- Not Used -

- Not Used -

Programmable Function Key Programming (Appearance

Level)

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program their

Appearance function keys using Service Code 852 (by default).

Forced Trunk Disconnect (analogue trunk only)

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Forced Trunk

Disconnect

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Trunk port disable

0- Off

1- On

VRS Record

Enables/disable extension’s ability to record, erase and listen to VRS messages

VRS General Message Listen

Enables/disable extension’s ability to dial 4 or Service Code

711 and listen to the General Message

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

SMDR printout accumulated extension data

SMDR printout accumulated STG data

SMDR printout accumulated account code data

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Default Related

Data

COS 1 - 15

Program

0 11-10-01

0 11-10-02

1 11-10-03

1 11-10-04

1 11-10-06

1 20-13-18

0

0 11-10-27

1

1 11-10-21

1 11-10-22

0 11-10-23

0 11-10-24

0 11-10-25

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 91 ~

Features

Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-08

Item

No.

01

02

Intercom Calls

Enable/disable Intercom calling for the extension.

Trunk Calls

Enable/disable outgoing trunk calling for the extension.

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

Toll Restriction Override

Enables/disables Toll Restriction Override (Service Code

875).

Repeat Redial

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Repeat Redial.

Toll Restriction Dial Block

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial

Block.

Department Group Step Calling

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Department

Group Step Calling

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Hotline/Extension Ringdown

Enables/disables Ringdown Extension for extensions with this

COS.

Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced

0- Off

1- On

Intercom Ringing

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to force Handsfree

Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing

Intercom calls.

0- Off

1- On

Protect for the call mode switching from caller (Internal Call)

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

13 CLIP

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

15

Dial Number Preview

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to use Dial Number

Pre-view

Block Outgoing Caller ID

Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to automatically block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If this option is on, the system automatically inserts the

Caller ID block code (defined in 14-01-21) before the user’s

Dialled digits.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Default Related

Data

COS1 - 15

Program

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

21-01-07

21-07

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

14-01-20

14-01-21

17 ARS Override Access Map 0

~ 92 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-09

Item

No.

01

02

04

05

Second Call for DID / DISA / DIL

Caller ID Display

Enables / disables the Caller ID display at an extension.

Notification for Incoming Call List existence

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Setting Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom

Ringing

Allow/prevents an extension from enabling Handsfree

0- Off

1- On

Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming

Intercom calls

Default Related

Data

COS1 - 15

Program

0

1

0

1

1

11-11-15

11-11-16

Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-10

Item

No.

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Group Call Pickup (Within Group)

Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension’s own

Pickup Group (Service Code 867)

Call Pickup (Another Group)

Group Call Pickup (Another Group)

Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group (Service

Code 869)

Group Call Pickup for Specific Group

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Unscreened Transfer

Group Call Pickup

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to pick up a call ringing into a Pickup

Group (Service Codes 867 and 868)

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Directed Call Pickup for Own Group

0- Off

1- On

Meet Me Conference and Paging

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Meet Me Conference and

Paging

Automatic Answer of Universal Calls

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Universal Auto Answer (no service code required)

Auto Off-Hook Answer for Call Coverage Keys

Enables (1) or disables (0) an extension’s ability to answer an incoming call on a Call Coverage Key simply by lifting the handset.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Default

Data

COS1 - 15

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 93 ~

Features

Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-11

Item

No.

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

Item

Input

Data

Call Forward Immediately

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Immediate Call Forward

Call Forward When Busy

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call Forward When Busy.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Call Forwarding When Unanswered

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call Forward When

Unanswered.

0- Off

1- On

Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)

Enables/Disables an extension’s ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both

Ringing.

Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate Call Forwarding with

Follow Me.

Unscreened Transfer

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Unscreened Transfer.

Transfer Without Holding

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Transfer Without Holding.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Transfer Information Display

Enables/disables an extension’s incoming Transfer pre-answer display.

Group Hold Initiate

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a Group Hold.

Group Hold Answer

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to pick up a call on Group Hold

Automatic On Hook Transfer

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer.

Call Forwarding Off-Premise

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to set up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their phone.

Operator Transfer After Hold Callback

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction

0- Off

1- On

VRS Personal Greeting

Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial Service Code *47 to record, listen to or erase the General Message.

Call Redirect

Enable or disable a system phone user’s ability to transfer a call to a pre-defined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Call transfer setup for each telephone group

0- Off

1- On

No Recall

Allow (0) or prevent (1) answered Transferred calls from recalling the originating extension.

0- Off

1- On

Normal/Extended Park

Determine if an extension’s Class of Service should allow either a normal or extended Park.

0-Normal

1-Extende

Default

COS1 - 15

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

20

Ring Inward recall disable

0

21

On-Hook Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction

0

~ 94 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13

Item

No.

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

Item

Long Conversation Alarm

Enables/disables the Warning Tone for Long Conversation (not for SLTs)

Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Long Conversation Cut-off for incoming calls.

Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Long Conversation Cut-off for outgoing calls.

Call Forwarding/DND Override

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call Forwarding/DND Override.

Automatic Off Hook Signalling (for KST)/Call Waiting (for SLT)

Allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive off hook signals.

Automatic Off Hook Signalling

Allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive off hook signals.

Message Waiting

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to leave Message Waiting.

Conference

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a conference or Meet Me

Conference.

Privacy Release

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference.

Barge In Mode

Enables the extension’s Barge In to be speech mode (0) or Monitor mode (1).

Room Monitor, Initiating Extension

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to initiate Room Monitor.

Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to be monitored.

Continued Dialling

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to use Continued Dialling which allows

DTMF signal sending while talking on extension.

Department Calling

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to call a Department Group.

Barge In, Initiate

Enables/disables Barge In at initiating extension.

Barge In, Receive

Blocks/allows Barge In at the receiving extension.

Barge In Tone/Display

Use this option to enable/disable the Barge In tone. If enabled, callers hear an alert tone and their display indicates the Barge In when another extension barges into their conversation. If disabled, there is no alert tone or display indication.

Programmable Function Key Programming (General Level)

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program their General function keys using Service Code 851 (by default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service

Code 852.)

Selectable Display Messaging

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Selectable Display Messaging.

Input

Data

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Default

COS1 - 15

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 95 ~

Features

Features

Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13

Item

No.

20

21

22

23

24

27

28

29

30

31

32

34

35

36

38

Item

Input

Data

Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert

Enables/disables operator alert when an extension improperly enters an

Account Code or violates Toll Restriction.

Extension Name

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program its name

Called Party Status

Display the detail state of called party

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Display the Reason for Transfer

Select whether an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension (Call Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer,

DND).

Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key

Enable (1) or disable (0) a user’s ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call. The Barge In feature must be enabled if this option is to be used.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Busy on seizing virtual extension

0- Off

1- On

Allow COS to be Changed

Enable (1) or disable (0) the ability of an extension’s COS to be Changed via

Service Code 777.

0- Off

1- On

Paging Display

Enables (1) or disables (0) an extension’s ability to display paging

0- Off

1- On information.

Background Music

In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension from turning Background Music on and off.

0- Off

1- On

Connected Line identification (COLP)

0- Off

1- On

Deny Multiple Barge Ins

Enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to have multiple user’s Barge

In to their conversation.

0- Off

1- On

Block Manual Off-Hook Signalling

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to block off-hook signals manually sent from a co-worker.

Block Camp-On

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to block callers from Dialling the service code (assigned in 11-16-05) to Camp On.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

Call Timer

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use the Call Timer.

0- Off

1- On

Headset Ear Piece Ringing

Default

COS1 - 15

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

~ 96 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Class of Service Options (DISA Service), Program 20-14

Item

No.

Item

Input

Data

01

Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access

02 This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to dial 0 for

Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection (ARS).

Trunk Group Access

03 This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 814).

04

05

06

Common Abbreviated Dialling

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to use the system’s Common Abbreviated Dialling.

Operator Calling

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator.

Internal Paging

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to use the telephone system’s Internal Paging.

07

08

09

External Paging

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to use the telephone system’s External Paging.

Direct Trunk Access

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to use

Direct Trunk Access (Service Code 815).

Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point>

This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller’s ability to use Forced Trunk

Disconnect (Service Code *26). This option is not available to DISA callers.

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

0- Off

1- On

10 Call Forward Setting by Remote Via DISA

0- Off

1- On

11

DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to use the

Barge In feature.

0- Off

1- On

0

0

0

0

Default

COS1 - 15

0

0

0

0

0

0

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 97 ~

Features

Related Features

Night Service

Operation

To change an extension’s Class of Service (via Service Code 777):

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 777.

3. Dial the extension number you want to change.

You see: MODE1:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged. The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service.

4. Enter the Day 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD.

You see: MODE2:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.

5. Enter the Night 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD.

You see: MODE3:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.

6. Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press

HOLD.

You see: MODE4:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.

7. Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD.

You see: MODE5:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.

8. Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD.

You see: MODE6:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.

9. Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD.

You see: MODE7:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.

10. Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press

HOLD.

You see: MODE8:nn

Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.

11. Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press HOLD.

You see: Enter Sta#-

12. Go to step 3 and enter another extension number.

OR

Press SPK to hang up.

~ 98 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Conference

Description

The conference feature lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation.

With Conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The system provides 32 Conference circuits, and allows up to 8 internal or external parties to be conferenced. This means that one extension can Conference up to 7 internal and/or external parties together (the originator would be the

8 th

party).

Split (From Conference)

Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This will allow a dispatcher, for example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a customer and a service technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties, privately set up a service strategy with the technician and then meet again to set the schedule.

Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially set up. If a user places an outside call, conferences extension 202 followed by extension 203, Split will cycle from the trunk, to

202 and finally to 203. The Split cycle then repeats.

Barge Into Conference

If a user’s extension has Barge In capability enabled, they can also Barge In on an established Conference. This permits, for example, an attendant or supervisor to join a Conference in an emergency. It also allows a co-worker to leave a conference -- and then rejoin the telephone meeting when it is convenient to do so.

Transfer Call Into Conference

An extension with Barge In capability can Transfer a call into an existing Conference. This would allow, for example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then Transfer them into an existing telephone meeting. There is no need for the attendant to locate all the parties at the same time and sequentially add them into the

Conference.

Conditions

A) Up to four eight-party conferences may be established simultaneously.

B) Conference circuits may be used by other facilities, such as barge in, conversation recording and tandem trunking.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits

Determine if there are conference circuits available, that not all have been assigned as conversation record circuits.

11-12-08 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge In

If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Barge In to a Conference call.

This code is normally 810.

11-12-47 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer for SLT

If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a Conference call.

This code is normally 894.

11-16-02 : Program 11-16 : One-Digit Service Code Setup - Barge In

If required, use this program to define the single digit service code users dial to Barge In to a

Conference call.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 99 ~

Features

14-01-04 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls

CODEC gain set at 0 dB (14-01-04 = 32 [CODEC Gain Type 2] ) can be used to set the

CODEC gain type for multi-line Conference calls.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Conference (code 07).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-08 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) – Conference

In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a

Conference.

20-13-15 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Initiate

In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to Barge In to a call.

20-13-16 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Receive

In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to receive a Barge In on a call.

20-14-11 : Class of Service Options For DISA - DISA Trunk Barge In

Determine if DISA and tie trunk users should have the ability to dial a service code to Barge

In to a Conference call (0=disabled, 1=enabled).

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Conference, Voice Call

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging

Programmable Function Keys

Tandem Trunking

Operation

To establish a Conference:

System Phone

1. Establish Intercom or trunk call.

2. Press CONF or Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 07).

3. Dial extension you want to add.

OR

Access outside call

OR

Retrieve call from Park orbit.

To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or dial a trunk/trunk group code. You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference.

4. When called party answers, press CONF or Conference key twice.

If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system’s

Conference limit.

5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add more parties.

Single Line Set

1. Establish Intercom or trunk call.

Hookflash and dial 826.

~ 100 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

3. Dial extension you want to add.

OR

Access trunk call.

OR

Retrieve call from Park orbit.

Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.

OR

Hookflash twice to set up the Conference.

If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system’s Conference limit.

To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties:

System Phone

1. Hang up.

If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear Music on Hold.

Single Line Set

1. Hang up.

If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on Hold.

To Barge In to Conference Call:

1. Pick up the handset or press SPK and dial the service code (810=default).

If the telephone doesn’t have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system will automatically place a Callback to the extension.

2. Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call.

When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the

Conference, depending on system programming, and all display system phones show the joined party. If a Conference is not possible:

- the extension user will hear a warning tone

- the DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group

OR

Not available for DISA trunks:

1. Dial the extension number of the internal party.

2. Dial the single digit service code.

Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 810 can also be Dialled at this point.

To join a Conference Call via Privacy Release:

A) When invited to join Conference call, press the indicated Line Key.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 101 ~

Features

Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release

Description

Voice Call Conference lets extension user’s in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To initiate a Voice

Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Voice Call Conference key and tells their co-workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can just press the trunk’s line key to join the call.

Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person initiating the

Voice Call Conference just announces it “through the air.”

Privacy Mode Toggle Option

The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from the non-private mode to the private mode. This would help a workgroup supervisor, for example, that needed to quickly monitor any group member’s call. If the supervisor wanted to make a “secure” call, however, they could quickly switch the line’s mode and be assured that their call would not be monitored. If the outside call is on a line key, the user just presses the line key to switch modes. If the call is on a loop key, the user presses their

Privacy Release function key instead.

For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option, trunks initially have the privacy released. If privacy is desired for a trunk, use the toggle option or press the Privacy Release function key to switch modes.

Conditions

none

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits

Determine if there are conference circuits available, that not all have been assigned as conversation record circuits.

14-01-19 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Privacy Mode Toggle Option

Determine if a trunk should be able to be toggled to a private/non-private line (0=disabled,

1=enabled).

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Voice Call Conference (code 32).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-09 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Privacy Release

In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Privacy Release allowing for a Voice Call Conference. The trunk must be programmed to allow this feature in

Program 14-01-19.

31-01-04 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Privacy Release Time

Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call Conference after it is announced. (Note that this interval is also used for Meet Me Conference.)

Related Features

Conference

~ 102 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To join a Voice Call Conference (if invited):

1. After Conference request, press indicated line key.

To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:

1.

Press SPK to hang up.

To make your trunk call Private (Privacy Mode Toggle Option Enabled):

1.

Press the Line Key.

– OR –

Press the Privacy Release key (PGM 15-07 or SC851 : 32) if call is on a loop key.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 103 ~

Features

Continued Dialling

Description

Continued Dialling allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer and then dial additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking and Other Common

Carriers (OCCs).

There are two types of Continued Dialling:

Continued Dialling for Intercom Calls

Depending on an extension’s Class of Service, a system phone user may be able to dial additional digits after their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example,

Continued Dialling lets extension users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers.

Without Continued Dialling, extension users cannot access these Voice Mail options.

Continued Dialling for Trunk Calls

Continued Dialling gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside

Automated Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside service answers, the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without

Continued Dialling, the system’s Toll Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of

Dialled digits. See Programming below for additional information.

NOTICE

Continued Dialling may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialling

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use

Continued Dialling for Intercom calls to 2500 type devices.

21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class

Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to an extension.

21-05-04 : Toll Restriction Class - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment

Assign Program 21-06-03 entries to each Toll Restriction class.

Related Features

Toll Restriction

Operation

To use Continued Dialling:

1. Place Intercom or trunk call.

2. Continue Dialling after call connects.

~ 104 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialling.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 105 ~

Features

Department Calling

Description

With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension within a pre-programmed Department

Group by Dialling the group’s pilot number. The call would ring the first available extension in the group. For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department’s pilot number.

The caller would not have to know any of the Sales department’s extension numbers. The system allows up to

32 Department Calling Groups.

There are two types of routing available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular Routing. With

Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first.

Lower priority extensions ring only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension. In a Department Group with extensions 210 (Priority 1), 211 (Priority 2) and 212

(Priority 3)

The first call rings 210.

The second call rings 211.

The third call rings 212.

The fourth call rings 210 and the cycle repeats.

Note: When programming, the high priority extensions have low priority numbers. For example, priority 1 has a higher priority than priority 10.

Overflow Routing

Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group. If a user directly dials a busy extension within a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call to the first available group member. The system follows Program 22-15-03 and 22-15-05’s timer for playing the periodic VRS message.

Enhanced Hunting

Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting capabilities. Hunting sets the conditions under which calls to a Department Group pilot number will cycle through the members of the group. The hunting choices are:

Busy (Option 0)

A call to the pilot number will hunt past a busy group member to the first available extension.

Not answered (Option 1)

A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group.

The call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the

Department Group has Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call will not route.

Busy or not answered (Option 2)

A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group.

The call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. Calls into groups with Priority Routing and Circular Routing route identically.

Simultaneous ringing (Option 3)

All idle members of the Department Group ring simultaneously. Calls do not cycle between group members.

If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group’s pilot number will queue for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold up to waiting calls. Once the queue fills, additional callers hear busy tone and cannot queue for an available member. If a display phone is waiting in queue, the user will see: WAITING (group name). If a transferred call in queue is an outside call, and the system has DSP daughter board installed for VRS, the queued caller will hear, “Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free.”

~ 106 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

The VRS can also Transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to “Voice Response System (VRS)” feature for more information on setting up the VRS.

The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is:

Busy on a call

In Do Not Disturb

Call Forwarded

Conditions

When a DIL rings to a Department Group, the DIL will not follow overflow programming

(Programs 22-01-04 and 22-08).

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

11-07-01 : Department Group Pilot Numbers

Assign pilot numbers to the Extension (Department) Groups you set up in Program 16-02.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a Department Calling key so extension users can install or remove themselves from the

Department Calling Group.

16-01-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Name

Assign a name to the Extension (Department) Groups you set up in Program 16-02.

16-01-02 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Calling Cycle

Set the routing cycle for calls into a department (i.e., when a user dials the department pilot number). The system can ring the highest priority extension available (Priority Routing, 0) or cycle in circular order through the group (Circular Routing, 1).

16-01-03 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Routing When Busy

Set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. The caller can hear busy tone (0) or overflow to the first available Department Group member (1). This option is for Intercom calls to an extension, not a pilot number.

16-01-09 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Hunting No Answer Time

Set the duration a Department Group call will ring at an extension before it steps on to the next available member.

16-01-10 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Hunt Type

Set the operation of department group calls.

0 No Hunting: Calls step around the group. Calls to a busy group receive busy tone.

1 Busy Hunting: Calls do not step around the group. Calls will step to the next member if the priority extension is busy. Calls to a busy group receive ring back tone.

2 No Answer Hunting: Calls step around the group. Calls will not step on if the priority extension is busy. Calls to a busy group receive ring back tone.

3 Busy/No Answer Hunting: Calls step around the group. Calls will step on if the priority extension is busy. Calls to a busy group receive ring back tone.

16-02-01 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions

Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-32) and set the priority assignment.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign extension to more than one department group. Each group can have up to 16 secondary members. Adding a secondary member will disable simultaneous ring mode for the group.

20-13-14 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Department Calling

In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) Department Calling.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 107 ~

Features

22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a Department Group, assign Service Type 4 for each Night

Service Mode. Also see 22-07 below.

22-07-01 : DIL Assignment

For each trunk assigned Service Type 4 in 22-02 above, assign the DIL destination as the

Department Group pilot number ( 385-416 for Department Groups 1-32).

Related Features

Department Step Calling

Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

Transfer

Voice Mail

Operation

To call a department:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

2. Dial department’s extension number.

The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department.

To log out of your Department Calling Group:

While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension.

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 750 + 1.

OR

1. Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 46).

The key lights while you are logged out.

To log back in to your Department Calling Group:

While you log back in, Department Calling will route calls to your extension.

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 750 + 0.

OR

1. Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 46).

The key goes out when you log back in.

~ 108 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Department Step Calling

Description

After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department Step Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and place another Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

11-16-01 : Single Digit Service Code Setup

If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key Department Step Calling (code 36).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-08-12 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Department Step Calling

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use

Department Step Calling.

Related Features

Department Calling

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To make a Step Call:

You step through Extension Groups set in Program 16-02.

1. Place call to busy Department Group member.

OR

Place call to Department Group pilot number.

2. Press Step Call key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 36).

3. Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 109 ~

Features

Dial Number Preview

Description

Dialling Number Preview lets a display system phone user dial and review a number before the system dials it out. Dialling Number Preview helps the user avoid Dialling errors.

Conditions

An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-08-05 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Dial Number Preview

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial

Number Preview.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Operation

To use Dial Number Preview to place a call (system phone only):

1. Do not lift the handset or press a SPK key.

2. To preview any number, press *.

To preview an Abbreviated Dial number, press DC.

3. Dial number you want to call.

The number displays.

4. To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a line/loop/trunk group key.

If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 9), you can press CALL instead.

OR

To dial out the displayed Intercom number, press a SPK key.

OR

To cancel the number without Dialling it out, press HOLD.

~ 110 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Dial Pad Confirmation Tone

Description

For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press a key.

This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide no Call Progress tones.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled

Programming

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-18-05 : Service Tone Timer - System Phone Confirmation Tone

If required, change the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone frequency and duration.

Related Features

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To enable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone:

1. Press a SPK key

2. Dial 824

To disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone:

1. Press a SPK key

2. Dial 824

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 111 ~

Features

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)

Description

Direct Inward Dialling (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the number to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number 926-5400 can directly dial extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call screening to complete the call.

Note: Direct Inward Dialling requires DID service from the Network Provider.

In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides:

DID Dialed Number Translation

Flexible DID Service Compatibility

DID Intercept

DID Camp-On

DID Dialed Number Translation

DID allows different tables for DID number translation. This gives you more flexibility when buying DID service from telco. If you can’t buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 301-556 200-499), use the translation tables to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits 501-756

500-799 to extension numbers 301-556 200-499.

The Topaz system has 2000 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the 20 DID Translation

Tables. There is one translation made in each entry. For a simple installation, you can put all 2000 entries in the same table. For more flexibility, you can optionally distribute the 2000 entries among the 20 tables.

In addition to number conversion, each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it. When the

DID call rings the destination extension, the programmed name displays.

Flexible DID Service Compatibility

You can program the system to be compatible with up to 8 digit DID service. Be sure to program your system for compatibility with the provided telco service. For example, if the telco sends four digits, make sure you set up the translation tables to accept the four digits.

For analogue DID, the system is compatible with Dial Pulse (DP) and DTMF DID signalling. DID trunks can be either wink start or immediate start.

DID Camp-On

DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy Intercept disabled

(22-11-04). With DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on. If Program 22-11-04 is set for No

Answer step on, the call will step on after the DID Ring No Answer Time interval (22-01-06). It will step on to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail (22-11-05/06). Without DID Camp-On, the caller to the busy extension just hears busy tone.

DID Routing Through the VRS

DID calls can optionally route through the VRS. The DID caller hears an initial Automated Attendant Greeting explaining their dialling options. If the caller misdials, they can hear a second greeting with additional instructions. For example, the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be, “Thank you for calling. Please dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the operator.” If the caller inadvertently dials an extension that doesn’t exist, they could hear, “The extension you dialled is unavailable. Please dial 0 for assistance or dial # to leave a message so we can call you back.”

You assign Automated Attendant greetings (i.e. VRS Messages) to the numbers in each Translation Table. This provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the system should play for which dialled numbers. You could, for example, set up 926 5401 through 926 5449 to route to extensions 301- 349,

~ 112 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

and have 926 5450 route to the automated attendant.

SMDR Includes Dialed Number

The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk’s name (entered in system programming) or the number the incoming caller dialled (i.e., the dialled DID digits). This gives you the option of analysing the SMDR report based on the number your callers dial. (This option also applies to an ISDN trunk as well.)

DID Intercept

DID Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions. There are three types of DID Intercept:

Vacant Number Intercept

If a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials, Vacant Number Intercept can reroute the call to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without Vacant

Number Intercept, the caller hears error tone after misdialing.

Busy Intercept

Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension. If Busy

Intercept is enabled, the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. If Busy Intercept is disabled, the call follows DID Camp-On programming

(see below).

Ring-No-Answer Intercept

Ring-No-Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the destination extension. With Ring-No-Answer Intercept enabled, the unanswered call reroutes to the DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring-No-Answer Time interval. If Ring-No-Answer Intercept is disabled, the unanswered call rings the destination until the outside caller hangs up.

DID Intercept Destination for Each DID Number

With this feature the system allows you to program a DID Intercept destination for a DID number which receives no answer or busy call. The system can be programmed to use a trunk ring group, the VRS or the voice mail as the programmed destination. Each DID number can have two destinations. The first destination is for an invalid DID number, busy or no answer extension. The second destination is for a no answer trunk ring group.

This feature works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 1 in Program 22-02. Other types of trunks may use the DID table, but the new DID intercept feature is not yet supported.

With the DID Intercept for each DID number feature, when the primary destination (Program 22-11-05) is set to

Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is:

1.

Busy Intercept = Forward Busy

2.

Ring-No-Answer Intercept = Forward RNA

When the secondary destination (Program 22-11-06) is set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is based on the first destination's routing. When the incoming call is forwarded to the first destination by a busy intercept, the

Voice Mail protocol will be that it forwards busy calls. When the incoming call is routed to the first destination by a ring-no-answer intercept, the protocol will be that it forwards ring-no-answer. The Voice Mail will transfer the calls to the mailbox number defined in Program 22-11-02.

Note: Any valid DID number must be entered in the DID table (Program 22-11). If a valid DID number is not entered, there will be no ring destination for any incoming calls to that number (the calls will not ring any extension in the system).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 113 ~

Features

Conditions

A) DID service must be purchased from you local telephone company

B) DID Intercept for each DID number works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 1 in

Program 22-02. Other types of trunks may use the DID table, the DID intercept feature is not supported

C) BRI DID requires a BRI PCB and Option Box.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

Put DID trunks in the same trunk group (other than group 1).

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

You can assign line keys for DID trunks (01-50). Without line keys, DID calls ring line appearance (CALL) keys.

20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA or

DIL, caller.

22-01-06 : System Options for Incoming Calls - DID Ring-No-Answer Time

Set the DID Ring-No-Answer (RNA) Intercept interval (0-64800 seconds). In systems with

RNA Intercept, the DID call rings the destination extension for this interval and then rings

Intercept Ring Group. This also sets how long the system should let an unanswered DID ring before transferring the call to the DID Intercept's first destination.

22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

For each Night Service Mode, enter service type 3 when the trunk should be a DID trunk.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring the extensions according to programming in

22-06.

22-09-01 : DID Basic Data Setup - Expected Number of Digits

For each DID Translation Table (1-20), enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the CO (8 maximum). For example, for a table used with 3-digit DID service, enter 3.

22-09-02 : DID Basic Data Setup - Received Vacant Number Operation

Selectively enable (1) or disable (0) Vacant Number Intercept based on each DID Translation

Database (Program 22-11-01 and 22-11-02).

22-10-01 : DID Translation Table Setup

Assign the start and end range of DID Translation Table entries (1-2000) to each DID Translation Table (1-20).

22-11-01 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Received Number

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the digits received by the system

(eight max.).

22-11-02 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Target Number

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the extension the system dials after translation (36 digits max.)

22-11-03 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Dial-In Name

~ 114 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the name that should show on the dialed extension’s display when it rings (twelve characters max.)

22-11-04 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Operation Mode

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the condition required to transfer to the call to the destination defined in 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.

22-11-05 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Destination 1

22-11-06 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Destination 2

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the first and second Transfer Destinations if the callers receives a busy or no answer (action defined in 22-11-04).

(Destination Options: 0 = No setting, 01-25 = Incoming Group, 101 = DSPDB Voice Mail,

201-232: Department Group, 400 = DID, 401 = DISA, 1000-1999 = Abbreviated Number

(000-999))

If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination (Program 22-10).

22-11-07 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Call Waiting (DDI Camp On)

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify whether Call Waiting should be allowed (0=disable, 1=enable).

22-11-08 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Maximum Number of Calls

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the maximum number of DID calls

(00-51).

22-11-09 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - MOH Source

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the source of music to be used for

DID trunks (0=MOH port, 1=BGM port, 2=Music Source port).

22-11-10 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Music Source Port Number

For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), if item 2 is selected in 22-11-09, specify the port to be used for the source of music heard on DID trunks.

22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group

For each DID Translation Table, program the DID Intercept destination. The destination can be a Ring Group (01-25), or DSPDB Voice Mail=101. This program is used when there is no destination programmed in Program 22-12-05. It is unrelated to Program 22-12-06.

22-13-01 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment

Assign the DID trunk groups (01-25) to translation tables. If all the DID trunks use the same type of DID service, you may have only one DID trunk group and one DID Translation Table

(with many entries).

Central Office Calls, Answering

When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is ringing to their phone.

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

DILs also provide a way for outside callers to dial a system extension, virtual extension or

Department Group directly.

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 115 ~

Features

Off Hook Signaling

The Off Hook Signaling provide DID calls with signaling options. Refer to this feature for the specifics.

Programmable Function Keys

To simplify answering DID calls, assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks.

Station Message Detail Recording

SMDR can print trunk port names or received dialed number for ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If enabled, DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the trunk name.

Operation

DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls.

~ 116 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Description

Direct Inward Dialling (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the number to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number 926-5400 can directly dial extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call screening to complete the call.

Note: Direct Inward Dialling requires a BRI ISDN DID service from the telco.

Conditions

A) If unanswered, a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs up.

B) If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy, the system routes the call as follows:

1.

The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in 22-08.

2.

If there is 22-08 assignment or PC Attendant, the call rings according to the Ring Group assignments in 22-04 and 22-05.

3.

If none of the destinations in steps 1-3 above are available, the call continues to ring until a destination becomes free.

C) The DIL follows call forwarding programming, even to voice mail.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Set up the Trunk Access Maps. All extensions should have at least Hold access to the DIL

(entry 3). Without Hold access, transferred DILs and DILs on hold can be answered only while they are ringing or recalling.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions (1-51).

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

To have the DIL ring a key, program a line key for the DIL trunk.

20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA or

DIL, caller.

22-01-04 : System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Time

Set the DIL No Answer Time (0-64800 seconds). If DIL Delayed Ringing is set in program

22-08, this option sets the DIL Delayed Ring interval.

22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

Assign each DIL Service Type 4. Make an entry for each Night Service mode.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow to the ring group programmed in 2208.

Set the ringing in Program 22-06 (0=trunks don’t ring [just flash line keys], 1=trunks ring).

22-07-01 : DIL Assignment

Set the destination extension port for each DIL - for each Night Service mode. The destination can be an extension port, virtual extension port, or Department Group.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 117 ~

Features

22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

For each DIL with delayed ringing, enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered

DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time. Make an entry for each Night Service mode (Ring Group (1-25) or DSPDB Voice Mail=101).

Related Features

Call Forwarding

Central Office Calls, Answering

Central Office Calls, Placing

Department Calling

Do Not Disturb

Group Call Pickup

Name Storing

Private Line

Off Hook Signalling

Programmable Function Keys

Ring Groups

Operation

To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:

1. Lift handset.

2. At system phone, press flashing line key for DIL.

If you don’t have a line key for the DIL, the DIL rings a CALL key.

If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.

If you don’t answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., the DIL No Answer Ring Group).

To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:

1. Lift handset.

2. At system phone, press line key for DIL

OR

Dial 805 and the DIL trunk number (e.g., 05).

OR

Dial 804 and the DIL trunk group number (e.g., 05).

OR

Dial 0 for Trunk Group Access

3. Dial number.

~ 118 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Description

DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This could help an employee away from the office that wants to directly dial co-workers or use the company’s trunks for long distance calls. To use DISA, the employee:

Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk

Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone

Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)

Waits for a second unique dial tone

Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension

DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key for the DISA trunk, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line key, the call rings a CALL key.

You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a trunk can be a normal trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set the routing for DISA trunks when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.

DISA Class of Service

DISA Class of Service provides features and Dialling restrictions for DISA callers. This allows you to control the capabilities of the DISA callers Dialling into your system. When a DISA caller first accesses the system, they must enter a DISA password before proceeding. The system associates the password entered with a specific user number, which in turn has a Class of Service. If the Class of Service allows the action (such as making outgoing trunk calls), the call goes through. If the DISA Class of Service doesn’t allow the action, the system prevents the call. The DISA Class of Service options are:

Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access

When a DISA caller dials into the system, they may be able to dial 0 and place outside calls. Any toll charges are incurred by the system. The call follows the system’s Trunk Group Access or

Automatic Route Selection - whichever is enabled.

Trunk Group Access

DISA callers may be able to access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the system.

To access a Trunk Group, the user dials Service Code 804 followed by the Trunk Group number

(e.g., 01). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected group. Trunk

Group Access bypasses the system’s Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 0 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see Direct Trunk Access below.

Common Abbreviated Dialling

The system’s Common Abbreviated Dialling bins may be available to DISA callers. This could save the DISA caller time when Dialling.

Operator Calling

A DISA caller may be able to dial 9 for the system’s operator.

Paging

Internal and External Paging may be available to DISA callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent facilities, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.

Direct Trunk Access

DISA callers may be able to select a specific trunk for outgoing calls through the system. To directly access a trunk, the user dials Service Code 805 followed by the trunk’s number (e.g., 01).

This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk. Direct Trunk

Access bypasses the system’s Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 0 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see Trunk Group Access above.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 119 ~

Features

DISA Trunk Barge In

The DISA Trunk Barge In option allows a caller to break into another extension’s established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding party and the two parties on the initial call.

DISA Toll Restriction

The digits a DISA caller dials for an outgoing call may be subject to the system’s Toll Restriction.

DISA Operating Modes

The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial, calls a busy or unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring Group

(called a DISA Transfer Destination).

Department Calling with Overflow Message

If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group, the system can periodically play the voice prompt,

“Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free.” while the caller waits.

The interval between the voice prompts is the DISA Overflow Message Time. When an extension in the

Department Group becomes available, the call automatically goes through. If the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time, the DISA call routes to the overflow destination or disconnects.

(What happens to the unanswered call is set by the DISA Operating Mode). The Overflow Message requires a

VRS.

Warning Tone for Long DISA Calls

You can set up the system to provide a warning tone to DISA callers that have been on a call too long. The warning tone can be just a reminder (which the caller can ignore) or can be followed by a forced disconnect of the call. When the DISA caller hears the warning tone, they have the option of Dialling a code to continue the conversation or disconnect.

Conditions

A) The DISA caller must use a DTMF dial telephone. DISA is compatible with calling devices that meet the DTMF signalling requirements of EIA Specification RS-464. DISA trunks must be supervised loop start.

B) When accessing Topaz from a remote location via a DISA trunk, a specific DISA tone will first be heard when the system answers (a fast alternating tone). After the correct password is entered to allow system access, the tone changes to a mono tone. It is at this time that allowable system features can be accessed, e.g., access code for internal paging. If the caller enters the wrong password (a warning tone will be heard), they can repeat the password entry up to 3 times before being disconnected.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup

Reserve at least one circuit for DTMF reception (entry 0 or 2).

• Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:

- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.

- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.

11-01-01 : System Numbering

Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access.

11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code

Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.

~ 120 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type

Customize the CODEC gains (transmit and receive levels 1-63) for DISA trunks.

14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Setup - Loop Disconnect Supervision

If DISA caller can place outgoing calls through the system (see Program 20-14), enable loop supervision (1) for the DISA trunk. If DISA caller cannot use the system’s trunks for outgoing calls, enter 0 to disable loop supervision.

20-01-05 : System Options - DTMF Receiver Active Time

After answering the call, the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the DISA trunk for this interval (0- 64800 seconds).

20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/DISA/

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA,

DIL, or tie line caller.

20-14-01 - 20-14-11 : Class of Service Options for DISA

Enable (1) or disable (0) the following options for each DISA Class of Service (1-15).

• First Digit Absorption (Item 1)

• Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access (Item 2)

• Trunk Group Access (Item 3)

• Common Abbreviated Dialling (Item 4)

• Operator Calling (Item 5)

• Internal Paging (Item 6)

• External Paging (Item 7)

• Direct Trunk Access (Item 8)

• Forced Trunk Disconnect (Item 9)

• Call Forward Setting by Remote Via DISA (Item 10)

• DISA Trunk Barge In (Item 11)

21-15-01 : Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions

Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code.

Refer to “Trunk Group Routing” to set up outbound routing.

22-01-11 : System Options for Incoming Calls -VRS Waiting Message Interval Time

Setup the sending duration time of the Auto - Attendant & Queuing. The message is repeatedly sent out within the specified time (0-64800 seconds).

22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

For DISA operation, set the trunk service type to 02. You can have a different service type for each Night Service mode.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow. Set the ringing in Program 22-06

(0=trunks don’t ring [just flash line keys], 1=trunks ring).

25-03-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialling

Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow. Set the ringing in Program 22-06

(0=trunks don’t ring [just flash line keys], 1=trunks ring).

25-04-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy

Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0), transfer to an alternate ring group destination (1-25), or transfer to DSPDB Voice Mail (101).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 121 ~

Features

25-07-01 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Dial Tone Time

After answering the DISA trunk, the system waits this interval (0-64800 seconds) for the caller to dial the first digit of the password. If the caller fails to dial within this interval, the system drops the call.

25-07-02 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DID/DISA No Answer Time

A DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval (0-64800 seconds) before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this interval expires, the call follows the programmed

Ring No Answer routing (see Program 25-04 below).

25-07-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA -DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time

Determine the length of time a DISA caller can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard (0-64800 seconds).

25-07-08 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Long Conversation Disconnect

This timer determines how long the system will wait before disconnecting a call after the Long

Conversation tone is heard (0-64800 seconds).

25-07-09 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Internal Paging Time

This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates the DISA call.

25-07-10 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA External Paging Time

This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates the DISA call.

25-07-13 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DID/DISA Busy Tone Interval

If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program 25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this interval before disconnecting.

25-08-01 : DISA User ID Setup

For each DISA user, set the 6-digit password.

25-09-01 : Class of Service for DISA Users

Assign a DISA Class of Service for each user. The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0. You cannot use the 20-xx-xx and 42-xx-xx programs to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks (15 users, with one password and DISA Class of Service (1-15) for each user).

25-10-01 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Use this program to assign the Trunk Group Route (1-25) chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials 0. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. If the system has

ARS, Dialling 0 accesses ARS. The route chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is determined by the password the caller dials.

25-11-01 : DISA Toll Restriction Class

If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) for each DISA user

(1-15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 21-05. The Toll

Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is determined by the password the caller dials. You cannot use Program 21-04 to assign Toll

Restriction to DISA trunk.

25-12-01 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Assign the trunk route that DISA Caller’s access if they dial the Alternate Trunk Route Access

Code. Refer to “Central Office Calls, Placing” for more on setting up Alternate Trunk

80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup

80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup

If required, modify the criteria for call progress tone detection for DTMF tones for inbound

DTMF DISA calls.

~ 122 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection

Central Office Calls, Answering

Direct Inward Dialling (DID) / Direct Inward Line (DIL) / Voice Response System (VRS)

Long Conversation Cutoff

Voice Response System (VRS)

Operation

To place a DISA call into the system (from any DTMF dial telephone):

1. Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.

2. Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.

3. Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).

4. Wait for a second unique dial tone.

5. Dial an extension (200-295).

OR

Dial 0 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS.

OR

Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (if enabled).

OR

Dial 804 + a trunk group number (1-25) for an outside call.

OR

Dial 805 + a trunk number (1-51) for an outside call.

OR

Dial 813 + Common Abbreviated Dialling bin number.

OR

Dial 9 for the operator.

OR

Dial 801 + an Internal Paging Zone number (0, 1-6,00,01~32).

OR

Dial 803 + an External Paging Zone number (1-2 or 0 for All Call).

OR

Dial 810 + a busy extension number to barge in to a call.

OR

Dial 828 to set the time + two digits for two digits for hour (24 hour clock, 13=1:00 PM) + two digits for minutes.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 123 ~

Features

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Description

The DSS Consoles (64-Button, 24-Button) gives a system phone user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks and system features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing (e.g., operators or dispatchers).

The DSS Console simplifies:

Calling extensions and Doorphones

Placing, answering and transferring outside calls

Making an External or Internal Page

Switching the Night Service mode

Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer

The 64 button DSS Console also provides DSS Console Alternate Answer. This lets a system phone user with a

DSS Console quickly reroute their calls to a co-worker.

You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Function codes. This provides the DSS Console user with many of the features available on Programmable Feature Keys.

The maximum number of DSS Consoles allowed is 9. There is no limit on the number of 64-button DSS consoles per extension, but an extension can have only one 24-button DLS console. An extension can, however, have both a 24-button DSS and 64-button DLS console(s) installed.

Installation of the Consoles

The 64-button console plugs into the eight port of the 308M/308E/008E unit and is assigned to a system phone in Program 30-02. The keys are set in Program 30-03, each key has a function number and optional additional data.

The 24-button console plugs into any display-type system phone via the socket in the base of the phone, it does not take a port on the system. The keys are set either via Program 15-07 or by service codes 851/852 from the system phone it is plugged into. Each key has a function number and optional additional data.

Conditions

A) Changing flash patterns for DSS Consoles will also change them for Hotline keys.

B) When installing a DSS, the system must auto-detect the console in order for the LEDS to function correctly. When connecting the DSS to a extension previously defined with another circuit type, undefine the circuit type (enter 00 in Program 10-03 for the extension number), then connect the DSS Console.

C) To program the keys on a 24-Button DLS in Program 15-07, use the extension number to which the DLS is installed and, regardless of the type of system phone connected, start

programming the DLS keys at key number 23.

Default Setting

No 64-button DSS Consoles assigned (in Program 30-02).

All 64-button DSS Console key ranges are DSS/One Touch for extension numbers 200-295.

Once a 64-button DSS Console is enabled, the console's keys are DSS/One Touch keys

(Program 30-03).

Once a 24-button console is attached the keys are Not Defined (Program 15-07).

~ 124 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Programming

10-03-01 : Terminal Type

The system automatically assigns the terminal type (10) for the port which has a 64-button

DSS console installed.

10-03-09 : PCB Setup

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys to the DSS consoles. When programming a 24-Button DSS key, use the extension number to which the DSS is installed and, regardless of the type of system phone connected, start programming the DSS keys at key number 25 (Key 25=DSS key 1).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

30-02-01 : DSS Console Extension Assignment

Designate the 64-button DSS Console installations (i.e., the extensions that have 64-button

DSS Consoles assigned to them).

30-03-01 : DSS Console Key Assignment

Customise 64-button DSS Console keys to function as DSS keys and Function Code keys.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing

Doorphone

Night Service

Paging, External and Internal

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

Calling an extension from your DSS Console:

Optional for 64-Button Consoles.

1. Press DSS Console key.

If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by Dialling 1.

If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift handset to speak.

Placing a trunk call from your 24-Button DSS Console:

1. Press DSS Console key assigned to trunk.

2. Dial outside number.

If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.

Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console:

1. Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to trunk.

If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.

Calling a Doorphone from your 64-button DSS Console:

1. Press DOOR1 or DOOR2.

2. Press DSS Console key for Doorphone you want to call (1-6).

If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to talk to the Doorphone.

Transferring a call using your DSS Console:

1. Place or answer call.

If you are on an Intercom call, press HOLD before going to the next step.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 125 ~

Features

2. Press DSS key for extension that will receive transfer.

You cannot Transfer to an extension that is busy or in Do Not Disturb.

3. (Optional) Announce call.

If called party doesn’t want the call, press flashing line or CALL key to retrieve it.

4. Press SPK to hang up.

Making a External Page using your 64-button DSS Console:

1. Press DSS Console External Page zone key (EZ1, EZ2 or EAZ).

If the zone you want is busy, try again later.

If you don’t have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.

Making an Internal Page using your 64-button DSS Console:

1. Press DSS Console Internal Page zone key (IZ1 – IZ4).

If the zone you want is busy, try again later.

If you don’t have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.

Switching the Night Service mode from your 64-button DSS Console:

1. Press Night Service (NT) key.

Using a DSS Console key as a Programmable Function Key:

You can store Function codes under DSS Console keys.

1. Press DSS Console key for function.

For example, you can Forward your calls by pressing DSS Key + 1 + destination. Your DSS key must have been previously programmed for the Call Forward feature.

~ 126 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Directed Call Pickup

Description

Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This allows a user to conveniently answer a co-worker’s call from their own telephone. With Directed Call Pickup, an extension user can pick up:

Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls)

Direct Inward Lines

Transferred trunk calls

Transferred Intercom calls

Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls

Conditions

A) Directed Call Pickup does not pick up calls recalling an extension (such as Hold and

Transfer recalls) or calls on Hold.

B) An extension can use Directed Call Pickup to intercept calls to which it is denied access in

Programs 14-07 and 15-06.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

20-10-05 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Directed Call Pickup for Own Group

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing their own group.

Related Features

For other features which let you cover a co-worker’s calls, refer to: Department Calling

Group Call Pickup

Hotline

Multiple Directory Numbers

Secretary Call Pickup

Personal Park

Voice Mail

Operation

To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-worker’s extension:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line set, lift handset.

2. Dial 715.

3. Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.

If more than one call is coming in, the system sets the priority for which call it will answer first.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 127 ~

Features

Do Not Disturb

Description

Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate DND while their phone is idle or while on a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line keys. The user may use the phone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.

There are five Do Not Disturb options available at each extension:

1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked

2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked

3 = All calls blocked

4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked

0 = Do Not Disturbed cancelled

Conditions

If there is no Call Forwarding key (Program 15-07: 10 - 17), the DND key will blink when the extension is forwarded.

Default Settings

Enabled for all extensions.

Programming

11-12-01 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Forwarding/DND Override

In order to use the DND Override service code if voice mail is installed, the single digit service code (11-16-09) must be deleted or changed as it conflicts with the DND Override code.

11-16-06 : Single Digit Service Code Setup - DND/Call Forward Override

If a single digit service code is to be used, assign an available code number.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-04 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Call Forward/DND Override

Determine whether or not an extension should be able to override DND (0=denied,

1=allowed).

Related Features

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override

Central Office Calls, Answering

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns

Operation

To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle:

System Phone

1. Do not lift the handset.

2. Press DND key.

OR

~ 128 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Press a SPK key and dial 847.

3. Dial the DND option code.

0 = Cancel DND

1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked

2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked

3 = All calls blocked

4 = Call Forwards blocked

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset.

2. Dial 847.

3. Dial the DND option code.

0 = Cancel DND

1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked

2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked

3 = All calls blocked

4 = Call Forwards blocked

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 129 ~

Features

Doorphone

Description

The Doorphone is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door can press the Doorphone call button (like a door bell). The Doorphone then sends chime tones to all extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called extension user just lifts the handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Doorphone. The Doorphone is convenient to have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the delivery entrance; they just answer the Doorphone chimes instead. Any number of system extensions can receive Doorphone chime tones.

Each Doorphone has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door strike. Use these contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After answering the Doorphone chimes, a system phone user can press FLASH to activate the Doorphone contacts. This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door.

The device connected to the Doorphone contacts cannot exceed the contact ratings shown in the table below:

Doorphone Relay Contact Specifications

Contact Configuration Normally Open

Maximum Load

[email protected] VDC

[email protected] VAC

The system can have up to two Doorphones.

Conditions

Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details.

Default Setting

Enabled

Programming

10-03-01 : PCB Setup - Channel 1 Terminal Type

Set the terminal type to “8” for Doorphone usage.

32-01-01 : Doorphone Timers - Doorphone Answer Time

Set the interval within which a user must answer the Doorphone chimes.

32-01-02 : Doorphone Timers - Door Lock Cancel Time

Set the length of time the Doorphone strike stays open when the single line user hook flashes or system phone user presses Flash.

32-02-01 : Doorphone Ring Assignments

Determine which Doorphones (1-6) should ring which extensions.

32-03-01 : Doorphone Basic Setup - Chime Pattern

Set the chime pattern (0-6) for each Doorphone.

32-03-02 : Doorphone Basic Setup - CODEC Transmit Gain Setup

Setup 32-03-03 : Doorphone Basic Setup - CODEC Receive Gain Setup

Select the CODEC gain types (1-63) for each Doorphone (1-6).

Related Features

Paging, External

~ 130 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Single Line Telephones, Analogue Single Line Sets

Operation

To call a Doorphone:

System Phone

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 802.

3. Dial Doorphone Number (1-6).

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset.

2. Dial 802.

3. Dial Doorphone Number (1-6).

To activate the Doorphone strike:

System Phone

1. While talking to the Doorphone, press the Flash key.

Single Line Telephone

1. While talking to the Doorphone, hookflash.

To answer a Doorphone chime:

1. Lift handset.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 131 ~

Features

Fax Machine Compatibility

Description

Fax Machine Compatibility lets you integrate a customer-provided fax machine into your telephone system. You have the following options:

Transfer to Fax

Transfer to Fax allows an extension user to Transfer their active voice call to a company fax machine. After the Transfer completes, the user’s outside caller can start their fax machine and send the fax. This would benefit a salesperson on the road, for example. The salesperson could call their secretary and give a general report - and then fax detailed figures when the conversation is over.

Direct Inward calling to Fax

DIL/DID provide direct routing to fax machines installed as system extensions. Use a DIL/DID for a “fax only” line for unattended sending and receiving of faxes.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering and Central Office Calls, Placing for trunk programming.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing / Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Inward Line

Direct Inward Dialling

Ring Groups

Single Line Telephones - Analogue/Digital

Voice Response System (VRS)

Voice Mail

Operation

To transfer a call to the fax machine:

System Phone

1. Press HOLD.

You hear Transfer dial tone.

2. Dial fax machine extension number.

If you have Automatic On Hook Transfer and the extension you call is busy, pressing CALL returns you to the call.

If the called extension doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or press CALL to return to the call.

3. Hang up.

If you don’t have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press the TRF Key to Transfer the call.

Single Line Set

1. Hookflash.

2. Dial fax machine extension number.

If the called extension doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or hookflash to return to the call.

3. Hang up.

~ 132 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Flash

Description

Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting trunk loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.

Conditions

None.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

14-02-03 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup – Flashing

Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash (0).

14-02-04 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect

For each trunk, indicate if Flash is for Flash (0) or open loop disconnect (1).

15-02-05 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Transfer Key Operation Mode

If CONF (TRF) key should access Flash, enter 2. Otherwise, enter 0 or 1.

15-03-04 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup – Flashing

In a single line telephone’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to hookflash for system feature access.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

81-01-14 : Analogue Trunk Initial Data Setup - Hookflash 1

Set the Flash duration (16-4080mS) for analogue trunk (COIU PCB) circuits.

81-01-15 : Analogue Trunk Initial Data Setup - Hookflash 2

Set the open loop disconnect duration (16-4080mS) for analogue trunk (COIU PCB) circuits.

Related Features

PBX Compatibility

Toll Restriction

Voice Mail

Operation

To flash the trunk you are on:

System Phone and Digital Single Line

1. Press FLASH.

Single Line Set

1. Hookflash.

2. Dial 806.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 133 ~

Features

Flexible System Numbering

Description

Flexible System Numbering lets you reassign the system’s port-to-extension assignments. This allows an employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office. In addition, factory technicians can make comprehensive changes to your system’s number plan. You can have factory technicians:

Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension numbers can be up to four digits long.

Change your system’s Service Code numbers

Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes

Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you.

You can also use Flexible System Numbering to change the system’s Trunk Group Routing code. Although the default code of 0 is suitable for most applications, you can alter the code if you have to.

The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan. Refer to the chart below and the

Programming section for more details.

11-01 :

11-09-01 :

11-10

11-11

11-12

11-16

:

:

:

:

Flexible System Numbering

Program Description

Set the system’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan.

The numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial to access features and other extensions.

Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 0).

This is the code users dial to access Automatic Route

Selection or Trunk Group Routing.

Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)

Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

Customize the Service Codes.

Single Digit Service Code Setup

Assign the Single Digit Service Codes. These are the post-Dialling codes a user can dial after placing an

Intercom call to a co-worker.

Conditions

A) Programming follows a telephone’s extension number, not the port number in most cases. If you relocate a phone, you may need to change additional programming.

B) If the extension numbering plan is changed from ‘2xx’ to ‘1xx’, and you would like to consecutively press two DSS keys without toggling the hookswitch, Program 11-16-05 must be removed. If not, pressing the second DSS key will actually change voice/ringing call to the first extension.

C) Since making changes in Program 11-01 does not automatically make any other changes in any other program, changing the number plan after the system is in operation may cause problems in the following programs:

11-01 Type 2 (Extension Number)

11-02 11-04 11-06 11-07

11-01 Type 1 (Service Codes)

11-10 11-11 11-12 11-15

15-14 21-11 30-03

15-14 21-11

~ 134 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Any feature which requires Dialling a code or extension number can be affected.

Default Setting

Extensions are numbered consecutively (Program 11-02 and 11-04) from: 200 (port 01) to 295

(port 96)

Programming

11-01-01 : System Numbering

Customise the system’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan.

11-02-01 : Extension Numbering

Assign extension numbers to extension ports. The telephone’s programming identity follows the port number - not the extension number.

11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code

Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 0) for ARS/Trunk Group Routing.

11-10-01 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

11-11-01 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)

11-12-01 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

Customise the Service Codes.

11-16-01 : Single Digit Service Code Setup

Assign the Single Digit (post-dialling) Service Codes.

Related Features

None

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 135 ~

Features

Forced Trunk Disconnect

Description

Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension’s active outside call.

The user can then place a call on the released trunk. Forced Trunk Disconnect lets a user access a busy trunk in an emergency, when no other trunks are available. Maintenance technicians can also use Forced Trunk

Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation. This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.

CAUTION

Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line. Only use this feature in an emergency and when no other lines are available.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-07-11 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Forced Trunk Disconnect

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Forced Trunk

Disconnect.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Operation

To disconnect a busy trunk:

System Phone

1. Press line key for trunk.

OR

Dial trunk access code (805 + trunk number).

You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 01-51.

2. Dial 724.

You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the trunk.

You can now place a call on the free trunk.

3. Press line key for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.

OR

Dial the trunk access code (805 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.

Single Line Telephone

1. Dial trunk access code (805 + trunk number).

You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 01-51.

2. Dial 724.

~ 136 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line.

3. Hookflash.

You can now place a call on the free line.

Dial the trunk access code (805 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 137 ~

Features

Group Call Pickup

Description

Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in a Pickup Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each other’s calls. The user can intercept the ringing call by Dialling a code or pressing a programmed Group Call Pickup key. If several extensions within the group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the call based on the extension’s priority within the

Pickup Group.

With Group Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following types of calls:

A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number

A call ringing another pickup group when the user doesn’t know the group number

A call ringing the user’s own pickup group

Conditions

A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign Group Call Pickup keys: Code 24 for an extension’s own Pickup Group and ring group calls (Service Code 867) Code 25 for a phone ringing in another Pickup Group (Service Code

869) - used when the caller doesn’t know the group number Code 26 (+ group) for a phone ringing in another specific Pickup Group (Service Code 868)

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service to an extension (1-15).

20-10-01 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup Within Group

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up calls ringing their pickup group (Service Code 867).

20-10-02 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup from Another Group

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up calls ringing telephones that are not in their pickup group (Service Code 869

20-10-03 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup for Specific Group

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up calls ringing a specific group (Service Code 868).

20-10-04 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Group

Call Pickup.

20-10-05 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Directed Call Pickup for Own Group

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing their own group.

23-02-01 : Call Pickup Groups

Assign extensions to Pickup Groups. Also, use this option to assign an extension’s priority within a Pickup Group (Call Pickup Groups 1-9 or 01-32, Priority Number 1-999).

~ 138 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering

Directed Call Pickup

Hold / Park

Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To answer a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. (System Phone only) Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 24).

OR

Dial 856 or 867.

Service Code 867 can pick up any call in the group, plus any Ring Group calls. Service Code 856 cannot pick up

Ring Group calls.

To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don’t know the group number:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. (System Phone only) Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 25).

OR

Dial 869.

To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. (System Phone only)

Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 26 + group).

OR

Dial 868 and the group number (1-9 or 01-32).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 139 ~

Features

Handsfree and Monitor

Description

Handsfree allows a system phone user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone

(instead of the handset). Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands while talking on the phone.

The system provides three variations of Handsfree operation:

Handsfree

Automatic Handsfree

Monitor

User can place and answer calls by pressing SPK instead of using the handset.

User can press a line or line appearance key without first lifting the handset or pressing SPK. An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for just outgoing calls or both outgoing calls and incoming line/loop key calls. Automatic Handsfree can also be used with the

Call Coverage or Park features. Normally, extensions without speakerphones should have Automatic

Handsfree for outgoing calls only.

User can place a call without lifting the handset, but must lift the handset to speak.

Conditions

Keysets are half-duplex which may cause the speaker to turn off (clip) during conversations.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering / Central Office Calls, Placing

Handsfree Answerback

Microphone Mute

Single Line Telephones

Prime Line Selection

Operation

To talk Handsfree:

1. Press SPK, CALL key or line key.

2. Place call.

3. Speak toward phone when called party answers.

To change a handset call into a Handsfree call:

1. Press SPK.

2. Press SPK to hang up.

~ 140 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

To change a Handsfree call into a handset call:

1. Lift handset.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 141 ~

Features

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Description

Handsfree Answerback permits an system phone user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset.

Conditions

Handsfree Answerback is not available at a analogue single line telephone.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

20-02-12 : System Options for System Telephones - Forced Intercom Ringing

Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Intercom Ringing. If disabled (0), Intercom calls voice-announce.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-08-10 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Switching from Handsfree

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to toggle between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls

(dial 1 or Service Code 812).

20-09-05 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) Setting Handsfree answerback/Forced

Intercom Ringing

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set

Handsfree Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823) for incoming Intercom calls.

Related Features

Related Features

Handsfree and Monitor

Microphone Mute

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 821.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

This disables Forced Intercom Ringing.

To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 823.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

This disables Handsfree Answerback.

~ 142 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling:

1. Dial 1.

If ringing, your call voice-announces. If voice-announced, your call starts to ring the destination. This option is also available at single line telephones.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 143 ~

Features

Headset Operation

Description

A system phone user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using Handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, Headset Operation provides privacy not available from Handsfree.

An extension in the headset mode has two options for when it appears busy to incoming callers.

The headset extension can be:

Busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy (i.e., Off-Hook Signalling prevented)

OR

Busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy (i.e., Off Hook

Signalling allowed)

Conditions

A) While in the headset mode, the Headset function key becomes a release (disconnect) key and no dial tone is heard from the speaker.

B) While in the headset mode, the hook switch is not functional.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Headset operation (code 05).

20-02-05 : System Options for System Telephones - Headset Busy Mode

Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers:

• The Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy (0).

OR

• Headset extension is busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy (1).

20-02-12 : System Options for System Telephones - Forced Intercom Ringing

Determine whether intercom calls should ring or voice-announce extensions (0=voice,

1=ring).

Related Features

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To enable the headset:

1. Program a Headset key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 05).

You hear a confirmation beep.

To use the headset:

The Headset key lights when you’re on a call. To disconnect, press the Headset key again.

The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed.

~ 144 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Answer a ringing call by pressing the Headset key.

OR

Press the Headset key and then a line key to make a trunk call.

OR

Press the Headset key to get Intercom dial tone.

OR

If on a call, press the Headset key to hang up.

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

~ 145 ~

Features

Hold

Description

Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or Music on

Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold, the extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold.

There are four types of Hold:

System Hold

An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other System

Phones. Any system phone user with the flashing line key can pick up the call.

Exclusive Hold

When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold.

The trunk appears busy to all other System Phones that have a key for the trunk. Exclusive hold is important if a user doesn’t want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold.

Group Hold

If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up the call. This lets members of a department easily pick up each other’s calls.

Intercom Hold

A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension.

Hold Recall to Operator

Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that have been left on hold too long. With Hold Recall to Operator:

A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall time.

The recalling trunk will ring the extension that placed it on Hold for the Hold/Exclusive Hold

Recall Callback Time.

After the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time, the trunk call will ring the operator.

Hold Recall to Operator applies to trunk calls placed on System Hold, Exclusive Hold and Group

Hold. It does not apply to Intercom calls.

Conditions

The called extension must lift the handset or press the SPK key before the call can be placed on hold.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

14-01-16 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Forced Release of Held Call

Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Release of Held Call.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-51). This sets the access options for trunks on Hold.

15-02-06 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Hold Key Operating Mode

Set the function of the extension’s HOLD key: System (0), Exclusive (1), or Park (2) Hold.

15-02-07 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Automatic Hold for CO Line

Determine whether an extension will use Automatic Hold for CO calls (0) or if the call should disconnect (1).

~ 146 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-51) to extensions.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Exclusive Hold (code 45). If an extension has its fixed Hold key reassigned (in Program 15-02-06), assign a function key for System Hold (code 44).

16-02-01 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions

Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-32).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-09 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Group Hold Initiate

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate

Group Hold (Service Code 832).

20-11-10 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Group Hold Answer

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up a call placed on Group Hold (Service Code 862).

20-11-13 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Hold Recall to Operator

Enable (1) or disable (0) Hold Recall to Operator. If enabled, a call recalling an extension longer than the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time will recall the operator (normally

200). If disabled, the call will continually recall the extension that placed it on Hold.

20-17-01 : Operator’s Extension

Assign an operator’s extension number if Hold Recall to Operator will be used.

24-01-01 : System Options for Hold - Hold Recall Time

Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval.

24-01-02 : System Options for Hold - Hold Recall Callback Time

Set the Hold Recall Callback Time (0-64800 seconds). A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this interval.

24-01-03 : System Options for Hold - Exclusive Hold Recall Time

Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval.

24-01-04 : System Options for Hold - Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time

Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this interval. If still unanswered, the call changes to System Hold.

24-01-05 : System Options for Hold - Forced Release of Held Calls Interval

Set the Forced Release of Held Calls interval (0-64800 seconds). If enabled in Program

14-01-16, the system disconnects a call if on Hold longer than this interval.

Related Features

Related Features

Music on Hold

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Operation

~ 147 ~

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

System Hold

To place an outside call on System Hold (System Phone only):

1. Press HOLD.

A line/loop/CALL key flashes slowly while on Hold; flashes fast when recalling.

OR

1. If you know the specific line number, dial 772 + Line number (01-51).

To pick up an outside call on System Hold:

System Phone

1. Press flashing line/loop/CALL key.

OR

1. If you know the specific line number, dial 772 + Line number (01-51).

Exclusive Hold

To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold:

System Phone

1. Press Exclusive Hold key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 45).

A line/loop/CALL key flashes slowly while on Hold, flashes fast when recalling.

To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold:

System Phone

1. Press flashing line/loop/CALL key.

Group Hold

To place a call on Hold so anyone in your extension group can pick it up:

System Phone

1. Press HOLD.

2. Dial 832.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1. Hookflash.

2. Dial 832.

3. Hang up.

To pick up a call on Group Hold:

System Phone

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 862.

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset.

2. Dial 862.

Intercom Hold

To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:

1. Press HOLD.

The CONF/DND key flashes.

2. Press SPK to hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 148 -

To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:

1. Press SPK.

or

Press flashing CONF/DND key.

Features

- 149 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Hotline

Description

Hotline gives a system phone user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline partner).

Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a single key.

In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partner’s extension

When the key is… The extension is …

Off idle

On Busy or ringing

Fast Flash

DND – All calls (option 3) or

Intercom calls (option 2)

Conditions

An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner’s extension.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Hotline (code 01 + partner’s extension number).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service to an extension (1-15).

Related Features

Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns

Do Not Disturb

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Hotline, External

Off Hook Signalling

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To place a call to your Hotline partner:

1. Press Hotline key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 01 + partner’s extension number)

You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy.

To transfer your outside call to your Hotline partner:

1. Press Hotline key.

2. Announce call and hang up.

OR

Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced.

If unanswered, the call recalls like a regular transferred call.

To answer a call from your Hotline partner:

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 150 -

1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone.

OR

If your telephone rings, lift handset.

Features

- 151 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Intercom

Description

Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete internal calling capability.

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. Refer to Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing for more.

Conditions

Preventing ICM calls does not affect Dialling other service codes, including Emergency calls.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

For Intercom . . .

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-08-01 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Intercom Calls

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to place

Intercom calls.

20-17-01 : Operator’s Extension

Assign the operator’s extension.

20-18-01 : Service Tone Timer - Extension Dial Tone Time

Set the Extension Dial Tone Time (0-64800 seconds). After getting Intercom dial tone, a system phone user has this interval to dial the first digit of the Intercom call.

21-01-02 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Intercom Interdigit Time

Set the Intercom Interdigit Time (0-64800 seconds). When placing Intercom calls, users must dial each digit within this interval.

82-01-01 : Incoming Ring Tone - Intercom Ring Tone

Customize the Intercom ring tone.

For Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing . . .

20-02-12 : System Options for System Telephones - Forced Intercom Ringing

Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Intercom Ringing. If disabled (0), Intercom calls voice-announce.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-08-10 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Switching from Handsfree

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to toggle between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls

(dial 1 or Service Code 812).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 152 -

Features

20-09-05 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Setting Handsfree

Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set

Handsfree Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823) for incoming Intercom calls.

Related Features

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Intercom Abandoned Call Display

Line Preference

Name Storing

Operation

To place an Intercom call:

1.

Press SPK key (or lift handset).

2.

Dial extension number (or 9 for your operator).

3.

Dial 1 to toggle between a Signalling (Ringing) Call and a Voice Call.

If the extension you call is busy or doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or dial 2 to step to the next extension without hanging up.

To answer an Intercom call:

1.

If you hear two beeps (Voice Call), speak toward phone handsfree.

-OR-

If your telephone rings (Signalling Call), lift handset or press SPK.

To check your extension information:

System Phone

1.

Press CHECK.

2.

Press CALL.

Your display shows your telephone’s extension number, port number and Department Group.

3.

Press CLEAR to return the normal time/date display.

To change how Intercom calls ring at your extension:

1.

Press the CALL key.

2.

Dial 823 to have intercom calls ring at your extension (Signalling).

-OR-

3.

Dial 821 to have intercom calls voice announce to your extension (Voice).

- 153 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

ISDN Compatibility

Description

ISDN-BRI (Integrated Service Digital Network - Basic Rate Interface) is a telephone network service that provides two B-channels (2B+D) for voice call trunking. The B-channels are used to provide two CO/PBX type connections. Caller ID is a standard feature on ISDN-BRI provided trunks. Caller ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal for CO incoming calls. This interface provides voice communication path only.

Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

Your system provides compatibility with ISDN Basic Rate (BRI) services, including:

Basic BRI Call Control (BCC) for 2 or 4 interfaces

2 x 64kbps Clear B-Channel and 16kbps D-Channel (2B+D)

Point-to-Point BRI Terminal Connection (no daisy-chaining)

Multipoint BRI Terminal Connection (daisy-chaining)

S-Bus (allows BRI PCB's to be used as either a trunk or station interface)

BRI services require the installation of BRI Interface PCBs (2BRIU or 4BRIU). Each 2BRIU

Interface PCB has two BRI circuits, while the 4BRIU Interface PCB has four BRI circuits. The BRI

Interface PCBs install into the slots of the 2OPBOX unit.

SMDR Includes Dialled Number

The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk’s name (entered in system programming) or the number the incoming caller dialled (i.e., the ISDN DDI digits). This gives you the option of analysing the SMDR report based on the number your callers dial. When using the SMDR reports for ISDN, all incoming BRI calls will be displayed under the CLASS column as “IVIN”.

Display Shows Why Caller ID is Not Available

With Caller ID enabled, the system will provide information for ISDN calls that do not contain the Caller ID information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display will show “PRIVATE”. If the system is not able to provide Caller ID information because the telco information is not available, then the display will show “OUT OF AREA”.

Calling Party Number Notification

The system can provide calling party number notification for outgoing ISDN calls. When a call is made on an

ISDN line by an extension, the system will send the identification for the extension placing the call, if it’s programmed. If there is no Extension Calling Number assigned, the system will send the calling number for the

ISDN trunk. If both the extension and trunk information is programmed, the extension information will be sent as it takes priority. When the option for calling party sub-address is on, the extension number will be sent as the sub-address information. Both the calling party number and calling party sub-address are sent in a SETUP message as the calling party information element and a calling party sub-address information element.

Conditions

A) When Program 10-03-03 is changed between Point-Multipoint and Point-Point, the Topaz system must be reset (switch off then on again) before the service will operate.

Default Setting

Connection Type = Point-Multipoint.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 154 -

Features

Programming

10-03 : System Configuration Setup – PCB Setup (BRIU)

Setup the Basic Configuration data for the BRI ISDN card ,as follows:

10-03-01 : ISDN Line Mode (T-Point, S-Point, S-Point Leased Line).

10-03-02 : Logical Port Number.

10-03-03 : Connection Type (Point-Multipoint, Point-Point).

10-03-04 : Layer 3 Timer Type (1-5).

10-03-05 : CLIP Information Announcement (Disable, Enable).

Based on this setting, the system will include a “Presentation Allowed” (1) or “Presentation

Restricted” (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program

15-01-04 must also be set to a ‘1’ if this option is enabled.

10-03-06 : S-Point Connection Mode (Extended Passive Bus, Short Passive Bus).

10-03-07 : S-point DID digits (0-4).

10-03-08 : Dial Sending Mode (Enbloc sending, Overlap sending).

10-03-09 : Dial Information Element (Overlap Sending Mode) (Keypad Facility, Called Party

Number).

If Overlap Sending is selected in Program 10-03-08, select either Keypad Facility (0) or

Called Party Number (1) for the dial information element.

10-03-14 : S-Point Service Protocol (Keypad facility, Special Protocol for Topaz system).

10-06 : System Configuration Setup – ISDN BRI Setup

Specify the TEI selection and DID mode for DID callers when the BRI feature is used.

10-06-01 : TEI selection (Select by SPID number, Select by Channel ID Number).

10-06-02 : DID mode (Route by Called Party Number, Route by Redirecting Number).

10-06-03 : SPID1 (Up to 20 digits).

10-06-04 : SPID2 (Up to 20 digits).

15-01-04 : Basic Extension Data Setup – Calling Party Number Notification (ISDN Caller ID)

If both Program 15-01-04 and 10-03-05 are enabled (1), the system includes Caller ID in the

Setup message as “Presentation Allowed”. If these options are disabled (0), it will be

“Presentation Restricted”.

15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys

Assign a Programmable Function Key for Caller ID Block for ISDN (Function Number 63), if required, to restrict the sending of Caller ID on outgoing calls.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-23 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Display the Reason for Transfer

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display the reason (Call Forward, Busy, No

Answer or DND) a VRS, DID, DISA, or ISDN call is being transferred to their extension.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 155 -

Features

20-08-13 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - ISDN CLIP

Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators are to be allowed (0=disabled, 1=enabled).

20-25 : System Option Setup – ISDN Options

Define the ISDN system options for the BRI ISDN card ,as follows:

20-25-01 :

Send Release Message After Subscriber Hang Up

20-25-02 :

Progress Indicate Information element detect

20-25-03 :

Bearer Capability select from SLT Outgoing (3.1kHz Audio, Speech)

20-25-04 : Send DT Until User Dials the First Digit (Overlap Sending Mode)

20-25-05 :

T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect Message

20-25-06 :

Call Proceeding Send Mode

20-25-07 :

Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect Message Received

20-25-08 :

Use of Low Layer Compatibility (LLC)

20-25-09 :

Use of High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending

20-25-10 :

S-Point Terminal Seizes Analogue Trunk

20-25-11 :

Automatic Changing System Clock When Date/Time Information Element

Received

20-25-12 :

Forwarded Incoming Calls Return Connect Message when Outgoing Call

Receives Alert Message

20-25-13 :

Use busy tone when trunk call receives Release Message

21-08-04 : Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk

Set the timer to send out Busy Tone on an ISDN line, when the called party is busy

(0-64800sec).

21-12 : Outgoing Call Setup – ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks

Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program

21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21-12.

Note: If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in Program 21-13.

21-13 : Outgoing Call Setup – ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions

Assign each extension a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-12), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21-13. Note: If the Calling

Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in

Program 21-13.

22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. There is one item for each Night Service

Mode.

22-09 : Incoming Call Setup – DID Basic Data Setup

For each trunk group, define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for each trunk group.

22-09-01 :

Expected Number of Digits from Telco (1-8)

22-09-02 :

Received Vacant Number Operation (Disconnect, Transfer)

22-09-03 :

Sub-addressing Mode (Extension Number specify, DID Conversion Table)

22-09-04 :

DID Receiving Mode for ISDN (Enbloc Receiving, Overlap Receiving)

22-09-05 :

Local Code Digits (0-15)

22-09-06 :

Local Code (Max. 16 digits)

22-09-07 :

Pilot Code (1 digit, 0-9)

22-09-08 :

T302 Time-out Operation (Disconnect, Transfer)

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 156 -

Features

22-11-01 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion

Specify for each Translation Table entry (2000):

The digits received by the system (eight max.)

The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits max.)

The name that should show on the dialled extension’s display when it rings (twelve characters max.)

The Transfer Target - 1 and 2. If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination (Program 2-10).

Operation mode

Related Features

Caller ID

With Caller ID enabled, the system will provide information for ISDN calls that do not contain the Caller ID information. Outgoing calls on ISDN trunks can send extension based caller ID details with the call.

Call Forward Off-Premise

This feature requires ISDN trunks, or loop start trunks with disconnect supervision.

Off-Premise Call Forward for Doorphones can be transferred to the external party through ISDN lines only.

Forced Trunk Disconnect

This feature only works on analogue trunk. ISDN trunks do not have the Forced Trunk

Disconnect available.

Station Message Detail Recording

SMDR records for incoming calls on ISDN trunks are tagged with IVIN.

Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)

This feature requires ISDN trunks, or loop start trunks with disconnect supervision.

Toll Restriction Dial Block

This feature is not available for ISDN BRI S-Bus extensions.

Transfer

Transferred calls on DISA, DID, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason a call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer, or DND).

Operation

Same as for analogue PSTN trunks.

- 157 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

LCR – Least Cost Routing

Description

Least cost routing allows the Topaz system to automatically select the indirect carrier defined by routing tables within the system.

An indirect carrier is accessed via the PSTN lines connected to the Topaz (these are the direct carrier lines), a special access code is used to select the indirect carrier, all dialled digits are passed to the indirect carrier for routing of the call to the destination.

The routing tables list the leading digits of numbers dialled by the users and the associated indirect carrier access code. It is possible to route calls to more than one indirect carrier.

Conditions

The PSTN numbers accepted by the indirect carrier may vary, consult the carrier for details.

Special attention must be given to Emergency calls (Police/Fire/Ambulance etc.), if you route

emergency calls to an indirect carrier you must confirm that they will accept this type of call.

It is normal practice to have an ‘override code’ that the users can dial to route the call to a chosen carrier (direct or indirect) in the event of faults with the carrier.

F-Route/ARS operation takes place on the digits dialled by the user, before the trunk is seized. LCR will use the digits sent to line i.e after any translation by F-Route/ARS.

Toll Restriction takes place on the digits dialled by the user. Toll restriction check will take place after any F-Route/ARS operation and before the LCR operation.

Local area calls can not be routed via an indirect carrier that also has Cost Centre Codes enabled.

This is due to the order that the digits are dialled out by the Topaz.

Local calls can be routed via an indirect carrier if Cost Centre Codes are not required.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-01-23 : LCR Service

Set the LCR Mode per trunk (0 : LCR Off, 1 : LCR On, 2 : LCR On - Cost Centre Code only).

26-01-04 : Automatic Route Selection Service - LCR Mode

Use this option to define the operation of dialled numbers beginning with digit 1.

UK Mode – LCR Manual Override Access Code Tables (Program 26-08-xx) are followed.

Not UK Mode – ARS Dial Analysis Tables (Program 26-02-xx) are followed.

26-02-01 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS – Dial

Enter the digits (16 digits maximum: 1-9, 0 * #, @; 200 separate entries) for the Dial Analysis

Table which will be analysed by ARS/LCR. This table will be checked after any programmed

F-Route operations have completed. The system will then refer to Program 26-02-02 and

26-02-03 to determine the routing for the call. To enter a wild card/don’t care digit, press Line

Key 1 to enter an @ symbol. It is important to remember that the system checks the table

numbers in numerical order. This means that entries for specific numbers should be entered first (such as your local area codes), then enter the items containing wild card digits. If the system sees an entry of “[email protected]@” then any table entries which follow will be ignored. For example, if 268, 269, and 270 are local exchanges, these would be the first three table entries

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 158 -

Features

which would route according to the settings made in Program 26-02-02 and 26-02-03 for each of the table entries. If the next entry is “[email protected]@”, then the system checks no further in this program and routes all other “2xx” numbers according to the entries made in Program

26-02-02 and 26-02-03 for this table entry.

26-02-06 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS - LCR Carrier Table

For each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), set the LCR Carrier Table (0-25) to be used.

26-05-01 : LCR Carrier Table - Delete Digits

26-05 defines the LCR Access Codes and routing options, including Authorization codes and

Cost Centre Codes. Enter here the quantity of leading digits that need to be deleted.

26-05-02 : LCR Carrier Table - Access Code

Enter the Access Code and Option to route to the Indirect Carrier.

26-05-03 : LCR Carrier Table - Authorization Code Table

Enter the table number (0-10) that contains the correct Authorization code.

26-05-04 : LCR Carrier Table - Cost Centre Code

Specify whether an optional cost centre code can be entered.

26-06-01 : LCR Authorization Code Table

Define the optional Authorization code (or PIN code) required by the Indirect Carrier. The

Authorization code is inserted if set in Program 26-05-03.

26-07-01 : LCR Cost Centre Code Table

Define the optional cost centre code required by the Indirect Carrier. The cost centre code is set for each extension. The cost centre code is inserted if set in Program 26-05-04, or if “Cost

Centre Code Only” is assigned in Program 14-01-23.

26-08-01 : LCR Manual Override Access Code - Manual Override Access Code

This code is dialled by the user to bypass the automatic selection.

26-08-02 : LCR Manual Override Access Code - Carrier Table No.

Specify the carrier table number (0-25) defined in 26-05.

26-09-01 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table

Define the numbers that must not be sent via an indirect carrier when the user dials a Manual

Override Access Code. The exemptions are normally Emergency Services that may not be supported by the indirect carrier.

- 159 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

0: LCR service OFF

LCR Basic Flow

Correspond

Does not Correspond

Start

PRG 14-01-23

LCR service

1: LCR service ON

Compare with

PRG 26-09-01

Exemption Table

Does not correspond

First digit is ‘1’

Yes

PRG 26-01-04

LCR Activity

Mode

0: UK Mode

Compare with

PRG 26-08-01

Manual Override

Table

Correspond

Compare with

PRG 26-09-01

Exemption Table

Correspond

Delete indirect

Access code

1: Not UK Mode

No

Compare with

PRG 26-02-01

Dial Analyse Table (n)

Does not Correspond

Correspond

Refer PRG 26-05

Carrier Table (n)

Dial Editing

Send Digits

END

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 160 -

2: Cost Centre Code only

Does not correspond

First digit is ‘0’

Yes

Refer PRG 26-05

Carrier Table No. 1

No

Features

Dial Editing Flow

Yes

Start

PRG 14-01-23

LCR service is

2: Cost Centre Code only

No

PRG 26-05-01

Delete digits

PRG 26-05-02

Insert Access Code

PRG 26-05-03

Authorisation

Code No. is set

Yes

PRG 26-06-01

Insert Authorisation

Code

No

Insert Cost

Centre Code

END

- 161 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Insert Cost Centre Code Flow

Yes

Related Features

Cost Centre Codes

Automatic Route Selection (F-Route)

Start

PRG 14-01-23

LCR service is

2: Cost Centre Code only

No

PRG 26-05-04

Cost Centre is set

Yes

PRG 26-07-01

Insert Cost Centre

Code

END

Operation

Feature is automatic once programmed.

No

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 162 -

Features

Last Number Redial

Description

Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number Dialled. For example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually Dialling the digits.

Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 36 digits a user dials. The number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension user can pre-select a specific trunk if desired.

Redial List

The system allows display telephones to have a Redial List. Up to 10 Dialled numbers (both external and internal destinations) are automatically stored in the Redial List. The user can display and select one of the stored numbers and then redial it. If more than 10 destination numbers are Dialled, the oldest number is automatically erased to make room for the new number.

Conditions

Redial List requires the use of a display telephone. Non-display and single line phones can not use this feature.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

11-12-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Last Number Dial

Assign a service code (816) to use Last Number Dial.

11-12-17 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Clear Last Number Dialling Data

Assign a service code (876) to clear the Last Number Dial.

15-02-13 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Redial List Mode

Select the type of numbers that will be stored in the Redial List - Internal and External numbers (0) or External only (1).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection

Repeat Redial

Save

Operation

To redial your last call:

1. Without lifting the handset, press LND.

The last dialled number is displayed.

2. To redial the last number, press #.

OR

Search for the desired number from the Redial List by pressing the LND or VOLUME or

VOLUME keys.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 163 -

Features

3. Lift the handset or press SPK to place the call.

The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last number dialled.

OR

1. At system phone, press idle line key (optional).

The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.

2. Press LND.

OR

1. At system phone, press a CALL key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 816.

The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last number dialled.

To check the number saved for Last Number Redial:

1. Press LND.

The stored number displays for six seconds. The stored number dials out if you:

- Lift the handset,

- Press an idle line key,

- Press a CALL key, or

- Press SPK

2. Press HOLD.

To erase the stored number:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 876.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 164 -

Features

Line Preference

Description

Line Preference determines how a system phone user places and answers calls. There are two types of Line

Preference: Incoming Line Preference and Outgoing Line Preference.

Incoming Line Preference

Incoming Line Preference establishes how a system phone user answers calls. When a call rings the system phone, lifting the handset answers either the ringing call (for Ringing Line Preference) or seizes an idle line (for

Idle Line Preference). The idle line can provide either Intercom or trunk dial tone (see Outgoing Line Preference below). Ringing Line Preference helps users whose primary function is to answer calls (such as a receptionist).

Idle Line Preference is an aid to users whose primary function is to place calls (such as a telemarketer).

Outgoing Line Preference

Outgoing Line Preference sets how a system phone user places calls. If a system phone has Outgoing Intercom

Line Preference, the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset. If a system phone has Outgoing

Trunk Line Preference, the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset. Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference. The user hears either trunk (“dial 0”) or

Intercom dial tone.

Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines

With Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions (not their own). This would help a user that has to answer calls for co-workers that are away from their desks. When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group

Routing programming. The extension user’s own ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker’s extensions.

Conditions

If a system phone extension has more than one call ringing its line keys, Ringing Line

Preference answers the calls on a first-in first-answered basis.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

For Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunks to trunk groups. This is part of Trunk

Group Routing programming.

14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing

For Auto Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, program the Trunk Group Routing table. Auto

Answer uses this table to determine the answer sequence for ringing calls.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, set up the Trunk

Access Maps (1-51).

15-01-02 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Outgoing Trunk Line Preference

Enable (1) or disable (0) Outgoing Trunk Line Preference for extensions.

15-02-09 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Ringing Line Preference for Intercom Calls

Enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for Intercom calls. See the table below for interaction.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 165 -

Features

15-02-10 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls

Enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for trunk calls. See the table below for interaction.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunk Access

Maps to extensions.

20-10-07 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Automatic Answer of Universal Calls

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Universal Auto Answer for non-ringing lines.

22-01-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Incoming Call Priority

Determine if ringing Intercom calls (0) or ringing trunk calls (1) should have answer priority.

See the table below for interaction.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign extensions to ring groups (1-25). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only works for trunks that do not ring an extension.

22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Assign trunks to ring groups (1-25). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only works for trunks that do not ring an extension.

23-03-01 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer

For each extension, select the route that it will use for Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines.

The routes correspond to the Trunk Group Routing table set in Program 14-06.

Related Features

Direct Inward Line

Ring Groups

Trunk Group Routing

Operation

To answer a ringing call if your phone has Ringing Line Preference:

1. Refer to the chart on the previous page.

To place a call if your phone has Outgoing Line Preference:

1. Refer to the chart on the previous page.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 166 -

Features

Long Conversation Cutoff

Description

For incoming and outgoing central office calls, each trunk can be programmed to disconnect after a defined length of time. The timer begins when the trunk is seized and disconnects the call after the timer expires.

When used with the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature, the system can provide a warning tone on outgoing trunks calls before the call is disconnected. This tone is not available to analogue single line telephone users nor is it available for incoming calls.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-01-14 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Long Conversation Cutoff

Enable (1) or disable (0) a trunk’s ability to disconnect incoming and outgoing central office calls automatically.

14-01-15 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Long Conversation Alarm Before Cut Off

Enable (1) or disable (0) the Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-13-02 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming)

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s class of service from using Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls.

20-13-03 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing)

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s class of service from using Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls.

20-21-03 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Cutoff Timer for incoming calls

Enter the time the system will wait before disconnecting incoming trunks (0-64800 seconds).

20-21-04 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Cutoff Timer for Outgoing

Calls

Enter the time the system will wait before disconnecting outgoing trunks (0-64800 seconds).

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering/Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Warning Tone for Long Conversation

Operation

Feature is automatic once programmed.

- 167 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Loop keys

Description

Loop keys are uniquely programmed function keys that simplify placing and answering trunk calls. There are three types of loop keys: Incoming Only, Outgoing Only and Both Ways.

Incoming Only Loop Keys

Incoming Only loop keys are for answering trunk calls. An extension can have an incoming loop key for a specific trunk group (fixed) or a “catch all” loop key for any trunk group (switched).

Fixed loop keys allow an extension user to tell the type of call by the ringing key. Switched loop keys are ideal for an extension with a large number of feature keys. In addition, switched loop keys are a destination for any trunk not on a line key or fixed loop key. Without a switched loop key, calls not appearing on a line key or fixed loop key will ring only the CALL key. Incoming

Only loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls.

Outgoing Only Loop Keys

Outgoing Only loop keys are for placing trunk calls. An extension can have outgoing loop keys for a specific trunk group or for ARS access. When a user presses the loop key, they get dial tone from the first available trunk in the group (or from ARS if programmed). Outgoing Only loop keys help ensure that an extension will always have a key available for placing calls.

Both Ways Loop Keys

Both Ways loop keys combine the functions of both Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop keys. Both Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and don’t separate keys for incoming and outgoing calls. Both Ways loop keys also receive

Transferred trunk calls.

An extension can have many loop keys - of any type. You can program an operator, for example, with four loop keys for incoming calls and four for outgoing calls.

Once a loop key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk call. For example, the user can place the call on Hold, Transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a Park Orbit.

An incoming call will ring the first available loop key, beginning with the lowest numbered key. If keys 1-3 are loop keys, for example, the first incoming call rings key 1. If key 1 is busy, the next call rings key 2. If keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call rings key 3. If all three keys are busy, additional incoming calls queue for the first available key. The telephone display will show “WAITING - LOOP KEY” if the user presses a loop key when there are additional calls waiting.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-25). In general, loop keys access trunks within specific trunk groups.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 168 -

Features

Set up the Trunk Access Maps. For example, if an extension’s loop key is for incoming and outgoing, make sure the Trunk Access Map allows incoming and outgoing access. Also see

Program 15-06 below.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Also see Program 14-07 above.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Program function keys as trunk group/loop keys (*02 or *05). For additional data, in Program

15-13 enter 0 (incoming only), 1 (outgoing only) or 2 (both ways).

15-13-01 : Loop Keys

For each loop key on an extension, program options for Data 1 and Data 2 (see the chart below).

20-07-10 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Programmable Function Key

Programming (Appearance Level)

If an extension should be able to use Programmable Functions Keys to program a loop key, enable this option in the user’s Class of Service (1-15).

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign extensions to Ring Groups (1-25). An incoming loop key will ring only for those trunks programmed to ring. Also see Program 22-05.

22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Assign trunks to Ring Groups (1-25). An incoming loop key will ring only for those trunks programmed to ring. Also see Program 22-04 above.

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) / Central Office Calls, Answering / Central Office Calls,

Placing

Off Hook Signalling

Programmable Function Keys

Ring Groups

Direct Inward Dialling (DID) / Direct Inward Line (DIL) / Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Operation

To place a call on a loop key:

1. Press outgoing or both ways loop key.

You hear dial tone and the key lights green.

2. Dial number.

To answer a call on a loop key:

Listen for ringing a look for a flashing loop key.

1. Press loop key.

The key lights green and you connect to the call.

If there are additional calls waiting to be answered, your display shows:

WAITING - LOOP KEY

To program a loop key:

1. Press the SPK key.

2. Dial 852.

3. Press the key you want to program as a loop key.

4. Dial *05.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 169 -

Features

5. Dial the loop key type:

0 = Incoming only

1 = Outgoing only

2 = Both ways (incoming and outgoing)

6. Dial the loop key routing option for incoming, outgoing, or incoming and outgoing calls:

000 = Trunk Group Routing or ARS (if installed)

01-25 = Trunk Groups

If you selected option 2 in step 5 above, enter the incoming Trunk Group followed by the outgoing Trunk Group.

7. Press SPK to hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 170 -

Features

Meet Me Conference

Description

With Meet Me Conference, an extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to 32 other internal or external parties (16 parties in total). Each party joins the Conference by Dialling a Meet Me

Conference code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting -- without leaving the office.

Conditions

Each block assigned in Program 10-07 for Conversation Recording reduces the number of blocks available for Conference, Recording.

One external paging zone is provided as a standard feature of the system. If more than one external paging zone is required, a 2PGDU unit must be installed in the system, providing an additional 2 zones.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

Note:

For additional programming for Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features.

10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits

The number of circuits assigned as Conversation Record circuits limits the number of available Conference circuits. Make sure there are circuits available for Conference.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for Conference (code 07), External Zone Paging (code 19 + zone),

External All Call Paging (code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 + zone) and Meet Me

Conference/Paging Pickup (code 23).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-10-06 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Meet Me Conference and Paging

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a

Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page.

31-01-04 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Privacy Release Time

Set the Privacy Release Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Conference, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation.

Related Features

Conference

Meet Me Paging

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

Meet Me External Conference

To make a Meet Me external Conference:

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 171 -

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 172 -

Features

System Phone

1. While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 07).

2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-3 or 0 for All Call)

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-3 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

OR

Press Page key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone & 20).

3. Announce the zone.

4. When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice.

5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

Single Line Telephone

1. While on a call, hookflash and dial 826.

2. Dial 803 and the External Paging zone code (1-3 or 0 for All Call).

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-3 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Announce the zone.

4. When co-worker answers your page, press the hookflash twice.

5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

To join a Meet Me External Conference:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 865.

3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone code (0-3).

You connect to the other parties.

Meet Me Internal Conference:

To make a Meet Me Internal Conference:

System Phone

1. While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 07).

2. Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-6 or 00-32).

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-6 (for Internal/External Zones 1-6) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Announce the zone.

4. When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice.

5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

Single Line Telephone

1. While on a call, hookflash and dial 826.

2. Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-6 or 00-32).

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-3 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Announce the zone.

4. When co-worker answers your page, press the hookflash twice.

5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 173 -

Features

To join a Meet Me Internal Conference:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).

OR

Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).

OR

Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 23) if your extension is in the zone called.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 174 -

Features

Meet Me Paging

Description

Meet Me Paging allows an extension user to Page a co-worker and privately meet with them on a Page zone.

The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place. While the co-workers meet on the zone, no one else can hear the conversation, join in or make an announcement using that zone. Meet Me Paging is a good way to talk to a co-worker when their location is unknown. If the co-worker can hear the Page, they can join in the conversation.

Conditions

One external paging zone is provided as a standard feature of the system. If more than one external paging zone is required, a 2PGDU unit must be installed in the system, providing an additional 2 zones.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

Note

: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging

Internal features.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 19 + zone), External All Call Paging

(code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 + zone) or Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup

(code 23).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-10-06 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Meet Me Conference and Paging

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a

Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page.

Related Features

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging Transfer

Paging, Internal / Paging, External

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

Meet Me External Page:

To make a Meet Me External Page:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-3 or 0 for All Call).

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-3 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Announce the zone.

OR

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 175 -

Features

1. At system phone, press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone & 20).

2. Announce the zone.

To join a Meet Me External Page:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 865.

3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-3).

You connect to the other party.

Meet Me Internal Page

To make a Meet Me Internal Page:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 801 and dial the Internal Paging Zone code (0-6, 00-32).

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-3 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Announce the zone.

OR

1. At system phone, press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone & 20).

2. Announce the zone.

To join a Meet Me Internal Page:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).

OR

Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).

OR

Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 23) if your extension is in the zone called.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 176 -

Features

Meet Me Paging Transfer

Description

If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co-worker but they don’t know where the co-worker is, they can use Meet

Me Paging Transfer. With Meet Me Paging Transfer, the user can Page the co-worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answers the Page. Since Meet Me Paging Transfer works with both

Internal and External Paging, a call can be quickly extended to a co-worker anywhere in the facility.

Conditions

One external paging zone is provided as a standard feature of the system. If more than one external paging zone is required, a 2PGDU unit must be installed in the system, providing an additional 2 zones.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

Note:

For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging

Internal features.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 19 + zone), External All Call Paging

(code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 + zone) and Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup

(code 23).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-10-06 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Meet Me Conference and Paging

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a

Meet Me Paging Transfer.

Related Features

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging

Paging, External

Paging, Internal

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

Meet Me External Paging Transfer

To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, while on a call, press HOLD.

OR

At single line telephone, while on a call, hookflash.

2. Press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone & 20).

OR

Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-3 or 0 for All Call).

OR

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 177 -

Features

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-3 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Announce the call.

4. When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.

To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 865.

3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-3).

You connect to the Paging party.

4. Stay on the line.

After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.

Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer

To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, while on a call, press HOLD.

OR

At single line telephone, while on a call, hookflash.

2. Press Internal Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 20 + zone).

OR

Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-6 or 00-32).

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-3 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Announce the call.

4. When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.

The answering party connects to the trunk call when you hang up.

To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).

OR

Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).

OR

Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 23) if your extension is in the zone called.

3. Stay on the line.

After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 178 -

Features

Memo Dial

Description

While on an outside call, Memo Dial lets a display system phone user store an important number for easy redialling later on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example, a user could dial Directory Assistance and ask for a client’s telephone number. When Directory Assistance plays back the requested number, the caller can use Memo Dial to jot the number down in the telephone’s memory. They can quickly call the Memo Dial number after hanging up.

When a user enters a Memo Dial number, the dialled digits do not output over the trunk. Dialling Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress.

Conditions

When Memo Dial calls out, it dials out the entire stored number. Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Memo Dial (code 31).

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Last Number Redial

Single Line Telephones

Save Number Dialled

Operation

To store a number while you are on a call:

1. While on a call, press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).

2. Dial number you want to store.

3. Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation.

To call a stored Memo Dial number:

1. Do not lift the handset.

2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).

3. Press a CALL key.

The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number.

OR

Press line key.

The stored number dials out.

To check to see the stored Memo Dial number:

1. Do not lift handset.

2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).

The stored number displays.

To cancel (erase) a stored Memo Dial number:

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 179 -

Features

1. Press a CALL key.

2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 180 -

Features

Message Waiting

Description

An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called extension and a steadily lit MW lamp on the calling extension. Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication. Message

Waiting ensures that a user will not have to recall an unanswered extension. It also ensures that a user will not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended. Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users:

View and selectively answer messages left at their extension (display system phone only)

Cancel all messages left at their extension

Cancel messages they left at other extensions

An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also, any number of extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension. A periodic VRS announcement may remind users that they have

Messages Waiting.

Message Waiting on Single Line Telephones

The system provides 3 methods of indicating Message Waiting on a Single Line Telephone (with or without a MW lamp). These methods are:

1. Special dial tone

2. Intermittent ringing

3. VRS announcement

Note the following items for this feature:

This feature can apply to any analogue single line telephone.

Since it's possible that a user will pick up the handset and dial without listening for dial tone, the system is able to detect Dialling during a VRS message and special dial tone.

All of the message waiting indication methods may be active at any SLT.

Options are available based on a station’s class of service.

A DSP daughter board must be installed for VRS messages.

There is a programmable delay from the time a SLT goes off-hook until the VRS message begins.

The default is set to 1 second.

The time between intermittent rings is programmable. The default time is 1800 seconds (30 minutes). If this timer is set to “0” then the system rings once.

These signalling methods are available to all analogue single line telephones, whether connected to an 308M/308ME card.

If both the Message Wait dial tone and VRS message are active, the user will hear the VRS message first then hear the Message Wait dial tone. If the special dial tone is not set, then the user will hear regular dial tone. Note: The regular dial tone may be different based on the phone's status (call forward, DND, etc.).

The Message Wait dial tone will be a system tone and can be changed in Program 80-01.

The VRS announcement does not work when telephones have the following features set:

1. Outgoing Trunk Line Preference

2. Hot Line (Internal)

3. Hot Line (External)

Conditions

Reminder messages require a DSP daughter board for VRS messages.

Message Waiting on a Single Line Telephone is not indicated by the MW lamp.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 181 -

Features

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Message Waiting (code 38).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-07 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Message Waiting

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to leave

Messages Waiting.

24-02-05 : System Options for Transfer - Message Wait Ring Interval Timer

For SLTs without message waiting lamps, this timer determines the amount of time between intermittent ringing. If this timer is set to '0' then the system rings once.

80-01-01 : Service Tone Setup - Message Wait Dial Tone

If the default tone is not acceptable for the Message Wait Dial Tone, a new tone can be assigned.

Related Features

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Programmable Function Key

Single Line Telephones

Voice Response System

Voice Mail

Operation

To leave a Message Waiting:

1. Call busy or unanswered extension.

2. Press Message Waiting key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 38)

3. Hang up.

With system phones, the MW LED lights.

To answer a Message Waiting:

When you have a message, your MW LED flashes fast for System Phones.

1. At a system phone, press a SPK key and dial 841.

OR

Press Message Waiting key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 38).

OR

At single line telephones, lift the handset and dial 841.

If the called extension doesn’t answer, dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to automatically leave them a message.

Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have new messages in your “Voice Mail” mailbox or a new “General Message”. Go to “To check your messages” below.

To cancel all your Messages Waiting:

This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you.

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 873.

3. Hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 182 -

Features

To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 871.

3. Dial number of extension you don’t want to have your messages.

4. Hang up.

To check your messages:

1. Press CHECK

2. Dial 841.

You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your phone.

If you see…

VOICE MESSAGE n MESSAGE

CHECK MESSAGE

VRS GENERAL MESSAGE

CHECK MESSAGE

(name)

You have…

New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox

A General message in Voice Mail that has not been heard.

Message Waiting requests left at your phone by your co-workers.

3. Press VOL or VOL to scroll through your display.

4. When you find the message you want to answer, press a SPK key. You’ll either:

Go to your Voice Mail mailbox.

Listen to the new General Message.

Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.

Single Line Telephones:

With VRS message only:

1. Lift handset.

2. After programmed delay, the extension user hears the VRS message “You have a message”.

3. Listen for dial tone.

With special dial tone only:

1. Lift handset.

The system provides the special Message Wait dial tone immediately.

With VRS and special dial tone:

1. Lift handset.

2. After the programmed delay, the extension user hears the VRS message “You have a message”.

The system provides the special Message Wait dial tone immediately.

- 183 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Microphone Mute

Description

Microphone Mute lets a system phone user turn off their phone’s handsfree or handset microphone at any time.

When activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller from hearing conversations in the user’s work area. The user may turn off the microphone while their telephone is idle, busy on a call or ringing. The microphone stays off until the user turns it back on.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled (using MIC key).

Programming

15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys

If an extension needs handset microphone mute, program a Handset Transmission Mute key

(code 40). To program a Mic Mute key, use code 02 as the entry. The Mic Mute key will mute conversation on a handsfree call, while the Handset Mute key will mute the handset transmission on a non-handsfree call.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

Related Features

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To mute your telephone’s handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call:

1. Press MIC.

This only turns off the Handsfree microphone.

OR

Press Microphone Mute key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 40).

This turns off both the handset and Handsfree microphone.

To turn your telephone’s microphone back on:

1. Press MIC.

Use MIC only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone.

OR

Press Microphone Mute key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 40).

Use the Microphone Mute key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your handset or Handsfree microphone.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 184 -

Features

Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

Description

Multiple Directory Numbers let a system phone have more than one extension number. Calls can route to the system phone’s installed number or to the system phone’s “virtual extension” Multiple Directory Number key.

This helps users identify incoming calls. For example, an extension installed at 304 (Sales) could have a virtual extension for 460 (Service). Calls to 304 ring the extension normally. Calls to 460 ring the Multiple Directory

Number key. This lets the user at extension 304 differentiate Sales calls from Service calls.

Call Coverage

A system phone can have Multiple Directory Number keys set up as Call Coverage keys for co-worker’s extensions. The Call Coverage key lights when the co-worker’s extension is busy and flashes slowly when the co-worker has an incoming call. The Call Coverage key can ring immediately when a call comes into the covered extension, ring after a delay or not ring at all. In addition, the system phone user can press the Call

Coverage key to intercept their co-worker’s incoming call. The user can also go off hook and press the Call

Coverage key to call the covered extension.

If the covered extension is busy and they receive a second call, the covering extension’s Call Coverage key will flash. The user just presses the flashing key to pick up the call.

The Call Coverage keys follow the extension’s Do Not Disturb and Off-Hook Signalling programming. These keys do not, however, indicate the lamping for extensions in DND. If this is required, a Hotline key can be used instead.

Place and Receive Calls on Call Coverage/Multiple Directory Number Keys

Multiple Directory Number keys/Call Coverage keys can be used three separate ways, depending on how the key is defined in Program 15-02-21.

• a DSS key to the extension and for receiving incoming calls

• answering incoming calls with the ability to place outgoing ICM or CO calls

OR

• just for receiving incoming calls

A system phone can have Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage keys for many different extensions and virtual extensions. In addition, co-workers can share the same Multiple Directory Numbers. For example, everyone in the Service Department could have a key for the Sales Department’s virtual extension.

Auto Off-Hook Answer and Ringing Line Preference for Call Coverage Keys

An extension’s Call Coverage Keys can be programmed to allow the user to simply pick up the handset to answer a ringing call. So as not to interfere with ringing trunk or Intercom calls, the system automatically assigns Call Coverage Key ringing with the lowest answering priority. If multiple Call Coverage Keys are ringing, answering priority is set first by the assigned ring pattern and then by the key position.

Virtual Extension vs. Ring Groups

As the system does not allow voice mail calls to ring Ring Groups, a virtual extension can be created which will allow you to direct calls to more than one extension. When you program a Call Coverage Key for that extension to ring, the next call can then be answered.

- 185 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

This could allow a voice mail caller to dial the virtual extension and have all the extensions with the same virtual extension key ring. The system can be programmed as follows:

Program 11-04, 15-01-01: Assign a virtual extension number and name (example: virtual port 1, extension 5400, Sales).

Program 15-07: Assign a Call Coverage key (*03) to an extension for the virtual extension number assigned.

The end user can then simply transfer the call to the virtual extension number (example: 5400). To allow calls to be queued at the virtual you must place the virtual within a Department Group and have the user transfer calls to the pilot number, the call is in placed in a queue and will be answered in turn as soon as the extension is available.

Conditions

A) More than one extension can share the same Multiple Directory Number.

B) An extension can have more than on Multiple Directory Number (limited only by the number of available function keys).

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

11-04-01 : Virtual Extension Numbering

Assign extension numbers to virtual extensions (virtual extension ports=1-50).

15-01-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Extension Name

Assign names to virtual extensions.

15-02-21 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup, Virtual Extension Access Mode

Determine whether an extension’s Virtual Extension/Call Coverage Key should be used as a

DSS key to the extension and for receiving calls (0), answering incoming calls and ability to place outgoing ICM or CO calls (1), or just receiving incoming calls (2).

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for Multiple Directory Numbers (code *03 + extension number).

15-08-01 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

Assign a ring tone (0-4) to each extension port and virtual extension port assigned to a

Multiple Directory Number key. If ringing is enabled for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone set in this program. Each port can have one of four different rings.

15-09-01 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

Individually program an extension’s Multiple Directory Number function keys to either ring

(1) or not ring (0).

15-10-01 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup

Set the priority (1-4) for the Multiple Directory Number Ring Tones set in Program 15-08.

When Multiple Directory Number calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest priority (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys just flash.

15-11-01 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

Individually program an extension’s Multiple Directory Number keys for Delayed Ringing (1) or Immediate Ringing (0). Also see Program 20-04-03 above.

20-04-03 : System Options for Virtual Extensions - Call Coverage Delay Interval

Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage Keys set for Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11 below) ring the covering extension after this interval.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 186 -

Features

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a COS to each extension (1-15).

20-07-10 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Programmable Function Key

Determine whether an extension’s Class of Service allows a user to set up a Call Coverage key using service code 852 (Enable=1, Disable=0).

20-10-08 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Auto Off-Hook Answer for Call Coverage

Keys

Determine whether an extension’s Call Coverage Key should be automatically answered when the handset is lifted (0=disabled, 1=enabled). With multiple ringing calls, Programs 1508,

15-10 and 23-04 determine which call is answered first.

23-04-01 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions

When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key, this program determines the priority (1-4) for a Ring Group (1-25) for automatically answering the ringing calls when the handset is lifted. If “00” is selected for the Ring Group, when the user lifts the handset, the user will answer a ringing call from any group.

Related Features

Class of Service

Department Calling

Do Not Disturb / Off-Hook Signalling

Group Call Pickup

Line Preference

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To answer a call ringing a Multiple Directory Number:

1. Press flashing Multiple Directory Number key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *03 + ext.).

To place a call to a Multiple Directory Number (including a Call Coverage key):

1. Press a CALL key.

2. Dial Multiple Directory Number number or press Multiple Directory Number key.

To place a call from a Multiple Directory Number (including a Call Coverage key):

1. Press the Multiple Directory Number key.

ICM dial tone is heard.

2. Place an intercom call or dial a trunk access code to seize an outside line and place your call.

To set up a Call Coverage Key:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 852.

3. Press the programmable key you want to program.

The previously programmed entry displays.

4. Dial *03.

5. Dial the number of the extension you want to cover.

6. Press HOLD once for Immediate Ring

To set for Delayed Ring, skip to Step 8.

7. Dial the Mode number(s) in which the key will be used.

1=Day 1

2=Night 1

3=Midnight 1

4=Rest 1

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 187 -

Features

5=Day 2

6=Night 2

7=Midnight 2

8=Rest 2

8. Press HOLD to set up Delayed Ring

OR

Skip to Step 10.

9. Dial the Mode number(s) in which the key will be used.

1=Day 1

2=Night 1

3=Midnight 1

4=Rest 1

5=Day 2

6=Night 2

7=Midnight 2

8=Rest 2

10. Press SPK to hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 188 -

Features

Music on Hold

Description

Music on Hold (MOH) sends music to calls on Hold and parked calls. The music lets the caller know that their call is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these types of calls. The

Music on Hold source can be internal (synthesized) or from a customer-provided music source (i.e., tape deck, receiver, etc.).

Note:

In accordance with copyright law, a license may be required if radio, television broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecommunications systems. NEC Business Solutions Ltd hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.

Conditions

C) Refer to the System Hardware Manual for instructions on how to install an external music source.

D) The system supports one External Music On Hold source input, via either the built-in music port or the 2PGDU card.

E) If a 2PGDU card is installed and has MOH assigned to one of its ports (Program 10-03-01 and 33-01-01=4), the built-in music port is no longer used for MOH, i.e. the 2PGDU card takes priority.

Default Setting

Music On Hold is provided from the internal (synthesised) music source.

Programming

10-04-01 : Music on Hold Setup - Music on Hold Source Selection

Determine whether the system should use internal (0) or external (1) music source.

10-04-02 : Music on Hold Setup - Music Selection for Internal Source

Set the Music on Hold selection. The options are 0 (silence), 1-2 (synthesized music selections).

10-04-03 : Music on Hold Setup - Audio Gain Setup

Set the Music on Hold audio gain (1-64).

14-08-01 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks

For each trunk, set the Music on Hold source (0=Internal synthesized MOH,

1=Customer-provided source connected to BGM port, 2=Customer-provided source connected to ACI port).

14-08-02 : Music on Hold Source Port Number

If the MOH type is “2” in 14-08-01, for each trunk enter the ACI source port number (0 – 96).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-07-02 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Changing the Music on Hold Tone

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to change the Music on Hold tone (Service Code 881).

Related Features

Single Line Telephones

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 189 -

Features

Operation

To change the Music on Hold tone:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 881.

3. Dial Music on Hold tone code:

00 Don’t play MOH tone

01 Play MOH tone

4. Press SPK to hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 190 -

Features

Name Storing

Description

Extensions and trunks can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a system phone’s display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and trunk names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls. A name can be up to 12 digits long, consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and spaces.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

14-01-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunk Name

Program names for system trunks.

15-01-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Extension Name

Program number for system extensions.

15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys

Assign an Extension Name Change key (55) to extensions:

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-09-02 : Class of Service Options (Call Service) - Trunk Name Display, Incoming

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunk’s name/ number when the trunk is ringing.

20-13-21 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Extension Name

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to program their name.

Related Features

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To program an extension’s name:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 800

OR

Press Extension Name Change key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 55).

3. Enter the extension number to be named.

4. Enter name (see below).

Your name can be up to 12 digits maximum.

- 191 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

5. Press HOLD.

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 12 digits long.

Use this keypad digit …

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

*

When you want to …

Enter characters:

1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | }

→ ←

Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.

Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3.

Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.

Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.

Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.

Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.

Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.

Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.

Enter characters:

0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )

Enter characters:

* + , - . / :

> ?

; < =

#

# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: STA). Pressing # again = Space.

DND/CONF

CLEAR

Clear the character entry one character at a time.

Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

6. Press SPK to hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 192 -

Features

Night Service

Description

Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes. Night Service redirects calls to their night mode destination, as determined by Assigned and Universal Night Answer programming. The system allows Night Service to be enabled for each Night Service group (1-4), allowing each group to determine when their calls should switch modes. A user typically activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. The system also provides external contacts to enable Night Service.

There are eight Night Service modes:

Day 1 / Day 2 Modes - for normal working hours

Night 1 / Night 2 Modes - after hours (usually evening)

Midnight 1 / Midnight 2 Modes - late at night to early in the morning

Rest 1 / Rest 2 Modes - interval usually used for lunch

Assigned Night Answer (ANA)

With Assigned Night Answer, Night Service has calls ring extensions directly. Assigned Night Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls. For certain applications, this may be more appropriate than

Universal Night Answer. For example, you could program trunks to ring the security station telephone during off hours.

Universal Night Answer (UNA)

Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers. With UNA, an employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key or use “Universal Answer” to pick up the call. For more on setting up Universal Answer, turn to the “Central Office Calls, Answering” feature.

You may also be able to use Transfer to UNA. An extension user can Transfer their call to UNA (i.e., External

Paging at night). Once transferred, the call will ring the External Paging speakers like any other UNA call and can be picked up at any extension. You can also set up Transfer to UNA through the VRS. This lets outside callers, answered by the VRS, dial a code to have their call ring External Paging.

Automatic Night Service

The system will allow or deny Automatic Night Service based on the extension’s class of service programming.

If allowed, the calls will then route according to the service patterns programmed.

Conditions

A) The following programs are affected by Night Mode:

15-06 22-05 25-04 34-02

15-09 22-07 25-05 34-03

15-11 22-08 25-08 34-04

20-06 22-12 25-09

21-02 22-13 25-10

21-04 23-03 25-11

21-12 25-02 25-12

21-15 25-03 31-05

- 193 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Almost all features are affected by Night Mode except for the following:

Flexible System Numbering

SMDR

Volume Control

Default Setting

System is always in the Day Mode.

Programming

11-10-01 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Day / Night Mode Switching

Customize the service code (818) to be used for day/night mode switching.

12-01-01 : Night Mode Function Setup - Manual Night Service Enable

Allow (1) or prevent (0) Department Group extension members from activating Night Service.

12-01-02 : Night Mode Function Setup - Automatic Night Service Enabled

Enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Night Service for the system. Make sure to set the Service

Patterns in 12-02, 12-03, and 12-04.

12-02-01 : Automatic Night Service Patterns

Configure the Automatic Night Service patterns. Pattern 1 should begin at 00:00 (midnight).

Make sure to include the mode information for each time period as the system assigns the Day

Mode (0) to all time periods not assigned to modes 1-3.

12-03-01 : Weekly Night Service Switching

Assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns programmed in 12-02 to each day of the week.

12-04-01 : Holiday Night Service Switching

Assign on of the five Automatic Night Service patterns to holidays.

12-05-01 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions

Assign a Day/Night Mode Group (01-8) for each extension.

12-06-01 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks

Assign a Day/Night Mode Group (01-8) for each trunk port (1-51).

12-07-01 : Text Data for Night Mode

Create an original text message which will be displayed on an LCD of system phone telephone in each Night Mode.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

To allow for UNA answering, set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-51). For UNA, extension must have incoming access to trunk ringing the External Paging speakers.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

For UNA answering, assign Trunk Access Maps (1-51) to extensions. Make one entry for each

Night Service mode.

15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys

Assign Night Service function keys (09) to extensions and set the key for the proper mode

(Day, Night, Rest, etc.). Assign trunks to function keys (code *01 + 001-51). If required, define a function key for a system phone to use the general purpose relay (51).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-07-01 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Manual Night Mode Switching

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 194 -

Features

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to manually switch the Night Mode (Service Code 818).

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

To have trunks ring extension during the different Night Service modes (for ANA), assign extensions to Ring Groups (1-25). For each extension in the Ring Group, indicate in Program

22-06 if trunk should ring (1) or not ring (0).

22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

To have trunks ring extensions for ANA, assign trunks to Ring Groups. You make a different entry for each Night Service mode.

22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

If a Universal Answer call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04), it routes to the Ring Group specified in this option (Ring Group (1-25), the VRS, or DSPDB

Voice Mail (101)).

31-05-01 : Universal Night Answer

For each Night Service Mode, assign which trunks should ring which External Paging Zones.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing/Ring Groups

Paging, External

Programmable Function Keys

Voice Response System (VRS)

Operation

To activate Night Service by Dialling codes:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 818.

3. Dial Night Service code:

1 Day 1 mode

2 Night 1 mode

3 Midnight 1 mode

4 Rest 1 mode

5 Day 2 mode

6 Night 2 mode

7 Midnight 2 mode

8 Rest 2 mode

4. Press SPK to hang up.

To activate Night Service by using programmable keys:

1. Press Night Service key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 09) + Mode code number (below).

0 Toggle Day 1/Night 1 mode

1 Day 1 mode

2 Night 1 mode

3 Midnight 1 mode

4 Rest 1 mode

5 Day 2 mode

6 Night 2 mode

7 Midnight 2 mode

8 Rest 2 mode

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 195 -

Features

To transfer a call to the Universal Night Answer External Page zones:

1. Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer to Trunk Ring Group code.

You will hear a confirmation tone.

2. Hang up.

The call rings over the External Paging, enabling anyone to answer the call.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 196 -

Features

Off Hook Signalling

Description

When a user calls an extension busy on a call, they can send an off hook signal through the handset and through the telephone’s speaker indicating they are trying to get through. The signal is an off hook ringing over the idle

(second) line appearance. Off Hook Signalling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free. The system provides the following Off Hook Signalling options:

Called Extension Block

The called extension’s Class of Service may block incoming Off Hook Signalling attempts. This is beneficial to users that don’t want interruptions while on a call.

Automatic Signalling

Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Off Hook Signalling. This option is useful to receptionists, operators and others that must quickly process calls. This is set in the called extension’s Class of Service.

Manual Signalling

After reaching a busy extension, manual signalling gives the caller the choice of using Off Hook

Signalling or activating other features. Extension’s without automatic signalling have manual signalling. The users can dial a service code or press a Programmable Function Key to send Off

Hook Signalling to the called phone.

Selectable Off Hook Signalling Mode

The Off Hook Signal can be muted ringing, no off hook ringing, a single beep in the handset, a beep in the speaker, or a beep in the handset - based on the caller’s programming.

Off Hook Ringing

Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s Off Hook Signalling for incoming calls (DID, trunk). If enabled, Off Hook Signalling occurs normally. If disabled, calls queue behind the extension’s busy line appearance and the user gets no Off Hook Signalling indication. The second line appearance stays idle. The caller hears ringback tone while their call waits. This is set in the called extension’s Class of Service.

DID Call Waiting

An extension can optionally have DID calls camp on with Off Hook/Call Wait signalling, without Off Hook/Call Wait signalling or no signalling. This is set in the called extension’s Class of Service.

Block Manual Off Hook Signals

This Class of Service option enables/disables a busy extension’s ability to block off hook signals manually sent from a co-worker. If disabled (not blocked), callers can dial the service code

(assigned in 11-16-04) at busy or busy/ring to signal the extension. If enabled (blocked), nothing happens when the caller dials the service code (assigned in 11-16-04) to off hook signal.

Block Camp On

If an extension has Block Camp On enabled, callers to the extension cannot dial the service code

(assigned in 11-16-05) to Camp On after hearing busy or busy/ring. If the extension has Block

Camp On disabled, callers are not prevented from Dialling the service code (assigned in

11-16-05) to Camp on after hearing busy or busy/ring. This is set in the called extension’s Class of Service.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled

- 197 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Programming

11-12-03 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Override (Off Hook Signalling)

Assign a service code (809 by default) to be used for Off Hook Signalling Override.

11-16-04 : Single Digit Service Code Setup - Intercom Off Hook Signalling

Assign a one-digit service code to be used for Off Hook Signalling.

15-02-12 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Off Hook Ringing

For each extension, set Off Hook Ringing type: 0 (muted ring), 1 (no ring), 3 (beep in speaker), 4 (beep in handset).

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Off Hook Signalling (code 33).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-05 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Off Hook Signalling Receive

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to send Off

Hook Signalling to a busy extension.

20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic Off Hook Signalling

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to automatically receive Off Hook Signals while busy on a call.

20-18-06 : Service Tone Timer - Call Waiting Tone Timer

Use this timer to set the interval between Off Hook Signalling alerts.

Related Features

Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)

Handsfree and Monitor

Hotline

Intercom

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To send Off Hook Signals to an extension busy on a call:

Your extension may send Off Hook Signals automatically.

1. Press Off Hook Signalling key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 33).

OR

1. Press SPK

2. Dial 809

You hear ringback.

To have your call voice-announce, dial 1.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 198 -

Features

Paging, External

Description

With External Paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected to external Paging zones. When a user pages on of these external zones, the system broadcasts the announcement over the speakers.

Like Internal Paging, External Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension individually.

One external paging zone is provided as a standard feature of the system. If more than one external paging zone is required, a 2PGDU unit must be installed, providing an additional 2 zones. In addition, each external zone of the 2PGDU card can have an associated relay contact. When a user pages to a zone, the corresponding contact activates (closes). This provides for Paging amplifier control. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details.

Combined Paging

Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding external zone.

For example, you can Page your company’s warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined

Paging is available for Paging zones 1-6 and All Call. Refer to Paging, Internal for more on setting up

Combined Paging. In addition, you can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key. Using the External

Page Function Key, when an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed, it will include both the external zones and the assigned internal zone(s). If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group, the announcement will be made on the external zones only.

Remove Paging Information from Display Phones

A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones from showing incoming paging information. This allows the system to save processor time and speed up system operation.

Conditions

A) One external paging zone is provided as a standard feature of the system. If more than one external paging zone is required, a 2PGDU unit must be installed in the system, providing an additional 2 zones.

B) With Combined Paging, the system will allow a page over just the external page zone if the internal zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group.

C) The paging speakers of the 2PGDU card are numbered 1-6, and the in-built paging speaker of the 308M unit is numbered 7.

Default Setting

In-built paging speaker assigned to External Paging Zone 1.

Programming

10-03-01 :PCB Setup – Terminal Type (2PGDU)

Set the terminal type to 6:External Speaker.

Assign port numbers in the following order to avoid duplication in Program 10-03-02:

Program 10-03-01 Port 3 = 9 (External Music Source), system assigns 10-03-02 = Port 1.

Program 10-03-01 Port 4 = 6 (External Speaker), system assigns 10-03-02 = Port 2.

10-03-02 :PCB Setup – Logical Port Number (2PGDU)

Assign port numbers for the devices assigned in Program 10-03-01. May be automatically assigned when Program 10-03-01 is set.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 199 -

Features

Assign function keys for External Paging zones (19 + zone) and External All Call Page (20). If required, define a function key for a system phone to use the general purpose relay (50).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-29 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Paging Display

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display incoming internal paging information on their display.

31-01-02 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Page Announcement Duration

Set the maximum allowable duration for a Paging announcement.

31-04-01 : External Paging Zone Group zone.

Assign each External Paging Speaker (1-7) to an External Paging Group (1-6) used for accessing the zone.

31-05-01 : Universal Night Answer

Assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging Speaker. For each trunk port, you make a separate entry for each External Paging zone (1-7).

31-06-01 : External Speaker Control

Assign options for each External Paging Speaker (1-7): Splash Tone Before Page (Item 1),

Splash Tone After Page (Item 2).

31-06-04 : External Speaker Control - CODEC Transmit Gain Setup

31-08-01 : BGM on External Paging

Assign the Background Music option for each External Paging Speaker (1-7). If enabled (1), the system will play Background Music over the zone when it is idle.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Doorphone

Night Service (Universal Night Answer)

Paging, Internal

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To Page into an external zone:

1. Press External Paging key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone for External Paging zones or 20 for

External All Call Paging).

2. Make Announcement.

OR

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-6 or 0 for All Call).

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-6 (for Internal/External Zones 1-3) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page.

If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the page may be announced as an External

Page only.

3. Make Announcement.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 200 -

Features

Paging, Internal

Description

Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other system phone users. When a user makes a

Zone Paging announcement, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions in the zone Dialled. With All

Call Paging, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions programmed to receive All Call Paging. An extension can be a member of only one Internal Paging Zone. Like External Paging, Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension individually.

Combined Paging

Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding external zone.

For example, you can Page your company’s warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined

Paging is available for Paging zones 1-6 and All Call. Optionally, you can change the Combined Paging assignments. For example, you can associate External Paging Zone 1 with Internal Paging Zone 4. You can be able to program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key. When an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed, it will include both the external zones and the assigned internal zone(s). If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group, the announcement will be made on the external zones only.

Remove Paging Information from Display Phones

A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones from showing incoming internal paging information. This allows the system to save processor time and speed up system operation.

Conditions

A) Internal Paging does not require a 2PGDU unit.

B) You can assign any number of extensions to an Internal or All Call Paging Zone.

C) A system must have at least one extension port idle in order to make an Internal Page. If no extension port is idle, the extension performing the Page will hear a busy signal.

D) With Combined Paging, the system allows a page over just the external page zone if the internal zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for Internal Paging Zones (code 21 + page zone) and Internal All Call

Paging (code 22) (Internal Page Zones 0, 1-6, 00, 01-32.)

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-29 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Paging Display

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display incoming internal paging information on their display.

31-01-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - All Call Paging Zone Name

Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging Zone. The name shows on the display of the telephone making the announcement.

31-01-02 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Page Announcement Duration

Set the maximum allowable duration (0-64800 seconds) for a Paging announcement.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 201 -

Features

31-02-01 : Internal Paging Group Assignment - Internal Paging Group Number

Assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones. An extension must be assigned to a 2-digit zone in order to access any of the 2-digit zones (Internal Page Zones 0, 1-6, 00, 01-32).

31-02-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment - Internal All Call Paging Receiving

Allow (1) or prevent (0) All Call Internal Paging for each extension. If allowed, extension can make and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If prevented, extension can only make All Call Internal Paging announcements.

31-03-01 : Internal Paging Group Settings - Internal Paging Group Name

Program names for the Internal Paging Zones.

31-03-02 : Internal Paging Group Settings - Internal Paging Tone

For each Internal Paging Zone, have normal (0), muted (1) or no (2) Internal Paging alert tones. If enabled (0 or 1), extensions hear two beeps before Paging announcements. If disabled, the extensions hear the announcement without the beeps. Muted tones can occur only if the extension user sets the telephone volume control switch to medium or high (Internal Page

Zones 0, 1-6, 00, 01-32).

31-07-01 : Combined Paging Assignments

For each External Paging Zone (1-6 and 0 for All Call), assign a corresponding Internal Zone for Combined Paging.

Related Features

Meet Me Paging / Meet Me Paging Transfer

Paging, External

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To make an Internal Page announcement:

System Phone

1. Press the zone’s Internal Paging key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 21 + 1-6 or 01-32 for zones, 22 for All Call).

OR

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-6 or 00-32).

Dialling 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging.

OR

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-6 (for Internal/External Zones 1-6) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page.

If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the page will be announced as an

External Page only.

3. Make announcement.

4. Press SPK to hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset.

2. Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-6 or 00-32).

Dialling 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging.

Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-6) or 0 (for

Internal/External All Call).

3. Make announcement.

4. Hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 202 -

Features

Park

Description

Park places a call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. There are two types of Park: System and Personal. Use System Park when you want to have the call wait in a system orbit.

Personal Park allows a user to Park a call at their extension so a co-worker can pick it up. After parking a call in orbit, a user can Page the person receiving the call and hang up. The paged party dials a code or presses a programmed Park key to pick up the call. With Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to handle their calls. A call parked for too long will recall the extension that initially parked it., however the call remains in the park orbit until it’s answered. There are 64 Park Orbits (1-64) available for use.

Enhanced Dial Buffering

The system can optionally provide additional dial buffering. In certain high traffic sites, (e.g., with a high volume of Dialled paging and parking), standard dial buffering can occasionally lose digits that a user dials. By enabling enhanced buffering, an additional level of buffering occurs which helps ensure that the system processes all digits a user dials.

Splitting Between Parked Calls

A system phone user can retrieve two calls from Park Orbit (for which they don’t have line appearances) and easily split (alternate) between them. The split operation brings the calls to the user’s telephone and frees up the

Park Orbits.

Extended Park

An extension’s Class of Service determines whether it will use the normal Park Orbit Recall time or the

Extended Park Orbit Recall time. The timers are set up in system programming. When an extension with

Extended Park Recall Class of Service option parks a call, it recalls after the Extended Park Orbit Recall time.

When an extension with the Normal Park Orbit Recall Class of Service option parks a call, it recalls after the normal Park Orbit Recall time, however the call remains in the park orbit until it’s answered.

Conditions

A) An extension can park a call in any Park Orbit. However, an extension can only pick up a call Parked by a member of its own Park group (see Program 24-03).

B) If an extension is not allowed access to trunks in the Access Maps (Programs 14-07 and 15-

06), calls in Park and on Hold can be blocked.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a keys as a Park Orbit key (code *04 plus Park orbit number [01-64]).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-11-19 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Normal/Extended Park

20-11-19 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Normal/Extended Park

Determine whether an extension’s Class of Service should allow normal or extended Park

(0=normal, 1=extended).

24-01-02 : System Options for Hold - Hold Recall Callback Time

A call left parked too long recalls the extension that initially parked it for this interval.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 203 -

Features

24-01-06 : System Options for Hold - Park Hold Time

Set the Park Hold Time (0-64800 seconds). A call left parked longer than this interval will recall the extension that initially parked it.

24-01-07 : System Options for Hold - Extended Park Hold Time

Set the Extended Park Hold Time (0-64800 seconds). A call left parked longer than this interval will recall the extension that initially parked it.

24-03-01 : Park Group

Assign an extension to a Park Group (01-64). An extension can only pick up a call Parked by a member of its own Park Group.

Related Features

Hold

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To Park a call in a system orbit:

You can Park Intercom or trunk calls.

1. Press Park key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit).

The Park key LED lights.

If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.

2. Use Paging to announce call.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

If not picked up, the call will recall to you.

OR

1. At system phone, press HOLD.

OR

At a single line telephone, hookflash.

OR

2. Dial 831 and the Park orbit (01-64).

If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.

3. Use Paging to announce call.

4. Press SPK to hang up.

If not picked up, the call will recall to you.

Note: The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time (Program 24-01-06). The call rings the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 24- 01-02). The call then goes on Hold for the Park Hold

Time - then recalls again for the Hold Recall Callback Time. The call continues to cycle between Hold and recall until the extension user answers the call or the outside party hangs up. This applies to extended calls only.

To pick up a parked call:

1. Lift handset.

2. Press Park key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit).

OR

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 861 and the Park orbit (1-64).

To park a call at your extension:

1. Do not hang up.

2. Press HOLD and dial 773.

At a SLT, hookflash instead of pressing HOLD.

3. Page your co-worker to pick up the call.

4. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at SLT).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 204 -

Features

If not picked up, the call will recall to you .until either the call is answered or the caller hangs up.

To pick up a call parked at an extension (yours or a co-worker’s):

1. If parked at your extension:

Press a SPK key and dial 773.

At an SLT, skip pressing CALL.

OR

If parked at a co-worker’s extension

Press a SPK key dial 715 plus the co-worker’s extension number.

At an SLT, skip pressing CALL.

To split between two parked calls (System Phone Only):

You must have Park Orbit keys for the parked in calls. In addition, your system phone cannot have line keys defined for the parked calls.

1. Press a CALL key.

2. Press Park Orbit key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit) to retrieve first parked call.

Call1 lights steadily. This moves the first parked call to your phone.

3. Press Park Orbit key (PGM 15-07 or 5C852:*04 + orbit) to park the call.

4. Press another Park Orbit key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: *04 + orbit) to retrieve the second parked call.

5. To switch between the two parked calls, press .the Park Orbit key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: *04 + orbit) to park the call and press it again to retrieve the call.

- 205 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

PBX Compatibility

Description

You can connect your phone system trunks to Centrex/PBX lines, rather than to telco trunk circuits. This makes the trunk inputs into the system Single Line type compatible Centrex/PBX extensions, rather than telco circuits.

PBX Compatibility lets the system be a node (i.e., satellite) in a larger private telephone network. To place outside calls when the system is behind a PBX, phone system users must first dial the PBX’s trunk access code

(usually 0).

The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options:

PBX Trunk Access Code Screening

The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk access codes. The system can screen for up to 4 groups of trunk access codes. The codes can be one or two digits long, consisting of the digits 0-9, # and *. (You use Line Key 1 as a wild card entry.)

PBX Trunk Toll Restriction

The system can provide the Toll Restriction for the PBX trunk, or restriction can be handled solely by the connected PBX. If the phone system provides the restriction, it restricts the digits Dialled after the PBX access code.

PBX Call Restriction

When the phone system does the Toll Restriction, it can further restrict users from Dialling

PBX extensions. In this case, the only valid numbers are those Dialled after the PBX trunk access code. The only PBX facility phone system users can access are the PBX’s outside trunks.

Automatic Pause

The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual

Dialling, Abbreviated Dialling, Last Number Redial, Repeat Redial and Save Number

Dialled. This gives the connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits.

Conditions

When using Account Codes, do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code. Otherwise, after the *, the trunk would stop sending digits to the central office.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-01-08 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Toll Restriction

For each PBX trunk port, enable (0) or disable (1) Toll Restriction.

14-04-01 : Behind PBX Setup - Behind PBX

For each PBX trunk port, enter 1. You make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class

Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each extension.

21-05-12 : Toll Restriction Class - PBX Call Restriction

For each Toll Restriction Class, enter 1 to restrict calls on the PBX trunk to outside calls only.

Enter 0 to allow users to dial PBX extensions.

21-06-08 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - PBX Access Code

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 206 -

Features

Enter the system PBX access codes. The system can have up to 4 groups of codes. A code can be one or two digits long. Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. Use Line Key 1 as a “don’t care” digit. If using Account Codes, do not use the * within the PBX Access Code.

81-01-14 : Analogue Trunk Initial Data Setup - Hookflash 1

If the CONF key is set for transfer (in Program15-02-05), use this program to set the duration of the flash that occurs when a user presses the CONF key.

Related Features

Account Codes

Abbreviated Dialling

Central Office Calls, Answering/ Ring Groups

Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Inward Lines

Direct Inward System Access

Flash

Toll Restriction

Trunk Groups and Trunk Group Routing

PBX trunks can follow normal system Toll Restriction.

Operation

To place a call over a PBX trunk:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key and dial 804.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 804.

2. Dial PBX trunk group number (1-9, 01-32 or 01-25).

3. Dial PBX access code and number

OR

1. (System Phone only) Press PBX trunk group key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *02 + group).

2. Dial PBX access code and number.

OR

1. At system phone, press a SPK key and dial 0.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 0.

2. Dial PBX access code and number.

OR

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, Lift handset.

2. Dial 805.

3. Dial PBX trunk number (e.g., 05 for line 5).

4. Dial PBX access code and number.

OR

1. Press PBX trunk key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 1 to 51).

2. Dial PBX access code and number.

Note:

In all cases above, Toll Restriction may prevent your call.

- 207 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Prime Line Selection

Description

Prime Line Selection allows an extension user to place or answer a call over a specific trunk by just lifting the handset. The user does not have to first press keys or dial codes. This simplifies handling calls on a frequently used trunk.

Prime Line Selection has the following two modes of operation:

Outgoing Prime Line Preference

Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line. Outgoing Prime Line Preference would help a telemarketer who always needs a free line to call prospective clients. The telemarketer just lifts the handset and the Prime Line is always available. (Outgoing Prime Line Preference may be affected by Incoming Prime Line Preference -- see Programming below.)

Incoming Prime Line Preference

When the Prime Line rings the extension, lifting the handset answers the call. Incoming Prime

Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer’s service calls and then dispatch repair technicians. The dispatcher would have the assurance than whenever a customer calls in, the dispatcher just lifts the handset get their call.

(Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize an idle line appearance – see

Programming below.)

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

Assign Prime Line to a separate trunk group for outgoing Prime Line selection. (Also see

14-06 and 21-02.)

14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing

Set up outbound route for trunk group that contains the Prime Line. (Also see 14-05 and

21-02.)

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

For outgoing Prime Line selection, assign each Prime Line trunk to a different Access Map and deny outbound access to all trunks except the Prime Line trunk (1-51).

15-01-02 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Outgoing Trunk Line Preference

Enter 1 for this option so extension user seizes Prime Line when they lift the handset.

15-02-10 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls appearance.

Enter 1 if lifting the handset should answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to seize idle line appearance.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Set assignment so extension(s) can have access to Prime Line. Deny outbound access to extensions that should not have Prime Line.

21-02-01 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

Assign extension(s) to a Prime Line route (1-25) for outgoing Prime Line access.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 208 -

Features

22-01-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Incoming Call Priority

Set incoming Prime Line preference. Enter 1 to answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to answer ringing Intercom call.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign extension(s) to a ring group (1-25) that consists of a Prime Line.

22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Assign a Prime Line to a ring group (1-25).

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Inward Lines/Direct Inward System Access

Line Preference

Voice Mail

Operation

To place a call on your Prime Line:

1. Lift handset.

You hear dial tone on your Prime Line.

To answer a call on your Prime Line:

1. Lift handset.

Depending on your Line Preference programming, you’ll either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance.

- 209 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Private Line

Description

A Private Line is a trunk reserved for a system phone for placing and answering calls. A user with a Private Line always knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own trunk for placing calls that is not available to others in the system.

A) Incoming only

The system phone has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user cannot place calls on the

Private Line.

B) Outgoing only

The system phone has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The Private Line does not ring for incoming calls.

C) Both ways

The system phone has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Assign Private Line to the Private Line Access Map (1-51) (see Program 15-06 below). Use option 5 for Incoming, option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing. In all other Access

Maps, give option 3 to the Private Line.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign extension to have Private Line to an unused “Private Line” Access Map.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Make sure extension has a line key (e.g., 012) for the Private Line.

22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

Set the Trunk Service Type to 4 if routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail or 0 if not routing to voice mail.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign extension to Private Line’s ring group. Set the ringing in Program 22-06 - use option

1 for Incoming or Both Ways Private Lines. Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines. Do not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring group.

22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Assign Private Line to an unused “Private Line” ring group (1-25) (i.e., a ring group just for the Private Line).

22-07-01 : DIL Assignment

If routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail, assign DILs to the extensions.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 210 -

Related Features

Call Forwarding

Central Office Calls, Placing

Line Preference

Prime Line Selection

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Toll Restriction

Transfer

Voice Mail

Operation

To place a call on your Private Line:

1. Press Private Line key.

2. Dial number.

To answer a call on your Private Line:

1. Press Private Line key or lift the handset.

Features

- 211 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Programmable Function Keys

Description

Each system phone has Programmable Function Keys. Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of a system phone’s programmable keys from your administration telephone, or the extension user can do it themselves. Depending on your telephone, you can have either 6 or 12 Programmable Function Keys.

Conditions

A) When a key is programmed using service code 852, that key cannot be programmed with a function using the 851 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by Dialling 852 + *04 must be undefined by Dialling 000 before it can be programmed as a Call Forward key by Dialling 851 + 16.

B) Using Program 92-01 to copy a system phone’s Programmable Function Keys will copy all the keys whether they exist on the phone to which the programming is being copied. This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which doesn’t exist on the phone (will display as “DUPLICATE DATA”. It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or to only copy from an extension which has the same or fewer numbers of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied.

Default Setting

The first 12 keys on a telephone are line keys (e.g., key 1 = line 01).

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign the functions of a system phone’s Programmable Function Keys. Refer to Tables 4 and

5 at the beginning of this manual.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-07-10 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Programmable Function Key

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to program their own function keys.

Note:

When programming a feature as a Programmable Function Key, refer to the feature’s description for additional programming options.

Related Features

Abbreviated Dialling

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Operation

To change the function of a General Programmable Function Key:

1.

Press SPK key.

2.

Dial 851.

3.

Press the key you want to program.

4.

Enter the 2-digit key function, followed by any additional information required by the function selected.

5.

Press HOLD.

Available functions are 00-99 (refer to chart SC 851 below) and line keys 01-51. To clear a key, enter 00.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 212 -

Features

To change the function of an Appearance Programmable Function Key:

1.

Press a SPK key.

2.

Dial 852.

3.

Press the key you want to program.

4.

Enter the 3-digit key function and any additional information needed for the key.

Available functions are *00-*99 (refer to chart SC 852 below) and line keys 01-51. To clear a key, enter

000.

When a key is programmed using service code 852, that key cannot be programmed with a function using the

851 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by dialling 852 + *04

must be undefined by dialling 000 before it can be programmed as a Call Forward key by dialling 851 + 16.

To check the function of a Programmable Function Key:

1.

Press CHECK.

2.

Press the programmable key.

The programmed function displays.

2-Digit Service Codes (SC 851):

Funct

. No.

Function

00

Key Not Defined

Additional Data LED Indication

01

DSS/One-Touch

Extension number or any numbers (Max. 36 digits)

On (Red): Extension Busy

Off: Extension Idle

Rapid Blink (Red): DND or CF Set

02

Microphone Key (ON/OFF)

03

DND Key

07

Conference Key

Red-On: DND Setup

04

BGM (ON/OFF)

On (Red): BGM On

Off: BGM Off

05

Headset

On (Red): Headset Operating

Off: Headset Idle

06

Transfer Key

None

Red-On: Conference Operating

08

Incoming Caller-ID List

On (Red): MIC On

Off: MIC Off

Slow Blink (Red):Existing New CID

On (Red): Existing Check CID

Off: No CID

09

Operation Mode Switch

10

Call Forward-Immediate

Mode number(1-8)

11

12

Call Forward-Busy

Call Forward-No Answer

Red On: On mode

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

13

Call Forward-Busy/No

Answer

14

Call Forward-Dual Ring

15

16

Call Forward - Follow Me

Call Forward to Station

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

17

Call Forward to Device

Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 213 -

Features

Funct

. No.

Function Additional Data LED Indication

18

Text Message Setup

19

External Group Paging

Message No.(00-20)

External Paging

Zone No. (1-6)

On (Red): Active by Function Key

On (Red): Active

20

External All Call Paging

21

22

Internal Group Paging

Internal All Call Paging

On (Red): Active

Internal Paging No.1-32 On (Red): Active

None

23

Meet-Me Answer to Internal

Paging

24

Call Pickup for Own Group

25

Call Pickup for Another Group

None

None

None

None

26

Call Pickup for Specified

Group

27

Abbreviated

Dial-Common/Personal

28

Abbreviated Dial-Group

Call Pickup Group

Number 01-32

Abbreviated dial No.

(Common/ Private)

Abbreviated dial No.

(Group)

None

None

29

Repeat Dial

30

Saved Number Redial

31

Memo Dial

32

Meet-Me Conference

Rapid Blink (Red): Under repeat dial

None

None

None

33

Off-Hook Signalling None

34

Break-In None

Red-On: Under Camp-On

35

Camp-On, Call-Back

36

Department Step Call

37

DND/FWD Override Call

38

Message Waiting

39

Room Monitor

None

None

None

Rapid Blink (Red): Monitored

Slow Blink (Red): Monitoring

Red On: Transmission Cut-off

40

Handset Transmission Cut-off

41

Secretary(Buzzer) Call Extension No. (Max.4 digits)

42

Boss-Secretary Call

On (Red): Transmission Side

Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side

On (Red): Boss-Secretary mode Extension No. (Max.4 digits)

None

43

Series Call

44

Common Hold

45

Exclusive Hold

46

Department Group Log Out

49

Call Redirect

None

None

On (Red): Logged out

None Extension Number or

Voice Mail Number

(Max.4 digits)

50

Account Code

52

Incoming Call Queuing

Message Setup

53

Queuing Message Starting

Incoming Ring Group

No.1-25

None

On (Red): Under setting

On (Red): Active

54

External Call Forward by

Doorphone Box

55

Extension Name Edit

56

Presence Display Operation

57

Presence Display Indication

58

Department Incoming

1-100

1-100

Extension Group No.

None

On (Red): Presence

On (Red): Presence

Slow Blink (Red): Active

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 214 -

Features

Funct

. No.

Function Additional Data

Call–Immediate 01-32

59

Department Incoming

Call–Delay

Extension Group No.

01-32

60

Department Incoming

Call–DND

63

Outgoing Call Without

Caller-ID (ISDN)

67

Mail Box (DSPDBU)

Extension Group No.

01-32

Extension No. or

Department Group No.

(Max.4 digits)

68

69

70

71

76

Voice Mail Service

(DSPDBU)

Conversation Recording

Service (DSPDBU)

Automated Attendant for

Extension (DSPDBU)

Change Attendant Message

(DSPDBU)

Toll Restriction in Credit

80

Tandem Ring Setup Key

81

Automatic Transfer to Transfer

Key

3-Digit Service Codes (SC 852):

Funct

. No.

Function

*00

Key Not Defined

*01

Trunk Key

*02

Trunk Group/Loop Key

0 : Skip

1 : Back Skip

2 : Monitor

0 : Conversation recording

1 : Delete, Re-recording

2 : Delete

3 : Immediate delivery

Extension No. or

Department Group No.

(Max.4 digits)

Rapid Blink (Green): New Message

Received

On (Red): Listening to messages

Slow Flash: New Message Restriction

Mode

In case of 2:Monitor mode;

Slow Blink (Red) : Monitor setting -

Automatic

On (Red): Monitor setting - Manual

In case of 0:Conversation recording

Rapid Blink (Red): Under recording

(No Destination)

On (Red): Under recording

(Appointed Extension)

On (Red): Setup All Calls

Rapid Blink (Red): Setup No Answer

Calls

Slow Blink (Red): Busy / No Answer

Calls

Wink Blink (Red): Busy Calls

None Extension Number or Pilot

Number (Max.4 digits)

Extension Number

(Max.4 digits)

(Max.4 digits)

Trunk Line No.01-51

Additional Data

LED Indication

Slow Blink (Red): Active

Slow Blink (Red): Active

On (Red): Master Side

On (Red): Set

LED Indication

*03

*04

Virtual Extension Key

Park Hold Key

*05

Hybrid Operation Key (Loop key)

Trunk Number 01-51

Trunk Group Number

01-25

Extension Number. or

Department Group

Number (Max.4 digits)

Park Number 01-64

0 : Incoming

1 : Outgoing

2 : Both

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 215 -

Features

Repeat Redial

Description

If a system phone user places a trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can have Repeat Redial try it again later on. The user doesn’t continually have to try the number again -- hoping it will go through. Repeat Redial automatically retries it until the called party answers (the number of retries is based on system programming).

Conditions

Lifting the handset will cancel Repeat Redial.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Repeat Redial (code 29).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-08-07 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Repeat Redial

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use

Repeat Redial.

21-08-01 : Repeat Dial Setup - Repeat Redial Count

Set how many times Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through.

21-08-02 : Repeat Dial Setup - Repeat Redial Interval Time

Set the interval between Repeat Redial attempts (0-64800 seconds).

21-08-03 : Repeat Dial Setup - Repeat Dial Calling Timer

Set how long the system waits (0-64800 seconds) for the called party to answer after a Repeat

Redial. If the called party doesn’t answer within this interval, the system hangs up and tries again (after the Repeat Redial Interval Time). For unanswered calls, the total time between retries in the sum of Items 21-08-02 and 21-08-03.

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection

Central Office Calls, Placing

Last Number Redial/Save Number Dialled

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To use Repeat Redial (if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy):

1. Place trunk call.

2. Press DC + LND.

Listen for busy tone or ring-no-answer.

OR

Press Repeat Redial Key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 29).

Your Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the system to redial.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

The system periodically redials the call.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 216 -

4. Lift handset when called party answers.

To cancel Repeat Redial:

1. Press DC.

2. Press LND.

OR

1. Press Repeat Redial Key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 29).

See also Last Number Redial.

Features

- 217 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Ring Groups

Description

Ring Groups determine how trunks ring extensions. Generally, trunks ring extension’s only if Ring Group programming allows. For example, to make a trunk ring an extension:

Assign the trunk and the extension to the same Ring Group

In the extension’s Ring Group programming, assign ringing for the trunk.

Any number of extensions and trunks can be in a specific group. The system allows Ring Groups = 1 - 25.

If an extension has a line key for the trunk, Ring Group calls ring the line key. If the extension doesn’t have a line key, the trunk rings the line appearance key. If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group, the trunk follows Access Map programming.

Conditions

DIL trunks disregard ring group programming until DIL overflow.

Default Setting

All trunks are in Ring Group 1, the first 16 extensions ring for trunk calls and all other extensions only flash.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys as line keys (codes 1-51).

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign extensions to ring groups (1-25).

22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Assign trunks to ring groups (1-25).

22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

For DIL Delayed Ringing, assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04) expires. DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group (1-25) , the VRS, or DSPDB Voice Mail

(101).

22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group

For each DID Translation Table, assign the destination for DID Intercept. The destination can be a Ring Group (1-25), DSPDB voice mail (101), the operator (9), or the VRS . For each table, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

25-03-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialling

Set the transfer destination for each DISA and Automated Attendant (OPA) trunk. The destination can be a Ring Group or Voice Mail , or the VRS . Make a separate entry for each

Night Service mode. With the VRS, an incorrect dialling transfer can also reroute outside calls to this destination. The system allows Ring Groups=(1-25), VRS=(15) or DSPDB Voice

Mail=(101).

Note:

For incoming calls, Ring Group programming (22-04/22-05) overrides Access Map programming (14-07/15-06).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 218 -

Related Features

Direct Inward Dial (DID) / Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Night Service

Programmable Function Keys

Transfer

Operation

Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering.

Features

- 219 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Ringdown Extension, Internal / External

Description

With a Ringdown Extension, a user can call another extension, outside number, or Abbreviated Dialling number by just lifting the handset. The call automatically goes through - there is no need for the user to dial digits or press additional keys. Ringdown Extensions are frequently used for lobby phones, where the caller just lifts the handset to get the information desk or off-site Reservation Desk.

After the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown occurs after a programmable interval. Depending on the setting of this interval, the extension user may be able to place other calls before the ringdown goes through.

The system allows each extension in the system to have a Ringdown Extension. All extensions can share the same Dialling number, if desired.

Conditions

A) Ringdown extension has no effect on an extension’s current (active) call.

B) The Ringdown Extension user must lift the handset for ringdown to work.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-08-09 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Hotline/Extension Ringdown

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) ringdown. If disabled in Class of

Service, the settings in Program 21-11 below have no effect.

21-01-09 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Ringdown Extension Timer

After the user lifts the handset, the extension automatically calls the ringdown destination after this interval (0-64800 seconds). A setting of ‘0’ will immediately ring the programmed extension. Any other setting will delay the ringdown the number of seconds programmed.

21-11-01 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignments

Program the ringdown (Hotline) source and destination (target) number, up to 24 digits (512

Hotline assignments). Remember to include the trunk access code (usually 0) in front of he number when dialling outside numbers. When programming Common Abbreviated Dialling numbers as the destination, the entry should be “853+bin number”.

Related Features

Abbreviated Dialling

Call Forwarding

Call Waiting/Camp On, Callback and Off Hook Signalling

Do Not Disturb

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Keys

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 220 -

Features

Operation

To place a call if your extension has ringdown programmed:

1. Lift handset.

If you want to place a trunk call, press a line key before lifting the handset.

Depending on the setting of your ringdown timer, you may be able to dial an Intercom call before your ringdown goes through.

If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled, your call will voice announce.

If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, your call will ring.

To bypass ringdown (if enabled for your system phone):

1. Do not lift handset.

2. Press a SPK key.

3. Place Intercom or trunk call.

To answer a call if you are another extension’s ringdown destination:

1. Speak toward phone to answer incoming voice-announcement.

OR

Lift handset to answer ringing Intercom call.

- 221 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Room Monitor

Description

Room Monitor lets an extension user listen to the sounds in a co-workers area. For example, the receptionist could listen for sounds in the warehouse when it’s left unattended. To use Room Monitor, the initiating extension and the receiving extension must activate it.

When using System Phones for monitoring, an extension user can only Monitor one extension at a time.

However, many extensions can Monitor the same extension at the same time.

With single line phones, multiple SLTs can be programmed to be monitored by the same SLT. However, only one SLT can monitor another SLT at a time.

CAUTION

The use of monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sounds activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. The Telecommunications

(Interception) Act

1979 (Cth), The Telecommunications Act 1997, The Privacy Act 1988 and State and Territory Listening Devices Legislation are all relevant. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties or require the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties. Section 6 of the

Industry Guidelines recommend pre-recorded messages or verbal notification to alert callers that the calls may be monitored. Section 6 of the Industry Guidelines also make recommendations in relation to notifications in writing.

Conditions

A) Room Monitor is for listening only. It does not allow for conversation between the monitoring and monitored extensions.

B) An extension user cannot monitor an Attendant.

C) A system phone user cannot monitor a single line phone and a single line phone cannot monitor a system phone.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key as a Room Monitor key (code 39) for both the extension being monitored and the extension initiating Room Monitor.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-11 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Room Monitor, Initiating

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate

Room Monitor.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 222 -

Features

20-13-12 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Room Monitor, Extension

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to be monitored.

Related Features

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you want to monitor.

You can only listen to one extension at a time.

System Phones:

To activate Room Monitor (at the initiating extension):

1. Do not lift handset or press SPK.

2. Press Room Monitor key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 39).

3. Dial number of extension you want to monitor.

You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To activate Room Monitor (at the extension to be monitored):

1. Go to the extension you want to monitor.

2. Do not lift handset or press SPK.

3. Press Room Monitor key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 39).

4. Dial the number of the extension you are at.

For example, if you are at extension 306, dial 306.

You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To cancel Room Monitor (at either extension):

1. Press Room Monitor key at both the initiating extension and the monitored extension.

Single Line Telephones:

To activate Room Monitor (at the extension to be monitored):

1. Go to the extension you want to monitor.

2. Lift handset at the phone to be monitored.

3. Dial 770.

4. Dial 1.

5. Dial number of extension number which will be monitoring the phone.

6. Place the handset on the desk, placing the handset’s transmitter towards the room.

You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To activate Room Monitor (at the initiating extension):

1. Lift handset at the phone which will be monitoring another phone.

2. Dial 770.

3. Dial 2.

4. Dial number of extension number which will be monitored.

You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To cancel Room Monitor (at either extension):

1. Hang up the handsets for both the monitored and the monitoring phones.

- 223 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Save Number Dialled

Description

Save Number Dialled permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually Dialling the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place.

Save Number Dialled saves in system memory a Dialled number up to 36 digits. The number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension user can pre-select a specific trunk if desired.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key as a Save key (code 30).

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection

Central Office Calls, Placing

Last Number Redial

Programmable Function Keys

Repeat Redial

Operation

To save the outside number you just Dialled (up to 36 digits):

Use this feature before hanging up.

System Phone

1. Press Save Number Dialled key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).

Single Line Telephone

1. Hookflash.

2. Dial 815.

To redial a saved number:

System Phone

1. (Optional) Press line key.

This selects a specific trunk for the call.

2. Press Save Number Dialled key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).

The stored number dials out.

OR

1. Press a SPK key

2. Dial 815.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 224 -

Features

OR

Press Save Number Dialled key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).

Save Number Dialled automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call. The stored number dials out.

Single Line Telephone

1. Hookflash.

2. Dial 815.

To check to see the number you have saved:

1. Press Save Number Dialled key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).

The stored number displays for ten seconds.

The stored number dials out if you:

- Lift the handset,

- Press an idle line key,

- Press a CALL key, or

- Press SPK

2. Press CLEAR.

To clear your saved number:

System Phone

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 885.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset and dial 885.

2. Hang up.

- 225 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Secretary Call Buzzer

Description

Secretary Call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To have Secretary Call, both co-workers must have System Phones with Secretary Call buzzer keys. When a user presses their buzzer key, the system alerts the called extension by sending a splash tone and flashing the called extension’s buzzer key. The called user can respond by placing an Intercom call to the calling party. The called extension’s buzzer key continues to flash until either user cancels the Secretary Call. A secretary could use this feature, for example, to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting. After being alerted, the boss could call the secretary when it’s most convenient.

An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions, limited only by the available number of programmable keys.

Conditions

A) Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users.

B) Secretary Call does not set up an Intercom call.

C) When assigning Secretary Call, a user enters the associated extension numbers, not port numbers.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for Secretary Call buzzer (code 42 + Hold + the destination extension number). Both co-workers must have buzzer keys for each other.

Related Features

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To buzz your secretary or boss:

1. Do not lift handset.

2. Press buzzer key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 41 + sec. ext.).

Your boss or secretary hears ringing.

Your buzzer key lights steadily.

Your boss’s or secretary’s buzzer key flashes fast.

To check to see who left you a Secretary Call:

1. Do not lift handset.

2. Press CHECK.

3. Press flashing Secretary Call key.

4. Press CLEAR.

To answer your Secretary Call indication:

1. Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you.

To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension:

1. Press your lit Secretary Call key.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 226 -

To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension:

1. Do not lift handset.

2. Press flashing Secretary Call key.

Features

- 227 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Secretary Call Pickup

Description

Secretary Call Pickup lets a system phone user easily reroute calls intended for a co-worker to themselves. By pressing a Secretary Call Pickup key, the user can have all calls to a co-worker’s phone ring or voice-announce theirs instead. Secretary Call Pickup is a simplified type of Call Forward with Follow Me for employees that work closely together. This feature could be helpful to customer service representatives that must frequently cover each other’s clients. When a representative leaves their desk, an associate could press the Secretary Call

Pickup key to intercept all their calls.

An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions, limited only by the available number of programmable keys.

Conditions

Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for Secretary Call Pickup (42 + boss ext). Unlike Secretary Call, you do not have to program a corresponding key at the source and destination extensions.

Related Features

Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Programmable Function Keys

Secretary Call (Buzzer)

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To activate Secretary Call Pickup:

1. Press your Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 42 + boss ext.).

Your Secretary Call Pickup key lights and the Boss’s telephone display shows “BOSS FWD>>”.

Calls intended for covered extension ring your phone instead.

To cancel Secretary Call Pickup:

1. Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 42 + boss ext.).

To check a key’s Secretary Call Pickup assignment:

1. Press CHECK.

2. Press your Secretary Call Coverage key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 42 + boss ext.).

3. Press CLEAR.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 228 -

Features

Selectable Display Messaging

Description

An extension user can select a pre-programmed Selectable Display Message for their extension. Display system phone callers see the selected message when they call the user’s extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides personalized messaging. For example, an extension user could select the message “GONE FOR THE

DAY” Any display system phone user calling the extension would see the message. Other than displaying the message, the system puts the call through normally. See table below for a list of the standard messages.

An extension user can add digits for date, time or phone number after messages 1-8 and 10 (up to 16 characters).

For example, an extension user could select the message “B-TRIP BACK” and then enter the date. Callers see the original message followed by the appended date. They would then be able to tell when the user was coming back from Business Trip.

The default messages are:

No. Message

01 MEETING BY ##:##

02 ROOM - ########

03 COME BACK ##:##

04 CALL ###########

05 CALL AFTER ##:##

06 LUNCH BACK ##:##

07 B. TRIP BACK ##/##

08 B. TRIP ##########

09 GONE FOR THE DAY

10 DAY OFF BY ##/##

Change “#” to …

Time (when meeting done)

Room Name or extension

Time (when returning)

11 digits (phone number)

Time (when returning)

Time (when returning)

Date (when returning)

10 digits (where reached)

Date (when returning)

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Call Forwarding (Device) (code 17) or Text Message (code 18). The

Call Forwarding Device key allows the user to select a message each time they activate the feature, while the Text Message key automatically selects the message used when programming the key.

20-02-07 : System Options for System Telephones - Time and Date Display Mode

Set the System Time and Date display mode. The time that displays in Selectable Display

Messages follows this setting.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 229 -

Features

20-13-19 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Selectable Display Messaging

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use

Selectable Display Messaging.

20-16-01 : Selectable Display Messages

Program the Selectable Display Messages (1-20). Refer to the chart below for character entry.

Use this keypad digit …

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

*

OPAC

DND/CONF

CLEAR

When you want to …

Enter characters:

1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | }

→ ←

Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.

Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3.

Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.

Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.

Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.

Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.

Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.

Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.

Enter characters:

0 ! “ # $ % & , ( )

Enter characters:

* + , - . / :

> ?

; < =

Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed).

Clear the character entry one character at a time.

Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Related Features

Do Not Disturb

Setting a message will cancel a DND setting

Programmable Function Keys

Operation

To select a message:

1. Press a SPK key + dial 713.

OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17).

OR

Press a CALL key + press Text Message key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 18) + enter digits to append, if needed + SPK to hang up.

2. Dial 3 + Message number (01-20).

Use VOL or VOL

to scroll through the messages.

3. (Optional for messages 1-8 and 10)

Dial the digits you want to append to the message.

You can append messages 1-8 and 10 with digits (e.g., the time when you will be back).

You enter the time in 24-hour format, but it displays in 12/24-hour format as specified in Program 20-02-07.

4. Press SPK to hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 230 -

Features

To cancel a message:

1. Press a SPK key + dial 713.

OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17).

OR

Press a CALL key + press Text Message key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 18) + SPK to hang up.

2. Dial 3.

3. Press SPK to hang up.

- 231 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Serial Call

Description

Serial Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension. Serial

Calling saves transferring steps between users. For example, a Customer Service Representative (CSR) has a client on the phone who needs technical advice. The CSR wants to send the call to Tech Service, but needs to advise the client of certain costs when Tech Service is done. Rather than transferring the call back and forth, the

CSR can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce, “I have a caller on the phone. I need to talk to them again. Just hang up when you’re done and I’ll get them back.”

Conditions

The transferring extension can remain off-hook to auto-receive the callback or hang up and it will ring back to them.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a programmable key as a Serial Call key (code 43).

Related Features

Programmable Function Keys

Single Line Telephones

Transfer

Operation

To place a Serial Call to a co-worker:

1. Place or answer a call.

2. Press HOLD.

3. Dial co-worker’s extension number.

Co-worker must lift handset to respond to your announcement.

4. Press Serial Call key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 43) but do not hang up.

When your co-worker hangs up the call, the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your extension.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 232 -

Features

Single Line Telephones, Analogue Sets

Description

The system is compatible with DTMF analogue single line telephones (SLTs). You can install single line telephones as On-Premise extensions only. Single line telephone users can dial codes to access many of the features available to system phone users. With Single Line Telephones, you can have your system simulate PBX type operation.

Conditions

A) Dial Pulse single line telephones are not supported.

Default Setting

Single Line Telephones function as soon as they are installed and properly programmed.

Programming

10-03-01 : PCB Setup

Assign the device type for adapters.

10-03-03 : PCB Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type

Assign transmit and receive levels for single line telephones.

10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup

If the system has DTMF single line extensions, allocate at least one circuit for analogue extension DTMF reception (entry 0 or 1).

Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:

- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.

- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 5 devices that use them.

15-03-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type

Enter 0 for normal single line telephones. Enter 1 if a Voice Mail port (refer to “Voice Mail” for more).

20-13-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialling

Set option to ‘0’ to prevent dual DTMF tones when using Continued Dialling.

80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup

80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup

If required, modify the criteria for call progress tone detection for the DTMF tones received at a single line telephone.

82-04-01 : Analogue Station Initial Data Setup

Set various timing parameters for the analogue station ports.

Related Features

Single line telephone users have access to the following features:

Abbreviated Dialling

Account Codes

Alarm

Call Waiting/Camp On with Split

Callback

Central Office Calls, Answering

Automatic Route Selection

Barge In

Call Forward All

Call Forward All with Follow Me

Call Forwarding/DND Override

Central Office Calls, Placing

Conference

Department Calling

Department Step Calling

Directed Call Pickup

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 233 -

Features

Do Not Disturb

Doorphone

Flash

Forced Trunk Disconnect

Group Call Pickup

Hold

Intercom

Handsfree Answerback/Forced

Intercom Ringing

Last Number Redial

Line Preference

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging

Meet Me Paging Transfer

Message Waiting

Night Service

Off Hook Signalling

Paging

PBX Compatibility

Ringdown Extension

Save Number Dialled

Selectable Display Messages

Toll Restriction

Transfer

Trunk Queuing and Camp On

Voice Mail

Warning Tone for Long Conversation

Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive, programming and operational information.

Operation

Refer to the individual features listed in the Related Features chart above.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 234 -

Features

Station Message Detail Recording

Description

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system’s trunk calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and trunk. This makes charge-back and traffic management easier.

SMDR provides the following options:

Abandoned Call Reporting

The SMDR report includes calls that rang into the system but were unanswered (i.e., abandoned).

SMDR can include all abandoned calls or only those abandoned calls that rang longer than the specified duration. The Abandoned Call Report helps you keep track of lost business.

Blocked Call Reporting

When Toll Restriction blocks a call, you can have SMDR print the blocked call information. Or, you can have SMDR exclude these types of calls. With Blocked Call Reporting, you can better customize Toll Restriction for the site’s application.

Customized Date Format

The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats: American, European or

Japanese. Set the format for your preference.

Transferred Call Tracking

SMDR shows each extension’s share of a transferred call. If an outside call is transferred among four extensions, SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call.

Data Call Tracking

Data Call Tracking can log the system’s internal data calls. Since SMDR normally logs external

(trunk) data calls, Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal activity.

Digit Counting

With Digit Counting, SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls. For example, if the digit count is nine, SMDR won’t include toll calls within the home area code. Digit Counting permits

SMDR to include only the types of calls you want to monitor.

Digit Masking

Digit Masking lets you “X” out portions of the number Dialled on the SMDR report. A digit mask of seven, for example, masks out all exchange codes (NNXs) and local addresses. Digit

Masking makes it easier to keep track of calling patterns, without having to interpret each individual number. You can also use Digit Masking to block out access and security codes.

Duration Monitoring

SMDR can include calls of any duration, or only those that last longer than the interval you specify. If you want to keep track of all trunk activity, use a short duration. To keep track of only significant usage, use a longer duration.

Extension Exclusion

You can selectively exclude extensions from the SMDR report. This ensures privacy for high profile callers. For example, the company attorney negotiating a merger may not want his calls to show up on an in-house report.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 235 -

Features

PBX Call Reporting

If you system is behind a PBX, you can have SMDR monitor all traffic into the PBX or just calls placed over PBX trunks. The SMDR record can include all PBX calls (including calls to PBX extensions) or just calls that include the PBX trunk access code.

Trunk Exclusion

Use Trunk Exclusion to exclude certain trunks not subject to per-call charges (like WATS lines) from the SMDR report. This makes call accounting easier, since you review only those calls with variable costs.

Usage Summaries

SMDR can automatically print daily, weekly and monthly call activity summaries. Each summary includes the total number of regular trunk calls and ISDN trunk calls, and the costs for each type. The daily report prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday night at midnight. The monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month.

Extension Name or Number

The SMDR report can include an extension’s name or extension number. Choose the method that makes it easier for you to track call usage.

Sample SMDR Report

CLASS TIME LINE

POT

POT

POT

10:44

10:46

10:47

LINE 001

LINE 001

LINE 001

00:00:30

00:00:45

00:00:29

STA 224 12039265400

STA 224 18874521

STA 218 12039265441

ALB 10:50 02

POT 10:55 LINE 002

00:01:40

00:00:00 STA 224

ALB 10:56 02

BRD 10:56 LINE 002

00:00:23

00:00:00 STA 224

ALB 10:56 02

BRD 10:56 LINE 002

00:00:09

00:00:00 STA 224 120366541233

ALB 10:56 02

BRD 10:56 LINE 002

00:00:09

00:00:00 STA 224 181477445236

ALB 10:56 02 00:00:08

8841

0

0

0

0

0

0

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 236 -

DIALLED No./CLI

ACCOUNT

Class Definitions

POT

POTA

PIN

ALB

BRD

PTRS

IVIN

Call Record Number

CLASS

TIME

LINE

DURATION

STATION

Definitions

SMDR record number (consecutive)

Type of call (see Class Definitions below)

Time call placed or answered. (For Transferred calls, shows time user picked up Transfer.)

Trunk number used for call

How long call lasted. (For Transferred calls, shows how long user was on call after answering the

Transfer.)

Extension number of call “owner” (i.e., extension that first placed or answered call) (For Transferred calls, there can be more than one owner - depending on how many extensions shared the call.)

For outgoing calls, the number Dialled or, for incoming calls, the Caller ID information

Account Code number entered by extension user

Outgoing trunk call

Outgoing trunk call placed using Toll Restriction

Override

Incoming trunk calls

All lines in group are busy (group number follows

TIME field)

Call blocked due to Toll Restriction

Transferred call

ISDN trunk call

Features

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 237 -

Features

SMDR Report Format

Character Position Field Definition

Header Line

1-62 Spaces

63-70 MM/DD/YYYY

71 Space

72-75 PAGE

76 Space

77-79

CR & LF

Report page number (e.g., 001)

Header Line 2

1-5 CLASS

6 Space

7-10 TIME

11-14 Spaces

15-18 LINE

19-22 Spaces

23-30 DURATION

31-32 Spaces

33-39 STATION

40-42 Spaces

43-48 DIALLED

49 Space

50-56 No./CLI

57-63 Spaces

64-74 ACCOUNT

CR & LF Carriage return and line feed

SMDR Record

1-4 Call type (e.g., POT for outgoing)

5 Space

6-10 Time in 24 hour clock (HH:MM)

11 Space

12-21 LINE, space, line number (e.g., LINE 01)

22 Space

31 Space

32-41 Station number (STA, space, nnnn) or name

42 Space

43-62 Number Dialled (20 digits maximum)

63 Space

64-79 Account number or NO ANSWER

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 238 -

Features

Summary Reports

OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY

FOR DAY OF nn/nn/nn

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS:0

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS:0

NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

OUTGOING CALL/COST

SUMMARY FOR WEEK ENDING nn/nn/nn

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS:49

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS:0

NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY

FOR MONTH ENDING nn/nn/nn

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS:49

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS:0

NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

Conditions

A) The SMDR report does not include voice Intercom calls.

B) The SMDR call buffer stores calls. The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable. When the buffer fills, each new call is not recorded. The alarm display telephone assigned in Program 90-11-01 shows “SMDR Buffer Full,” indicating that the buffer is full. To clear the buffer, the SMDR information must be printed out. When not using SMDR, make sure Program 90-13-01=0 or Program 90-11-01=0 otherwise the SMDR alarm will display to the extension in Program 90-11-01 or to the operator’s extension.

C) When SMDR reports are enabled using the same port as the Traffic Management Reporting feature (example: 147), the SMDR block the Traffic Management reports. Unplugging the cable and plugging in back in again will allow Traffic Management reports to print.

D) SMDR requires a connection to the EXIFU via a COM port.

E) To ensure accurate timing of outgoing call durations when using analogue PSTN lines, the line supervision facility “Line Reversal on Answer” must be subscribed to with you service provider and programmed into the system using Program 14-02-08 = 0.

Default Setting

Disabled.

- 239 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Programming

10-21-02 : Hardware Setup - Baud Rate for COM Port

If the SMDR connection is made using the COM port on the EXIFU unit, define the baud rate

(0=4800, 1=9600, 2=19200, 3=38400, 4=57600, 5=11520).

11-10-23 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - SMDR - Extension Accumulated

Printout Code

11-10-24 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - SMDR - Group Accumulated Printout

Code

11-10-25 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Account Code Accumulated Printout

Code

14-01-06 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - SMDR Print Out

For each trunk, enter 0 if trunk’s calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter 1 if trunk’s calls should not appear on SMDR report.

14-02-08 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup – Answering Condition

15-01-03 : Basic Extension Data Setup - SMDR Printout

For each extension, enter 1 if extension’s calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter 0 if extension’s calls should not appear on SMDR report.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

20-07-18 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension

Data

20-07-19 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - SMDR Printout Accumulated STG

Data

20-07-20 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - SMDR Printout Accumulated Account

Code Data

35-01-01 : SMDR Options - Output Port Type

Specify the type of connection used for SMDR (0=No setting, 1=COM Port(EXIFU), 3=LAN

Port (EXIFU). The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02.

35-01-04 : SMDR Options - Omit (Mask) Digits

Enter the number of digits (1-24) you want SMDR to block (i.e., “X” out). Enter 0 not to block any digits.

35-01-05 : SMDR Options - Minimum Number of SMDR Digits

Enter the minimum number of digits a user must dial (1-24) before the system includes a call on the SMDR report. Enter 0 to include all outgoing calls, regardless of the number of digits dialled.

35-01-06 : SMDR Options - Minimum Call Duration

Enter the minimum duration of a call (1-65535) that will print on the SMDR report. Enter 0 to have calls of any duration print.

35-01-07 : SMDR Options - Minimum Ringing Time

Enter how long an unanswered call must ring (1-65535) before SMDR logs it as “No Answer).

Enter 0 to allow all “No Answer” calls to print.

35-02-01 : SMDR Output Options - Toll Restricted Call

Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include calls blocked by Toll Restriction. Enter 0 to exclude blocked calls.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 240 -

Features

35-02-02 : SMDR Output Options - PBX Calls

If system is behind a PBX, enter 1 to have SMDR include all calls to the PBX. Enter 0 to have SMDR include only calls dialled using PBX trunk access code.

35-02-03 : SMDR Output Options - Display Trunk Name or Number

Select whether the system should display the trunk name (0) or the number (1) on SMDR reports. If this option is set to “1”, Program 35-02-14 must be set to “0”.

35-02-04 : SMDR Output Options - Daily Summary

35-02-05 : Weekly Summary and

35-02-06 : Monthly Summary

Enter 1 to enable a summary report. Enter 0 to disable a summary report. The daily report prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday night at midnight. The monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month.

35-02-08 : SMDR Output Options - Incoming Calls

Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to include incoming calls. Enter 1 if you want the

SMDR report to exclude incoming calls.

35-02-09 : SMDR Output Options - Print Name or Number

Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to include the extension’s name. Enter 1 if you want the

SMDR report to include the extension’s number.

35-02-14 : SMDR Output Options – Date

Determine whether the date should be displayed on SMDR reports (0=not displayed, 1=displayed). This option must be set to “0” if the trunk name is set to be displayed in Program

35-02-03.

35-02-16 : SMDR Output Options - Print Trunk Name or Received Dialled Number

Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to print the trunk port name (as assigned in Program

14-01-01). Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to print the received dialled number. On

ANI/DNIS trunks, if enabled (Program 2404:1), the DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the trunk name. For DID trunks, if the received number is not defined in

Program 22-11-01, then no number will be printed.

80-05-01 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports

Set the date format for SMDR (0=American, 1=Japanese or 2=European).

90-12-01 :

90-12-02 :

System Alarm Output - Output Port Type

System Alarm Output - Destination Extension Number

90-13-01 :

90-13-02 :

System Information Output - Output Port Type

System Information Output - Destination Extension Number

Related Features

PBX Compatibility

Operation

Once installed and programmed, SMDR operation is automatic.

- 241 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)

Description

Tandem Trunking allows an extension user to join two or more outside callers in a trunk-to-trunk Conference.

The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. The extension user that established the Conference is not part of the conversation. The Conference continues until either outside party hangs up. In addition, the extension user that set up the Conference can end the tandem call at any time.

The number of Conference calls is limited by the number of Conference circuits in the system. Due to this fact, the maximum number of Conference calls cannot exceed 32.

Tandem Trunking could help an office manager, for example, put two outside sales people in touch. The office manager could:

Answer a call from one salesperson

Place a call to the second salesperson

Set up the trunk-to-trunk Conference

Drop out of the call

The office manager could terminate the Conference at any time.

There are two methods for Enhanced Tandem Trunking:

Method A - Set Up Without Transfer Key

An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) by using the CONF key. This option uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call.

Method B - Tandem Trunking on Hang Up

This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call they have placed on Hold. It uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call.

Conditions

A) Tandem Trunking requires analogue loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or ISDN trunks.

B) The maximum number of trunk-to-trunk conferences allowed is determined by the

Conference feature setup. See Programming below.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

Tandem Trunking Method A - Tandem Trunking from Conference

10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits

The number of circuits assigned as Conversation Record circuits limits the number of available Conference circuits. Make sure there are circuits available for Conference.

14-01-04 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls

Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.

14-01-05 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls

Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.

14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Supervision

For each trunk that should be able to participate in a tandem call, enter 1.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 242 -

Features

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

(Optional) Assign a function key for Transfer (code 06).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-08 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) – Conference

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a

Conference.

20-13-10 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Mode

In an extension’s Class of Service, set whether an extension should be able to Barge In to a call and talk (1) or just monitor the call (0).

20-11-14 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer

Disable (0) the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction option.

Tandem Trunking Method B - Tandem Trunking on Hang Up

10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits

The number of circuits assigned as Conversation Record circuits limits the number of available Conference circuits. Make sure there are circuits available for Conference.

14-01-04 : Basic Trunk Data Setup – Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls

Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.

14-01-05 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls

Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.

14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Disconnect Supervision

For each trunk, enter 1 to enable loop supervision.

14-02-12 : Detect Network Disconnect Signal

Enable the network disconnect signal detection for proper release of analogue trunks.

24-02-07 : Forced release for Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer

Specify the maximum length of time a trunk-to-trunk transfer (tandem transfer) can be in progress before it is forcibly disconnected (default=30 minutes).

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Transfer (code 06).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a function key for Transfer (code 06).

20-07-11 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Forced Trunk Disconnect

In an extension’s Class of Service, enter 1 to enable Forced Trunk Disconnect. This allows the extension to disconnect an Unsupervised Conference in progress (initially set up using Method

B).

20-13-08 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) – Conference

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a

Conference.

20-13-10 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Mode

In an extension’s Class of Service, set whether an extension should be able to Barge In to a call and talk (1) or just monitor the call (0).

20-11-14 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer

Disable (0) the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction option.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 243 -

Features

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering / Central Office Calls, Placing

Conference, Voice Call

Meet Me Conference

Meet Me Paging

Operation

Method A - Tandem Trunking from Conference

To set up a Tandem Call:

1. Place or answer first trunk call.

2. Press CONF key.

3. Place or answer second trunk call.

4. To add more calls to the tandem call, repeat from Step 2. or to set up the tandem call, press CONF key twice.

This sets up a Conference between you and both outside parties.

5. Press Transfer key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 06).

To end the Tandem Call:

1. Press either flashing line key.

The line keys light steadily (green). You can listen (i.e., monitor) to the call or rejoin the conversation, based on the setting in Program 20-13-10.

2. Press SPK or Hang up.

If Program 20-13-10 is set to “0”, the Conference ends and the line keys go out.

If Program 20-13-10 is set to “1”, to disconnect the Conference, you must use Forced

Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press the line key + 724).

Method B - Tandem Trunking on Hang up

To set up a Tandem Call:

1. Answer first trunk call.

2. Press HOLD to place the first trunk call on Hold.

3. Place second trunk call.

4. Press Transfer key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 06) or hang up.

This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties.

The line keys for the trunks light steadily (red).

To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press line key + 724).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 244 -

Features

Time and Date

Description

The system uses Time and Date for:

Central Office Calls (Access Maps)

Class of Service (Class)

Direct Inward Lines

Display Telephones

Fax Machine Compatibility

Night Service (Automatic)

Programmable Trunk Parameters

Ring Groups

Station Message Detail Recording

System Reports

Toll Restriction (Class)

Trunk Group Routing

Voice Response System

Conditions

The system retains the Time and Date after a power failure or system reset.

The system can automatically adjust for daylight savings time if desired.

The date must be set in system programming (10-01).

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

10-01-01 : Time and Date

Set the system Time and Date from your administrator’s telephone.

10-24 : Daylight Saving Setup

20-02-07 : System Options for System Telephones - Time and Date Display Mode

Select the display mode (type 1-8) for Time and Date (i.e., Time and Date format).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-07-03 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Time and Date

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to set the

Time and Date.

Related Features

Class of Service

Single Line Telephones

Operation

To set the system Time:

1. Press a SPK key.

2. Dial 828.

3. Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).

4. Dial two digits for the minutes (00-60).

5. Press SPK to hang up.

- 245 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Toll Restriction

Description

Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Toll Restriction according to an extension’s Toll Restriction Class. The system allows for up to 15 Toll Restriction Classes.

Toll Restriction offers the following capabilities:

Common Permit Code Table

Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Toll Restriction Classes to dial. To let all users dial 000 (000 is an emergency call in Australia), for example, put 000 in the Common Permit Code

Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and Common Restrict Code Tables. The system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is 4 digits max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH

(as a wild card).

Common Restrict Code Table

The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Toll

Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from Dialling directory assistance (411), for example, put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you don’t allow the codes you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. The system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is 4 digits max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).

Restrict Code Table

When you want Toll Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the

Restrict Code Table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the Restrict Code

Table. (If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) The system provides 4 tables, with 60 entries (restricted codes) in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).

Permit Code Table

The Permit Code Table lets you set up Toll Restriction so that users can dial only selected

(permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To allow all users to dial only area code 03, for example, enter 103 in the Permit Code Table. 1 + 03 + NNX

+ nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table.

Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) The system provides 4 tables, with 60 entries

(permitted codes) in each table. A permitted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, * and

FLASH (as a wild card).

International Call Restriction

International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial.

You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict

Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. The system provides 10 International Call Restrict tables with up to 4 digits in each table entry and 20

International Call Allow tables, with up to 6 digits in each table entry. Valid entries are 0-9, #,* and FLASH (for a wild card).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 246 -

Features

Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialling

Abbreviated Dialling can bypass or follow Toll Restriction. If you allow many users to program

Abbreviated Dialling, consider Toll Restricting the numbers they dial. If only administrators can program Abbreviated Dialling, Toll Restriction may not be necessary. You can separately restrict

Group and Common Abbreviated Dialling.

Call Digit Counting

Use Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the Maximum

Number of Digits in Local Calls to 8 to limit local callers to Dialling the exchange code (xxxx) and local address (nnnn) only. The system provides 4 tables in which you can make entries for this option. The range is 4-30 digits.

Toll Call Digit Counting

With Toll Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can dial.

This lets you prevent callers from Dialling extensively into long distance dial-up services. You can make four entries (4-30 digits).

Toll Free Trunks

Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company president’s Private Line.

Users can place calls on Toll Free Trunks anytime -- to anywhere, without inadvertently being toll restricted.

PBX Call Restriction

Toll Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics.

Conditions

A) If a Toll Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the system does not restrict the call.

B) Toll Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance automated services.

C) Toll Restriction is applied when accessing ARS.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-01-08 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Toll Restriction

For each trunk, enter 0 to disable Toll Restriction; enter 1 to enable Toll Restriction.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

For each extension, assign a Class of Service (1-15).

20-08-02 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Trunk Calls

For each Class of Service, decide whether to enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to place an outgoing trunk call.

20-13-20 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Account Code/Toll Restriction

Operator Alert

When toll restriction is violated, determine if the operator should be notified. (0=disable,

1=enable)

21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class

For each extension, assign a Toll Restriction Class for reach Night Service mode.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 247 -

Features

21-05-01 : Toll Restriction Class - International Call Restriction Table

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call

Restrict Table (Program 21-06-01).

21-05-02 : Toll Restriction Class - International Call Permit Table

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Permit

Table (Program 21-06-02).

21-05-04 : Toll Restriction Class - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignments

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable (1) the dialling limit for calls.

When enabling, select from entries 1-4 in Program 21-06-03.

21-05-05 : Toll Restriction Class - Common Permit Code Table

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Permit Code

Table (Program 21-06-04).

21-05-06 : Toll Restriction Class - Common Restrict Code Table

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Restrict Code

Table (Program 21-06-05).

21-05-07 : Toll Restriction Class - Permit Code Table

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Permit Code Table. When enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 21-06-06.

21-05-08 : Toll Restriction Class - Restrict Code Table

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Restrict Code Table. When enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 21-06-07.

21-05-09 : Toll Restriction Class - Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialling

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Toll Restriction for

Common Abbreviated Dialling numbers.

21-05-10 : Toll Restriction Class - Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialling Numbers

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Toll Restriction for Group

Abbreviated Dialling numbers.

21-05-11 : Toll Restriction Class - Intercom Call Restriction

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Intercom Call Restriction. If enabled, extensions cannot place or receive Intercom calls.

21-05-12 : Toll Restriction Class - PBX Call Restriction

For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) PBX Call Restriction. Refer to the PBX Compatibility Feature.

21-06-01 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - International Call Restrict Table

Enter the international dialling codes you want to restrict.

21-06-02 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - International Call Permit Table

Enter the international dialling codes you want to permit.

21-06-03 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment

Select the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table (4-30).

21-06-04 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Common Permit Code Table

Program codes into the Common Permit Code Table.

21-06-05 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Common Restrict Table

Program codes into the Common Restrict Code Table.

21-06-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Permit Code Table

Program codes into the Permit Code Tables.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 248 -

Features

21-06-07 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Restrict Code Table

Program codes into the Restrict Code Tables.

21-06-08 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - PBX Access Codes

The system allows up to 4 tables for PBX access codes. Refer to the PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Toll Restriction, Dial Block

Toll Restriction Override

Operation

To place a trunk call if your system is Toll Restricted:

1. Place call normally.

If your Toll Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call will be cut off.

- 249 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Toll Restriction, Dial Block

Description

Toll Restriction Dial Block lets a user temporarily block an extension’s Toll Restriction. This helps a user block his or her phone from being used by another person while they are away from their desk. A user would need to enter a 4-digit personal code to enable/disable this feature.

Dial Block can also be set by the system administrator. If Dial Block has already been set by an extension user, the supervisor can not release it. Additionally, if Dial Block has been set by the supervisor, and extension user can not release it.

Important: This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.

Conditions

A) If the system is reset by a cold start, the Dial Block feature is cleared.

B) This feature is not available for ISDN S-Bus extensions.

C) Both Programs 21-09-01 and 21-10 can be set at the same time. The system gives priority to the setting in Program 21-10.

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

11-10-17 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Dial Block by Supervisor

Assign a service code (101 by default) to be used by the supervisor to set Dial Block for another extension.

11-11-33 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Dial Block

Assign a service code (100 by default) to be used for Dial Block.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a COS to each extension (1-15).

20-08-01 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial Block.

20-08-08 : Toll Restriction Dial Block

21-09-01 : Dial Block Setup - Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block

Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service (1-15) when the Dial Block feature is used.

21-09-02 : Dial Block Setup - Supervisor Password

Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for other extensions.

21-10-01 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension

Assign the Toll Restriction class (1-15) to be used by an extension when the Dial Block feature is enabled. If this data is “0”, Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.

90-19-01 : Dial Block Release

Enter the extension number to be released from the Dial Block restriction. This program can be used when a password is forgotten by the user.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 250 -

Features

Related Features

Toll Restriction

Operation

To set Dial Block:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 700.

3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.

4. Dial 1.

A confirmation tone is heard.

5. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

To release Dial Block:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 700.

3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.

4. Dial 0.

A confirmation tone is heard.

5. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

To set Dial Block from another extension:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 701.

3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.

4. Dial the extension number to be blocked.

5. Dial 1.

A confirmation tone is heard.

6. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

To release Dial Block from another extension:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 701.

3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.

4. Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block.

5. Dial 0.

A confirmation tone is heard.

6. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

- 251 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Toll Restriction Override

Description

Toll Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass an extension’s Toll Restriction. This helps a user that must place an important call that Toll Restriction normally prevents. For example, you could set up Toll

Restriction to block 0011 calls and then provide a Toll Restriction Override code to your attendant and executives. When the attendant or executive needs to place a 0011 call, they just:

Press CALL and dial their override code.

Press a line key or dial a trunk access code (e.g., 0 or 805 002).

Place the 0011 call without restriction.

You can assign a different Toll Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can share the same override code.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

11-11-36 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Walking Toll Restriction

Assign a service code ( 163 763) for Toll Restriction Override.

20-08-06 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Toll Restriction Override

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Toll Restriction

Override.

21-01-07 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Toll Restriction Override Time

Set the Toll Restriction Override Time (0-64800 seconds). After dialling the Toll Restriction

Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction for this interval.

21-14-01 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup - User ID

Enter the Toll Restriction Override User ID codes (6 digits) into tables. Up to 500 different override codes can be entered.

21-14-02 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup - Walking Toll Restriction Class Number

Enter the Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service (1-15) to be used for each table number assigned in 21-14-01.

35-02-06 through 35-02-11 : SMDR Output Options

Assign the output condition for the printer or PC. If the data is set to “1” (output), the symbol of the call will print as “POTW” and the password table number will be printed as “W/

@@@” (@@ equals the 3 digit table number) in the Account Code area.

Related Features

Station Message Detail Recording

Toll Restriction

Voice Response System (VRS)

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 252 -

Features

Operation

To temporarily override a restricted extension’s Toll Restriction:

You can override restriction for only one call at a time.

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 763.

3. Dial the 6-digit Toll Restriction Override code. If you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure. You’ll hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.

4. Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.

5. Dial number without restriction.

- 253 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Transfer

Description

Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active Intercom or outside call to any other extension in the system. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination extension. This assures that users do not lose or inadvertently abandon their transfers. While a transferred call is ringing an extension the system can optionally play ringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller.

The system allows the following types of transfers:

Screened Transfer

The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up

Unscreened Transfer

The transferring party extends the call without an announcement.

Extension (Department) Groups Transfer

The Transferring party sends the call to a Department instead of an extension.

Transfer Without Holding

A user wishing to have a trunk call transferred to them presses the busy line key and waits for the call to complete. The system automatically sends them the call when the internal party to that call hangs up.

Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation

With Automatic On-Hook Transfer, a Transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs up. For example, extension 204 can answer a trunk, press HOLD, dial 205 and hang up. The system extends the call to extension 205. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, the call would stay on Hold at extension 204 when the user hangs up. To extend the call, the user at extension 204 would have to press TRFR or a Transfer

Programmable Function key before hanging up.

Each method has advantages. Automatic On-Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier. However, users have to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, extending a call becomes a two-step operation - but separate from placing calls on Hold.

Prevent Recall of Transferred Call

The Class of Service program has an option that will allow you to prevent a Transferred call from recalling the originating extension if the call is not answered.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Extension users may want a function keys programmed for Transfer (code 06).

20-02-01 : System Options for System Telephones - Retrieve the Line After Transfer

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to answer a call after it’s been transferred, but before it’s answered.

20-03-01 : System Options for Single Line Telephones - SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode

For a busy single line telephone, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call:

0 = Press and release hookswitch to pick up waiting call

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 254 -

Features

1 = Press and release hookswitch and dial Service Code 894 to answer waiting call

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-11-06 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Unscreened Transfer

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use

Unscreened Transfer.

20-11-07 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Without Holding

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use

Transfer Without Holding.

20-11-08 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Display

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s incoming Transfer pre-answer display.

20-11-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Automatic On Hook Transfer

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use

Automatic On Hook Transfer. If enabled, user must press HOLD and dial the extension number to Transfer the call. If disabled, a user must have a Transfer Programmable Function

Key. To transfer the call, the user would press HOLD, dial the extension number, then press the Transfer Programmable Function key to complete the transfer.

20-11-18 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - No Recall

If an extension should not receive recalls of unanswered Transferred calls, disable this option

(0=allow recalls, 1=prevent recalls).

24-02-01 : System Options for Transfer - Busy Transfer

Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, calls transferred to busy extensions recall immediately.

24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time

If activated at an extension, Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this interval (0-64800 seconds). This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice

Mail before routing to the called extension’s mailbox.

24-02-04 : System Options for Transfer - Transfer Recall Time

Set the Transfer Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this interval. This interval also sets how long a transferred call camps-on to a busy extension.

Related Features

Caller ID

Call Forwarding

Meet Me Paging Transfer

Programmable Function Keys

Serial Call

Operation

Transferring Trunk Calls

To Transfer a trunk call to a co-worker’s extension:

1. At system phone, press HOLD.

OR

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 255 -

Features

At single line telephone, hookflash.

You hear Transfer dial tone.

2. Dial co-worker’s extension number.

If the extension is busy or doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or press the line key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp-On. SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash. If a call has been transferred and the single line user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by Dialling 815 and the extension number to which it had been transferred.

3. Announce call and hang up.

If you don’t have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press TRFR or your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call. If your co-worker doesn’t want the call, press the flashing line key to return to the call. SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash. If a call has been transferred and the single line user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by Dialling 815 and the extension number to which it had been transferred. If you don’t want to screen the call, hang up without making an announcement.

To answer a call transferred to your extension:

1. Lift the handset when a co-worker announces the call.

Transferring Without Holding

To Transfer without holding (system phone only):

1. Lift handset.

2. Press busy line key.

3. When original caller hangs up, you are connected.

Transferring Intercom Calls

To Transfer your Intercom call:

1. At system phone, press HOLD.

OR

At single line telephone, hookflash.

2. Dial extension to receive your call.

If the extension is busy, doesn’t answer or does not want the call, you can dial another extension number or press the lit CALL key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp-On. SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash. If a call has been transferred and the single line user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by Dialling 815 and the extension number to which it had been transferred.

3. Announce your call and hang up.

With Automatic On Hook Transfer

When you hang up, the call is automatically transferred.

Without Automatic On Hook Transfer

You must press your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call. If your co-worker just speaks toward their phone to answer, the Intercom call being transferred disconnects when you hang up. To Transfer the call unscreened, press your Transfer Programmable Function Key and hang up without making an announcement.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 256 -

Features

Trunk Group Routing

Description

Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group Routing code (0) for trunk calls. Trunk Group Routing routes calls in the order specified by system programming. If a user dials 0 and all trunks in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled. All trunks are in Group 1.

Programming

11-01-01 : System Numbering

Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access.

11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code

If required, change the single-digit Trunk Access Code (normally 0). If you change this code, you must also review the settings in 11-01 for the new code selected.

11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code

Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-25).

14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing

Set up an outbound routing table (1-25) for trunk groups assigned in Program 14-05.

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.

15-07 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Trunk Group Routing access (code *02 + trunk group 01-25).

21-02-01 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

Assign the routes set in Program 14-06 to extensions.

21-03-01 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks

Assigns the routes set in Program 14-06 for use with Automatic Extended Call Forward.

21-15-01 : Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions

Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code assigned in Program 11-09-02. Trunk Group Routing is set up in Program 14-06.

23-03-01 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer

Assign trunk routes set in Program 14-06 to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension’s assigned route, the user can dial the Universal

Answer code ( #0 872) to pick up the call. This program also allows an extension user to automatically answer trunk calls ringing other extensions, based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). (Trunk Group Routing=1-25)

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 257 -

Features

25-10-01 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials 0. The Trunk Group Routing is defined in Program 14-06. If the system has ARS, dialling 0 accesses ARS. The route chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is determined by the password the caller dials.

25-12-01 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code assigned in Program 11-09-02. The route selected is based on the DISA caller’s Class of Service, which is in turn determined by the password the caller dial. Program 14-06 is used to set up the Trunk Group Routing.

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programmable Function Keys

Ringing Line Preference

Trunk Groups

Operation

To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 0.

3. Dial number.

OR

1. At system phone, press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *05).

Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.

2. Dial number.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 258 -

Features

Trunk Groups

Description

Trunk Groups let you optimize trunk usage for incoming and outgoing calls. With Trunk Groups, users can have loop (rotary) keys for trunk calls. Incoming trunk group calls ring these loop keys. For outgoing calls, the user presses a loop key to access the first available trunk within the group. You set the access order in trunk group programming. The system allows up to 25 trunk groups.

Loop keys give an extension user more available function keys, since the user doesn’t need a separate line key for each trunk. The user only needs one loop key for each trunk group. This simplifies placing and answering calls.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

All trunks are in group 1.

Programming

10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup

Allocate the circuits on the 308M or DSPDB PCBs for DTMF receiving.

14-05-01 : Trunk Groups

Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-25).

14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Assign trunks to Access Maps (1-51).

15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Assign Access Maps (1-51) to extensions.

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign function keys for trunk group access (code *02 + group) or loop keys (code *05 +

0=incoming, 1=outgoing, 2=both + trunk group (001-100). If loop keys are used, assign the loop key to a trunk group in Program 15-13.

20-02-02 : System Options for System Telephones - Trunk Loop Access Key Operating Mode

Set the operating mode of the extension’s trunk group keys (Incoming and Outgoing Access =

0, Outgoing Access =1, Incoming Access = 2).

Related Features

Abbreviated Dialling

Automatic Route Selection

Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)

Loop Keys

Programmable Function Keys

Ring Groups

Trunk Group Routing

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 259 -

Features

Operation

To place a call over a trunk group:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 804.

3. Dial trunk group number (1-9 or 01-25 ).

4. Dial number.

OR

1. Press trunk group key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *02 + group)

2. Dial number.

To answer an incoming trunk group call:

1. Lift handset.

2. Press flashing trunk group key.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 260 -

Features

Trunk Queuing/Camp On

Description

Trunk Queuing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy trunk or trunk group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the trunk is available. The user does not have to manually retry the trunk later. Trunk Queuing lets the caller know when the call can go through. If the extension user does not answer the Trunk Queuing ring, the system cancels the queue request.

With Trunk Camp On, an extension user can queue (wait in line) off hook for a busy trunk or trunk group to become free. The caller connects to the trunk when the trunk becomes free. As with Trunk Queuing, the user does not have to manually retry the trunk later.

Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group. When a trunk becomes free, the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left.

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

Assign a function key for Trunk Queuing and Trunk Camp On (code 35).

20-01-08 : System Options - Trunk Queuing Callback Time

Set the Trunk Queuing Callback Time (0-64800 seconds). Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this interval.

20-01-09 : System Options - Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time

Set the Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time (0-64800 seconds). The system cancels an extension’s Callback or Trunk Queuing request after this interval.

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-11-07 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Without Holding

Disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Transfer Without Holding.

Related Features

Automatic Route Selection

Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback

Central Office Calls, Placing

Programmable Function Keys

- 261 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Operation

To queue for a busy trunk:

1. Try to access busy trunk.

2. Press Trunk Queuing/Camp On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).

3. Hang up to leave a Trunk Queuing request.

OR

Wait off hook to Camp On to the trunk.

To answer when Trunk Queuing calls you back:

1. Lift handset.

To cancel a Trunk/Camp On request:

1. At system phone, press a SPK key.

OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial 870.

3. At system phone, press SPK to hang up.

OR

At single line telephone, hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 262 -

Features

Voice Mail

Description

The DSPDB daughter board with Compact Flash provides the option for the Voice Mail System capable of the following features:

Personal greeting/mailbox

Conversation record

General trunk answering guidance greeting

Conditions

300 mailboxes max

Storage time is limited to DSPDB compact flash size

100 messages per mailbox max. selectable personal greetings

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

11-12-39 : Service code setup (for Service Access) - VRS Access

Define the service code a user should dial to access the Voice Mail

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-07-13 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - VRS Record

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to record, erase and listen to VRS messages.

15-07-01 : Programmable function keys

Code 67 + mail box number - Mail box key for direct access to mailbox

Code 68 + 0 - Voice Mail service - skip message forward and replaying

Code 68 + 1 - Voice Mail service - skip message backward and replaying

Code 69 + 0 - Conversation record - Start and stop manual conversation record

Code 69 +1 - Conversation record - Delete a recorded conversation and re-record

Code 69 + 2 - Conversation record - Cancel call record and delete

Code 70 + mail box number - Auto Attendant setting - set call forward to DSPDB Voice Mail settings.

Code 71 + mail box number - Switch answering message - select one of three greetings

14-09-01 : Conversation Recording destination for trunks

Recording destination dial number - for DSPDB Voice Mail enter code in command 11-12-39

14-09-02 : Automatic Recording

Defines whether to automatically record on call answer : 0 = no, 1 = yes

14-09-03 : Recording contents storing method

0 = specifies by dialling, 1 = own mailbox. If set to 0 the voice mail will ‘call back’ and require a mailbox be entered to store recording.

14-09-04 : Automatic recording for outgoing call

Defines whether outgoing calls are automatically recorded.0 = off, 1 = on

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 263 -

Features

15-12-01 : Conversation recording destination for extensions

Recording destination dial number - for DSPDB Voice Mail enter code in 11-12-39. If both programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in 15-12 will be used.

15-12-02 : Automatic recording for extensions

Defines whether to automatically record trunk calls on answer : 0 = no 1 = yes.

15-12-03 : Recording contents storing method

0 = specifies by dialling, 1 = own mailbox. If set to 0 the voice mail will ‘call back’ and require a mailbox to be entered to store recording.

15-12-04 : Automatic recording for outgoing call

Defines whether outgoing calls are automatically recorded.

22-05-01 : Incoming trunk ring group assignment

Selects the ring group the trunk will ring on a per trunk per day/night mode basis. To select the

DSPDB Voice Mail voice mail enter 101.

40-01-01 : Voice mail basic setup - Voice channels

Number of channels of DSPDB from 0-16 dedicated to voice mail.

40-01-02 : Voice mail basic setup - Time stamp

Defines whether messages are time stamped : 1 = enabled, 0 = disabled.

40-01-03 : Voice mail basic setup - Conversation record for after transfer

Defines whether to continue conversation record after transfer : 1 = yes, 0 = no.

40-01-04 : Voice mail basic setup - Auto. attendant for non-existing extensions

Defines whether mailboxes without a telephone automatically have auto attendant set : 0 = disable, 1 = enable.

40-01-05 : Voice mail basic setup - Maintenance time

Defines the time that the voice mail performs self maintenance of DSPDB compact flash daily.

Note: the voice mail will close down whilst performing this action : 0000-2359

40-01-06 : Voice mail basic setup - Automatic message erase

Defines the number of days a new message will remain in a mailbox before it is auto erased : 0

- 180 days.

40-02-01 : Mailbox setup - Mailbox number

This is the actual mailbox number up to 8 digits, if the mailbox is for an extension it should match the extension number. Up to 300 mailboxes can be assigned

40-02-02 : Mailbox setup - Mailbox password

This defines the password for a particular mailbox. If using this command it is set at 4 digits if a password less than this length is required it should be set by entering individual mailboxes.

If no password is required, leave blank.

40-03-01 : Message recording setup - voice mail recording time

Sets the maximum recording time of answering service message recording : 1 to 10 minutes.

40-03-02 : Message recording setup - Guidance message in case recording not allowed

When the answering service cannot record messages, sets whether to transmit the answering message of the mailbox or the fixed guidance : 0 = fixed guidance, 1 = Answering message of mailbox.

40-03-03 : Message recording setup - Automatic answering transmission for busy line

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 264 -

Features

Defines whether to automatically play the answering message for a busy extension, 0 = disable, 1 = enable.

40-04-01 : Live recording setup - operation mode when mailbox is not defined

Defines whether to record conversation in temporary box or callback extension to enter mailbox if mailbox is not defined in 14-09-01 or 15-12-01. 0 = temporary box, 1 = callback operation.

40-04-02 : Live recording setup - Temporary box number

Sets the box number to keep the unknown destination messages, 0 to 300 as defined in 40-02.

40-04-03 : Live recording setup - Live recording display

Enables or disables the system’s ability to display the recording feature active, 0 = disabled, 1

= enabled.

40-05-01 : Call information setup (for notification) - Maximum number of outgoing calls

Sets the maximum number of calls the voice mail can make simultaneously from 0 to 16, if set to 0 voice mail will not notify.

40-05-02 : Call information setup (for notification) - Trunk route number

Sets the trunk route number to use for outgoing calls from 0 to 100, if set to 0 voice mail will not notify.

40-05-03 : Call information setup (for notification) - ISDN calling number setting

Sets the caller number when an outgoing call is made using an ISDN line. Maximum 16 digits

0-9, * and #.

40-05-04 : Call information setup (for notification) - Calling interval (extension)

Sets the calling interval when calling an extension, 1 to 30 minutes.

40-05-05 : Call information setup (for notification) - Calling interval (trunk)

Sets the calling interval when calling a trunk line, 1 to 30 minutes.

40-05-06 : Call information setup (for notification) - Maximum calling count (extension)

Sets the maximum number of times to call an extension, 1 to 100.

40-05-07 : Call information setup (for notification) - Maximum calling count (trunk)

Sets the maximum number of times to call an extension, 1 to 100.

40-06-01 : Trunk answering Service Setting - Operation mode

Defines on a per trunk per day/night mode whether to enable General Auto Attendant = answering and recording, 1 = not used.

40-06-02 : Trunk answering Service Setting - transmission guidance number

Sets the Guidance message number from 1 to 48 played on a per trunk per day/night mode basis. If set to 0 the fixed guidance is transmitted.

40-06-03 : Trunk answering Service Setting - Message box number

Sets the message box number used for storing messages for trunk answering. 0 to 300 as defined in 40-02.

40-09-01 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group setup

Defines up to 10 broadcast groups containing up to 100 mailboxes as defined in 40-02.

Related Features

Direct Inward Dialling (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)

DID or DDI trunks can be directed at the DSPDB Voice Mail

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

DIL trunks can be directed at the DSPDB Voice Mail

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 265 -

Features

Programmable Function Keys

Key telephones can have function keys enabled for ease of voice mail functionality

Date & Time setup

Sets the date and time transmitted on guidance

Night Service

Sets the operation mode for the system

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 266 -

Features

Operation

Voice Mail Function Keys

We recommend setting up Voice Mail related function keys on your Keyphone or DSS console to allow you to use Voice Mail more efficiently. (See also Programmable Function Keys.)

Programming a Voice Mail Key:

6.

Press SPK key.

7.

Dial 851.

8.

Press the key you want to program.

9.

Enter the 2-digit function number, followed by any additional information required (see table below).

10.

Press HOLD.

67 + Mail Box - Mail Box Key

68 + 0

- Voice Mail Service

- for direct access to mailbox

- skip message forward and replaying

68 + 1

69 + 0

- Voice Mail Service - skip message backward and replaying

- Conversation Record - Start/stop manual conversation record

69 + 1

69 + 2

- Conversation Record - Delete conversation and re-record

- Conversation Record - Cancel call record and delete

70 + Mailbox

- Automated Attendant - set call forward to Voice Mail.

71 + Mailbox - Greeting Message - select one of three greetings.

To check the function of a Programmable Function Key:

3.

Press CHECK.

4.

Press the programmed key.

The programmed function displays.

Voice Mail Service Codes

In order to use the various services provided by voice mail, operation codes must be input.

There are two types of operation codes:

1.

Service code: following the voice guidance, a code to select the service.

2.

Option code: a number to select optional settings or operations of a service.

Function

Help

Play Message

Service

Code

Optional Function

Option

Code

0#

Replay Message

1#

Pause/Restart the Playback

4#

Erase Message and Play Next Message

7#

Save Message and Play Next Message

9#

1#

Copy the Message

2#

Skip Playback Forward 8 seconds

3#

Skip Playback Backward 8 seconds

6#

Broadcast the Message

28#

Exit

*#

7#

Erase All Messages

Broadcast Message to a

Multiple Address Group

Greeting

Message 1

Play

Record

2#

31#

32#

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 267 -

Features

Function

Greeting

Message 2

Greeting

Message 3

Erase

Play

Record

Erase

Play

Record

Erase

Message Notification

Set Automated Attendant

Play Messages

“First In First Out”

Play Messages

“Last In First Out”

Password Setting

Message Registration Control

Setting

Exit

Service

Code

37#

35#

33#

38#

36#

34#

39#

Optional Function

61#

Notify to an Extension

Notify to an External Number

Cancel Notification

Exit

62#

63#

64#

65#

66#

*#

Mailbox Password

You can set a four digit password for your mailbox.

Setting Your Password:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Dial service code 65#.

3.

Dial new four digit password.

4.

Dial #.

5.

Your password will be spoken back to you.

6.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

7.

Hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press SPK or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 65#.

5.

Dial new four digit password.

6.

Dial #.

7.

Your password will be spoken back to you.

8.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

9.

Hang up.

Deleting Your Password:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Dial service code 65#.

3.

Dial 9999.

4.

Dial #.

5.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

6.

Hang up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 268 -

Option

Code

1#

2#

0#

*#

Features

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press SPK or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 65#.

5.

Dial 9999.

6.

Dial #.

7.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

8.

Hang up.

Voice Mail Messages

Listening to Messages:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Messages are automatically played back.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 1#.

5.

Listen to messages.

Recording a Message to Send to a Mailbox:

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Dial *.

4.

Dial the mailbox number you wish to send a message to.

5.

Dial #.

6.

Record message.

7.

Hang up.

Recording a Message to Send to a Broadcast List:

It is possible to send a message to up to 100 mailboxes simultaneously. This feature is set up at installation and can create up to 10 Broadcast lists containing up to 100 mailboxes in each using programming command

40-09-01.

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Dial service code 2#.

3.

Dial abbreviated broadcast list number.

4.

Record Message.

5.

Hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 2#.

5.

Dial abbreviated broadcast list number (0-9).

6.

Record Message.

7.

Hang up.

Transferring a Message to a Broadcast List:

1.

After the message playback has ended,

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 269 -

Features

2.

Dial 28#.

3.

Dial abbreviated broadcast list number (0-9).

4.

Dial #.

5.

Dial 0# to accept.

6.

Hang up.

Voice Mail Access from Outside Line:

1.

Dial in to listen to your personal greeting.

2.

After your greeting has ended, two short beeps will be heard.

3.

Enter your password (if set).

4.

Dial #.

5.

You now have access to the service code options for your mailbox,

(e.g. dial 1# to listen to your messages).

Personal Answering Machine Emulation

System Phone

1.

Press the Personal Answering Machine Emulation key (SC 851:16).

2.

Dial 1 to Set, or 0 to Cancel.

3.

Dial Call Forwarding type:

2 = All calls

3 = Outside calls only

4 = Intercom calls only

4.

Press SPK to hang up.

Single Line Telephone

6.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

7.

Dial 888 (Call Forward to Station).

8.

Dial 1 to Set, or 0 to Cancel.

9.

Dial Call Forwarding type:

2 = All calls

3 = Outside calls only

4 = Intercom calls only

10.

Hang up.

Personal Automated Attendant

Forwarding Your Calls to Voice Mail:

System Phone

1.

Press the Automated Attendant key (SC 851:70) repeatedly until the desired call forward setting is made

( All, No Answer, Busy, Busy/No Answer, Cancel).

-OR-

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 62#, to toggle on and off.

A System Phone that does not have an Auto Attendant key can set Call Forward All to Voice Mail only.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Lift Handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Dial 62#, to toggle Forward All on and off.

Single Line Telephones can set Call Forward All to Voice Mail only.

There are 3 greeting messages available for each mailbox. Service codes are available to record, play or erase each individual message.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 270 -

Features

To Record a Greeting Message:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67)

2.

Dial service code (see table below)

3.

Record your message, after the beep.

4.

Dial 9# to end the recording.

5.

Hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Lift Handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code (see table below).

5.

Record your message, after the beep.

6.

Dial 9# to end the recording.

7.

Hang up.

32# Record Message 1

33# Record Message 2

34# Record Message 3

To Listen to a Greeting Message:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Dial service code (see table below).

3.

Listen to the message and hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Lift Handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code (see table below).

5.

Listen to the message and hang up.

31# Play Message 1

35# Play Message 2

36# Play Message 3

To Erase a Greeting Message:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Dial service code (see table below).

3.

Dial 0# to erase message.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Lift Handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code (see table below).

5.

Dial 0# to erase message.

37# Erase Message 1

38# Erase Message 2

39# Erase Message 3

- 271 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Selecting a Greeting Message to Play:

System Phone

1.

Press the Change Attendant Message key (code:71) repeatedly to toggle between the three answering messages. The lamp indicates which message is selected.

Message 1 = Lamp extinguished

Message 2 = lamp steady

Message 3 = lamp flashing.

A Single Line Telephone, or a System Phone without a ‘Change Attendant Message’ key, cannot change the

Greeting Message.

If “Busy Line Attendant Feature” has been set at installation, answering message 3 will play when the extension is busy, therefore messages 1 & 2 can only be used normal answering for Automated Attendant.

Message Notification

It is possible for the voice mail system to automatically notify you when a message has been left in your mailbox. The message notification feature can be set to call an extension or an external number.

Setting Message Notification:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Dial service code 61#.

3.

Dial 1# for an extension call, 2# for an outside call, or 0# to cancel.

4.

If either 1# or 2# is dialled, enter telephone number followed by # (it is not necessary to enter a trunk access code).

5.

The dialled number will be read out.

6.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

7.

Hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 61#.

5.

Dial 1# for an extension call, 2# for an outside call, or 0# to cancel.

6.

If either 1# or 2# is dialled, enter telephone number followed by # (it is not necessary to enter a trunk access code).

7.

The dialled number will be read out.

8.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

9.

Hang up.

Cancelling Message Notification:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Dial service code 61#.

3.

Dial 0# to cancel.

4.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

5.

Hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 61#.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 272 -

Features

5.

Dial 0# to cancel.

6.

Dial 0# to confirm (or 1# to cancel).

7.

Hang up.

Conversation Recording

Conversation record is set up at install with the option of either Automatic or manual recording. Automatic conversation record automatically records the call upon answer whereas manual conversation recording requires the pressing of a function key to evoke the service.

To perform manual conversation record a key must be programmed on the keyphone. The Conversation

Record key (code 69+0) is programmed via command 15-07-01 or service code 851.

Conversation recording can also be configured at installation via commands 14-09 and 15-12 to either record to your mailbox or to define the mailbox after the call has finished via a ‘callback’. If the callback option is specified the voice mail will call you back after the conversation has ended and you must specify a mailbox for storage.

AUTOMATIC RECORDING

Automatic Recording starts automatically when the call is answered.

MANUAL RECORDING

To Start Manual Recording:

1.

Press the Manual Conversation Recording Key at any time during the conversation.

Storing a Manual Recording Message:

1.

If prompted at end of call, enter the mailbox number where to store message.

-OR-

If Callback Mode is set, wait for the Voice Mail system to ring back after call has ended, then enter the mailbox number where to store the message, and dial #.

If you do not answer the callback or you do not specify a mailbox number, the recorded conversation will be

deleted.

Programming a Manual Conversation Recording Key:

1.

Press SPK key.

2.

Dial 851.

3.

Press the key you want to program.

4.

Dial service code 69.

5.

Dial 0.

6.

Press HOLD.

Listening to a Recorded Conversation:

System Phone

1.

Press Voice Mail Access key (SC 851:67).

2.

Messages are automatically played back.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 884 (default).

3.

Enter mailbox number (and password).

4.

Dial service code 1#.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 273 -

Features

5.

Listen to messages.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 274 -

Features

Voice Response System (VRS)

Description

The DSP daughter board provides the option for Voice Response System (VRS) which gives the system voice recording and playback capability. This enhances the system with:

VRS Messages

- are 48 system messages used for the General Message, Automated

Attendant greetings and the Preamble message

General Message

- provides a pre-recorded message to which any user can listen

Personal Greeting

- lets an extension user record a message and forward their calls.

Callers to the extension hear the recorded message and are then redirected.

Park and Page

- parks a call at an extension and automatically pages the user to pick it up

Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance)

- answers incoming calls, plays a greeting to the caller and then lets the caller directly dial a system extension

Voice Prompting Messages

- plays call and feature status messages to users

Preamble Message

- alerts callers of the cost and features of the “pay-per-call” service they have called. May also be used as an auto-answer with greeting application

Time, Date and Station Number Check

- lets a system phone extension user quickly hear a recording for the time, date, or the extension’s number.

VRS Messages

The VRS allows you to record up to 48 VRS messages. You allocate these messages for Automated Attendant greetings, the General Message and the Preamble message. The maximum duration of any one VRS message is not programmable. VRS messages are stored permanently in the event of a power failure.

Any on-premise extension, DISA or DID caller can listen, record and erase VRS Messages (unless restricted in programming). DISA and DID callers use the same procedures as on-premise users, except that they must additionally enter a VRS password.

General Message

A General Message is a pre-recorded message available to all callers. A General Message typically contains important company information that all employees should hear. To hear the General Message, an employee can go to any system phone and press 4 (for General Message). You can restrict the ability to record the General

Message in an extension’s Class of Service. This allows you to give recording capability to the System

Administrator or Communications Manager, for example, but not any employee. The MW LED at each telephone flashes when a new General Message is recorded. Once the extension user listens to the message, the

MW LED goes out.

Personal Greeting

Personal Greeting allows an extension user to record a message and forward their calls. Callers to the extension hear the recorded message and are then forwarded to the new destination. With Personal Greeting, an extension user can add a personal touch to their Call Forwards. For example, a user can record:

“Hi. This is John Smith. I’ll be out of the office today. In my absence, Mary Jones can answer all your questions.

Please hold on for Mary.”

After they record their Personal Greeting, the extension user chooses the condition that will activate Personal

Greeting. Personal Greeting will activate for:

Calls to the extension when it is busy or not answered

All calls immediately

Calls to the extension that are unanswered

The extension user then selects the destination for their calls. The choices are:

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 275 -

Features

In addition, the user can have Personal Greeting activate automatically for all calls, just CO (trunk) calls or just

Intercom calls. When the user implements Personal Greeting for all calls, the system plays the greeting and reroutes:

A co-worker’s extension

Personal Greeting only (without forwarding)

The extension user’s own subscriber mailbox (if Voice Mail [DSPDB-A2] is installed)

Off-Premise via Common Abbreviated Dialling

Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant (OPA)

DISA calls ringing the extension

DID calls ringing the extension

Direct Inward Lines (DILs) ringing the extension

Intercom calls

With Personal Greeting for only CO (trunk) calls, the system reroutes all of the calls listed above except

Intercom calls.

Personal Greetings are stored permanently. If there is a commercial power failure or if the system resets, any recorded Personal Greetings are kept.

Unique Personal Greeting Conditions

If a call comes into the extension when there are no VRS ports available to play the Personal Greeting, the system forwards the call without playing the recorded message to the caller.

If an extension has Personal Greeting (RNA – Ring No Answer) enabled,

Intercom calls that voice announce are not subject to Personal Greeting rerouting.

Personal Greeting does not reroute normal Ring Group calls. Calls transferred from a co-worker or Voice Mail route to the forwarding destination without listening to the Personal Greeting.

Park and Page

When an extension user is away from their phone, Park and Page can let them know when they have a call waiting to be answered. To enable Park and Page, the user records a Personal Greeting along with an additional

Paging announcement. Park and Page will then answer an incoming call and play the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller then listens to Music on Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the prerecorded Paging announcement. When the extension user hears the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call

Pickup to intercept the call.

For example, John Smith could record a Personal Greeting that says:

“Hello, this is John Smith. I am away from my phone right now but please hold on while I am automatically paged.”

The pre-recorded Paging announcement could say: “John Smith, you have a call waiting on your line.”

The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts the second message. John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call. If John doesn’t pick up the call, the

Page periodically repeats.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 276 -

Features

Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls, immediately rerouted. This means that Park and Page will activate for ringing Intercom calls, DID calls and DISA calls. It will also activate for calls transferred from the Automated Attendant. Additionally, calls from the Automated Attendant follow Automatic

Overflow routing if not picked up. Park and Page will activate for transferred outside calls but not play the

Personal Greeting to the caller. If a call comes in when the specified Page zone is busy, the system broadcasts the announcement when the zone becomes free.

Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance)

Automated Attendant automatically answers outside calls, plays a pre-recorded greeting and then lets the outside callers directly dial system extensions, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. Automated Attendant provides immediate answering and routing of outside calls without the need for an operator or dispatcher.

Automated Attendant provides:

Single Digit Dialling

Single Digit Dialling allows Automated Attendant callers to dial extensions, Department

Calling Groups, and Voice Mail by pressing a single digit. For example, your Automated

Attendant can greet calls with, “Thank you for calling. To place an order, dial 1. To check on an

existing order, dial 2. To speak with an operator, dial 9.”

You can set up single digit Dialling for each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls via the Automated Attendant.

This allows you to set up day/night/holiday greetings or unique greetings for each incoming trunk. (Keep in mind that, with a default system, if you assign destinations to digits 3, 4 and

5, outside callers will not be able to dial system extensions.)

Simultaneous Call Answering

With VRS installed, the Automated Attendant can answer up to 16 calls simultaneously.

Flexible Routing

The outside caller can directly dial any system extension, Department Calling Group or Voice

Mail. If the caller dials a busy extension, Automated Attendant allows them to dial another extension or wait for the busy extension to become free.

Automatic Overflow

Automatic Overflow can automatically redirect a call if it can’t go through. This can happen if all

VRS ports are busy, if the called extension doesn’t answer, or if the caller misdials or waits too long to dial. (This would occur if the caller is using a dial pulse telephone.) When the call overflows, it rings a designated Ring Group or the Voice Mail system.

Programmable Automated Attendant Greetings

You can record a different greeting for each trunk answered by the Automated Attendant.

The greetings can be different in the day, at night or on holidays or weekends. You can also have a special greeting if the caller misdials. You record the greetings just the way you want.

For example, “Dial the three-digit extension number you wish to reach, dial 500 for Sales or

dial 600 for Customer Service.”

When assigning and recording Automated Attendant greetings, you can choose among the 48 VRS messages.

Voice Prompting Messages

The VRS feature provides the system with Voice Prompting Messages. These Voice Prompting Messages tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. For example, if a user calls extension 200 when it is busy, they hear, “Station 200 is busy. For Callback, dial 2.”

- 277 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Preamble Message

If the system has trunks that are part of the Caller Paid Service, the VRS can automatically play a pre-recorded message when a user answers the call. This pre-recorded message should describe the Caller Paid Service features and cost. The Preamble Message ensures that the caller is always aware that they have accessed a “pay- per-call” service. A system user cannot converse with the caller until the preamble message ends. If the caller hangs up before the message completes, they are not charged for the call. If the caller waits for the message to end, they can talk to a system user and call charging begins. The system will answer as many Caller Paid

Service calls as there are available VRS ports. If a Caller Paid Service calls comes in when all VRS ports are busy, the call will not appear on an extension until a VRS port is available.

You can also use the Caller Paid Service Preamble message to set up an Auto-Answer with Greeting application.

When a receptionist answers a call, the VRS can play a preamble message such as, “Welcome to ABC Company.

How can I help you?” When the caller replies, the receptionist answers, “One moment please,” and quickly extends the call to the desired party. This ensures that all incoming calls are answered quickly, courteously and consistently.

Time, Date and Station Number Check

If the system has a DSP daughter board installed for VRS, any system phone user can find out the time, date or the extension’s number while their phone is idle (on hook). The time and date check saves the user time since they don’t have to look for a clock or calendar. Hearing the extension number conveniently identifies non-display System Phones. To find out their extension number, the user presses 6 (for Number). To listen to the time and date, the user presses 8 (for Time).

Conditions

A) Park and Page announcements will only repeat once.

B) VRS message record time is fixed at 2 minutes and it cannot be change.

C) VRS Delay Message to a department group is only played when all parts in the group are

busy

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys

For one-button access to the Call Forwarding (device) setup code ( *4 713), assign a Call Forwarding (Device) key (code 17).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

20-07-13 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - VRS Record

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to record, erase and listen to VRS messages.

20-07-14 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - VRS General Message Listen

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial 4 or

Service Code 111 711 and listen to their General Message.

20-07-15 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - VRS General Message Record

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial

Service Code 112 712 and record, listen to and erase the General Message.

20-11-15 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - VRS Personal Greeting

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial

Service Code *4 713 7 to record, listen to or erase a Personal Greeting. This option also affects Park and Page.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 278 -

Features

22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

For each Night Service mode, enter 1 if trunk should be automatically answered by VRS

Automated Attendant.

22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Assign extensions to the Ring Group programmed in 25-03 and 25-04 that should receive the rerouted calls.

22-14-XX : VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG

Define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS

Waiting Message.

22-15-XX : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group

Define for each Department (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Waiting Message.

24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time

Set how long a telephone with Personal Greeting options 2 or 6 enabled will ring before the call reroutes to the programmed destination.

25-02-01 : DID/DISA VRS Error Message

For each Night Service mode, enter 1 if trunk should be automatically answered by VRS.

25-03-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialling

Set the destination that Automated Attendant (OPA) calls ring if the OPA caller dials an incorrect extension number. This also sets the options for DISA calls. The system allows Ring

Groups=1-25, VRS=15, DSPDB Voice Mail=101, In-Skin Voice Mail=102 or Disconnect=0.

25-04-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy

Set the destination that Automated Attendant (OPA) calls ring if the OPA caller dials an extension that doesn’t answer or is busy. This also sets the options for DISA calls. The system allows Ring Groups=1-25, VRS=15, DSPDB Voice Mail=101, or Disconnect=0.

25-05-01 : DID/DISA Error Message Assignment

For each trunk that will be answered by the VRS, enter the VRS message (1-16) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly after answer. If you enter 0, the call reroutes according to

Program 25-03 and Program 25-04. Make one entry for each Night Service mode.

25-06-02 : DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup

Set up single digit dialling for Automated Attendant callers. For each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls (see Program 2205) , specify

The digit the Automated Attendant caller dials (1-12, where 10=0, 11=* and 12=#). (Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits 3 and 4, outside callers will not be able to dial system extensions.)

The destination reached (four digits maximum) when the caller dials the single digit code.

25-07-02 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DID/DISA No Answer Time

If an Automated Attendant (OPA) caller dials an extension that doesn’t answer, the call will wait this interval before rerouting to the Ring Group specified in Program 25-03 and 25-04.

This setting also affects unanswered DISA calls.

25-13-01 : System Option for DISA - VRS Password

Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system will allow them to record, listen to or erase VRS messages.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 279 -

Features

31-02-01 : Internal Paging Group Assignment - Internal Paging Group Number

When using Park and Page, assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones. An extension must be assigned to a 2-digit zone in order to access any of the 2-digit zones (Internal Page Zones 0,

1-6, 00, 01-32).

31-04-01 : External Paging Zone Group

When using Park and Page, assign each External Paging Zone (1-6) to an External Paging

Group (1-8) used for accessing the zone.

31-07-01 : Combined Paging Assignments

When using Park and Page, for each External Paging Zone (1-6 and 0 for All Call), assign a corresponding Internal Zone for Combined Paging.

40-10-01 : Voice Announcement Service Option - VRS Fixed Message

Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to play the fixed VRS messages (such as “You have a message.”).

40-10-02 : Voice Announcement Service Option - General Message Number

Enter the number of the VRS message you want to use for the General Message (01-48). The message you select should not be used as a VRS message.

40-10-03 : Voice Announcement Service Option - VRS No Answer Destination

When all VRS ports are busy, incoming DILs and DISA calls wait for the VRS No-Answer

Time (Program 40-10-04) and then ring the VRS No Answer Destination Ring Group.

40-10-04 : Voice Announcement Service Option - VRS No-Answer Time

If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the extension will wait this interval for a VRS port to become free. If a VRS port is still not available, the call will ring the VRS No Answer Destination set in Program 40-10-03.

40-10-05 : Voice Announcement Service Option - Park and Page Repeat Timer

If a Park and Page is not picked up within this interval, the Paging announcement repeats.

40-11-01 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment

For each trunk that should have the Preamble option, enter the number of the VRS message

(1-48) that is your recorded preamble message. Enter 0 for no preamble.

Related Features

Voice Mail

Park and Page and Personal Greeting can also be programmed in the VRS.

Operation

VRS Messages

To Record a VRS Message:

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 716.

3.

Dial 7 (Record).

4.

Dial the message number (01-48).

Ensure that the message number selected is not used for other VRS functions.

5.

Record your message, after the beep.

Normally, your message cannot exceed 16 seconds. If you hear, “Recording finished,” you have exceeded

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 280 -

Features

the allowed message length.

6.

Press # to end the recording.

7.

Hang up.

To Listen to a Recorded Message:

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 716.

3.

Dial 5 (Listen).

4.

Dial the message number (01-48).

You’ll hear the previously recorded message. If you hear a beep instead, there is no previous message

recorded.

5.

Press # to listen to the message again.

6.

Repeat from step 3 to listen to another message.

7.

Hang up.

To Erase a Recorded Message:

1.

Press SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 716.

3.

Dial 3 (Erase).

4.

Dial the message number (01-48).

5.

Press HOLD (system phone only) to cancel the procedure without erasing (and return to step 3).

6.

Hang up to erase the message.

To Record, Listen to or Erase a VRS Message via DISA:

1.

Place a call into the system.

2.

After the system answers, dial the DISA password (default=000000).

3.

Dial 716 and the VRS password.

4.

Dial the function you want.

7 = Record

5 = Listen

3 = Erase

5.

Dial the message number (01-48).

6.

Record the message and press # to end recording.

If you dialled 7 to record, you can dial # to listen to the message you just recorded.

If you dialled 5 to listen, you can dial 5 and message number to hear it again or if you want to record,

listen to or erase another message, go to step 4.

If you dialled 3 to erase, you must go to step 7 (hang up).

7.

Hang up.

VRS Message Numbers:

By default, VRS message numbers are not assigned. Enter into the table below the message numbers which have been assigned to common VRS messages in your system.

Message Name

Message No.

(01~48)

Automated Attendant

Guidance Message

General Message

Preamble Message

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 281 -

Features

General Message

To Listen to the General Message:

System Phone

Your MW LED flashes when there is a new General Message. A voice message periodically reminds you.

1.

While telephone is idle, dial 4.

-OR-

1.

Press the SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 711.

3.

Listen to the General Message.

Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have an unanswered “Message Waiting” requests or new messages in your “Voice Mail” mailbox.

Single Line Telephone

1.

Press the SPK key or lift the handset.

2.

Dial 712.

3.

Dial 5 (Listen).

4.

Listen to message.

5.

Dial 5 again to repeat.

6.

Hang up.

To Record the General Message:

1.

Press the SPK key or lift the handset.

2.

Dial 712.

3.

Dial 7 (Record).

4.

Record message, then dial # when finished.

5.

Hang up.

To Erase the General Message:

1.

Press the SPK key or lift the handset.

2.

Dial 712.

3.

Dial 3 (Erase).

4.

Press HOLD to cancel without erasing (System Phone only).

5.

Hang up.

Personal Greeting

To enable a Personal Greeting:

1.

Press the SPK key or lift handset, and

Dial 713.

-OR-

Press the Call Forwarding (Device) key (SC 851:17).

2.

Dial 7.

3.

Record your Personal Greeting, or if you already have Personal Greeting or Park and Page set up, you can dial:

7 to re-record

5 to listen (then # to listen again)

3 to erase (press HOLD to cancel erase)

4.

Dial # + Personal Greeting condition:

2 = Busy/No Answer

4 = Immediate All Calls

6 = No Answer

5.

Dial the destination to receive your calls. The destination can be:

A co-worker’s extension.

Your Voice Mailbox (by dialling the Voice Mail master number).

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 282 -

Features

Off-premise via Common Abbreviated Dialling (by entering 813 + bin).

Greeting without forwarding so caller hears busy (by entering your extension number).

You cannot forward to a Department Group pilot number.

6.

Dial Personal Greeting type:

2 = All calls

3 = Outside calls only

4 = Intercom calls only

7.

Hang up.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated.

To cancel your Personal Greeting:

1.

Press the SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 713 + 73.

3.

Hang up.

Park and Page

To have the System Page you when you have a Call:

1.

Press the SPK key or lift handset, and

Dial 713.

-OR-

Press the Call Forwarding (Device) key (SC 851:17).

2.

Dial 7.

3.

Record your Personal Greeting, or if you already have Park and Page or Personal Greeting set up, you can dial:

7 to re-record

5 to listen (then # to listen again)

3 to erase (press HOLD to cancel erase)

4.

Dial #7.

5.

Record your Page Message.

6.

Dial # + Paging Zone Access Code.

E.g. Internal Zone 1 = 801 + 1.

External Zone 1 = 803 + 1.

Combined Zone 1 = 751 + 1.

7.

Dial Park and Page type:

2 = All calls

3 = Outside calls only

8.

Hang up.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated.

To Pick Up your Park and Page:

1.

Press the SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 715 + Your Extension Number.

To Cancel your Park and Page:

1.

Press the SPK key or lift handset.

2.

Dial 713 + 73.

3.

Hang up.

Preamble Message

To Answer a Call with Preamble Message:

1.

Answer the ringing call and wait for the preamble message to finish.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 283 -

Features

The line key turns solid red as the system automatically plays the preamble message to the caller.

2.

When you hear two beeps and the line key turns green, converse with the caller.

Checking Time/Date & Station Number

System Phone Only

To listen to the Station Number:

1.

While telephone is idle, dial 6.

To listen to the Time/Date:

1.

While telephone is idle, dial 8.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 284 -

Features

Volume Controls

Description

Each system phone user can control the volume of incoming ringing, splash tone, Paging, Background Music,

Handsfree and your handset. System Phones consolidate all adjustments into the volume buttons. Pressing the

VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN will adjust the volume level for whichever feature is active (outside call,

ICM, ICM ringing, paging, etc.). Pressing these keys when the phone is idle will adjust the contrast level of the telephone’s display. The users should set the volumes for their most comfortable levels.

Conditions

The contrast is not adjustable when the phone has background music enabled.

Default Setting

Enabled.

Programming

None

Related Features

None

Operation

To adjust the volume of incoming ringing and splash tone:

1. If the phone is idle, dial 829. If the phone is ringing, skip to Step 2.

2. Press VOLUME or VOLUME

.

To adjust the volume of incoming Paging announcements, Handsfree, the handset or

Background Music:

1. Press VOLUME or VOLUME

.

The feature must be active to change the volume. Pressing the volume keys when the phone is idle will adjust the display’s contrast.

- 285 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Features

Warning Tone For Long Conversation

Description

The system can broadcast warning tones to a trunk caller warning them that they have been on the call too long.

The tones are just a reminder -- the user can disregard the tones and continue talking if they choose. The outside caller does not hear the warning tones. In addition, warning tones do not occur for Intercom calls and most incoming trunk calls. DISA trunks can also have warning tones. Warning tones are not available to analogue single line telephone (SLT) users.

There are two types of warning tones: Alarm Tone 1 and Alarm Tone 2. Alarm Tone 1 is the first set of tones that occur after the user initially places a trunk call. Alarm Tone 2 broadcasts periodically after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder. Each alarm tone consists of three short beeps.

Warning Tone for DISA Callers

For DISA callers, with this feature enabled, the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter-digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered.

With this feature enabled, the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter-digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered.

If an outside call is transferred to forwarded off-premise using an outside trunk, the warning tone timer begins immediately. This will occur only if either trunk involved in the call is programmed for this feature (Program

14-01-17). When transferring a trunk call off-premise, Program 14-01-13 must be enabled (set to ‘1’).

Conditions

None

Default Setting

Disabled.

Programming

14-01-17 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for Long Conversation Alarm

Determine whether DISA callers should hear the Warning Tone for Long Conversations

(0=disabled, 1=enabled).

20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

20-13-01 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Long Conversation Alarm

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Warning Tone for Long

Conversation.

20-21-01 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Alarm 1

After a user places a trunk call, the system sends the first warning tone to their extension after this interval (0-64800 seconds).

20-21-02 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Alarm 2

After hearing the first warning tone, the system sends additional warning tones after this interval (0- 64800 seconds). The warning tones continue, spaced by this interval, until the user hangs up.

Xen Topaz Software Manual

- 286 -

Features

21-01-03 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)

Determine the length of time the system should wait before starting the Warning Tone Timer.

25-07-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time

Determine the length of time the system should wait before the Warning Tone is heard by

DISA callers (0-64800 seconds). If an outside call is transferred or forwarded off-premise using an outside trunk, this timer starts immediately. This will occur if either trunk involved in the call is programmed for the Warning Tone (Program 14-01-17).

25-07-08 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Long Conversation Disconnect

Determine how long after the Warning Tone is heard the system will wait before disconnecting DISA calls.

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering

Central Office Calls, Placing / Toll Restriction

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Intercom

Long Conversation Cutoff

Single Line Telephones

Operation

Warning Tone for Long Conversation is automatic if programmed.

- 287 -

Xen Topaz Software Manual

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project